Emerson Process Management Electric Co Whiteboard Accessories 3 9000 522 Users Manual 00522

3-9000-522 to the manual 5023104b-7e4a-48af-a858-6c4528d4e039

2015-02-06

: Emerson-Process-Management Emerson-Process-Management-Emerson-Process-Management-Emerson-Electric-Co-Whiteboard-Accessories-3-9000-522-Users-Manual-540160 emerson-process-management-emerson-process-management-emerson-electric-co-whiteboard-accessories-3-9000-522-users-manual-540160 emerson-process-management pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 516

DownloadEmerson-Process-Management Emerson-Process-Management-Emerson-Process-Management-Emerson-Electric-Co-Whiteboard-Accessories-3-9000-522-Users-Manual- 00522  Emerson-process-management-emerson-process-management-emerson-electric-co-whiteboard-accessories-3-9000-522-users-manual
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
MON2000
Software for Gas Chromatographs
User Manual

Applies to Both:
Daniel Danalyzer On-Line Gas Chromatographs
Rosemount Analytical Process Gas Chromatographs

Part Number 3-9000-522

Revision R
JULY 2010

MON2000 Software for Gas Chromatographs
Manual
NOTICE
DANIEL MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL, INC.
AND ROSEMOUNT ANALYTICAL
(COLLECTIVELY, “SELLER”) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR TECHNICAL OR EDITORIAL ERRORS IN
THIS MANUAL OR OMISSIONS FROM THIS MANUAL. SELLER MAKES NO WARRANTIES,
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH RESPECT TO THIS MANUAL AND, IN NO EVENT,
SHALL SELLER BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF PRODUCTION, LOSS OF PROFITS, ETC.
PRODUCT NAMES USED HEREIN ARE FOR MANUFACTURER OR SUPPLIER IDENTIFICATION
ONLY AND MAY BE TRADEMARKS/REGISTERED TRADEMARKS OF THESE COMPANIES.
THE CONTENTS OF THIS PUBLICATION ARE PRESENTED FOR INFORMATIONAL PURPOSES
ONLY, AND WHILE EVERY EFFORT HAS BEEN MADE TO ENSURE THEIR ACCURACY, THEY
ARE NOT TO BE CONSTRUED AS WARRANTIES OR GUARANTEES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS OR SERVICES DESCRIBED HEREIN OR THEIR USE OR
APPLICABILITY. WE RESERVE THE RIGHT TO MODIFY OR IMPROVE THE DESIGNS OR
SPECIFICATIONS OF SUCH PRODUCTS AT ANY TIME.
SELLER DOES NOT ASSUME RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE SELECTION, USE OR MAINTENANCE
OF ANY PRODUCT. RESPONSIBILITY FOR PROPER SELECTION, USE AND MAINTENANCE OF
ANY SELLER PRODUCT REMAINS SOLELY WITH THE PURCHASER AND END-USER.
DANIEL AND THE DANIEL LOGO ARE REGISTERED TRADEMARKS OF DANIEL MEASUREMENT
AND CONTROL, INC. ROSEMOUNT AND THE ROSEMOUNT ANALYTICAL LOGO ARE
REGISTERED TRADEMARKS OF ROSEMOUNT ANALYTICAL. THE EMERSON LOGO IS A
TRADEMARK AND SERVICE MARK OF EMERSON ELECTRIC CO.

COPYRIGHT © 2010 BY DANIEL MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL, INC., HOUSTON, TEXAS,
U.S.A.
All rights reserved. No part of this work may be reproduced or copied in any form or by any
means - graphic, electronic, or mechanical — without first receiving the written permission of
Daniel Measurement and Control, Inc. Houston, Texas, U.S.A.

WARRANTY
1. LIMITED WARRANTY: Subject to the limitations contained in Section 2 herein and except as
otherwise expressly provided herein, Daniel Measurement and Control, Inc. and Rosemount
Analytical, (collectively“Seller”) warrants that the firmware will execute the programming
instructions provided by Seller, and that the Goods manufactured or Services provided by Seller
will be free from defects in materials or workmanship under normal use and care until the
expiration of the applicable warranty period. Goods are warranted for twelve (12) months from
the date of initial installation or eighteen (18) months from the date of shipment by Seller,
whichever period expires first. Consumables and Services are warranted for a period of 90 days
from the date of shipment or completion of the Services. Products purchased by Seller from a
third party for resale to Buyer ("Resale Products") shall carry only the warranty extended by the
original manufacturer. Buyer agrees that Seller has no liability for Resale Products beyond making
a reasonable commercial effort to arrange for procurement and shipping of the Resale Products. If
Buyer discovers any warranty defects and notifies Seller thereof in writing during the applicable
warranty period, Seller shall, at its option, promptly correct any errors that are found by Seller in
the firmware or Services, or repair or replace F.O.B. point of manufacture that portion of the
Goods or firmware found by Seller to be defective, or refund the purchase price of the defective
portion of the Goods/Services. All replacements or repairs necessitated by inadequate
maintenance, normal wear and usage, unsuitable power sources, unsuitable environmental
conditions, accident, misuse, improper installation, modification, repair, storage or handling, or
any other cause not the fault of Seller are not covered by this limited warranty, and shall be at
Buyer's expense. Seller shall not be obligated to pay any costs or charges incurred by Buyer or
any other party except as may be agreed upon in writing in advance by an authorized Seller representative. All costs of dismantling, reinstallation and freight and the time and expenses of
Seller's personnel for site travel and diagnosis under this warranty clause shall be borne by Buyer
unless accepted in writing by Seller. Goods repaired and parts replaced during the warranty
period shall be in warranty for the remainder of the original warranty period or ninety (90) days,
whichever is longer. This limited warranty is the only warranty made by Seller and can be
amended only in a writing signed by an authorized representative of Seller. Except as otherwise
expressly provided in the Agreement, THERE ARE NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, AS TO MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, OR ANY OTHER MATTER WITH RESPECT TO ANY OF THE GOODS OR SERVICES. It
is understood that corrosion or erosion of materials is not covered by our guarantee.
2. LIMITATION OF REMEDY AND LIABILITY: SELLER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES
CAUSED BY DELAY IN PERFORMANCE. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR BREACH OF
WARRANTY HEREUNDER SHALL BE LIMITED TO REPAIR, CORRECTION, REPLACEMENT OR
REFUND OF PURCHASE PRICE UNDER THE LIMITED WARRANTY CLAUSE IN SECTION 1
HEREIN. IN NO EVENT, REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE CLAIM OR CAUSE OF ACTION
(WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, INFRINGEMENT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, OTHER
TORT OR OTHERWISE), SHALL SELLER'S LIABILITY TO BUYER AND/OR ITS CUSTOMERS
EXCEED THE PRICE TO BUYER OF THE SPECIFIC GOODS MANUFACTURED OR SERVICES
PROVIDED BY SELLER GIVING RISE TO THE CLAIM OR CAUSE OF ACTION. BUYER AGREES
THAT IN NO EVENT SHALL SELLER'S LIABILITY TO BUYER AND/OR ITS CUSTOMERS EXTEND
TO INCLUDE INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES. THE TERM
"CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES" SHALL INCLUDE, BUT NOT BE LIMITED TO, LOSS OF
ANTICIPATED PROFITS, LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF REVENUE AND COST OF CAPITAL.

IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS
•

Read all instructions prior to installing, operating, and servicing this product.

•

Follow all warnings, cautions, and instructions marked on and supplied with this product.

•

Inspect the equipment packing case and if damage exists, notify your local carrier for
liability.

•

Open the packing list and carefully remove equipment and spare or replacement parts
from the case. Inspect all equipment for damage and missing parts.

•

If items are damaged or missing, contact the manufacturer at 1 (713) 827-6314 for
instructions about receiving replacement parts.

•

Install equipment as specified per the installation instructions and per applicable local and
national codes. All connections shall be made to proper electrical and pressure sources.

•

Ensure that all equipment doors are closed and protective covers are in place, except
when maintenance is being performed by qualified persons, to prevent personal injury.

•

Use of this product for any purpose other than its intended purpose may result in property
damage and/or serious injury or death.

•

Before opening the flameproof enclosure in a flammable atmosphere, the electrical
circuits must be interrupted.

•

Repairs must be performed using only authorized replacement parts as specified by the
manufacturer. Use of unauthorized parts can affect the product's performance and place
the safe operation of the product at risk.

•

When installing or servicing ATEX-certified units, the ATEX approval applies only to
equipment without cable glands. When mounting the flameproof enclosures in a
hazardous area, only flameproof cable glands certified to IEC 60079-1 must be used.

•

Technical assistance is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week by calling 1 (713) 8276314.

This page is intentionally left blank.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION

INSTALLATION AND
SETUP

1.1

Description of Manual ....................................1-1
Section 1 – Introduction ................................1-1
Section 2 – Installation and Startup .................1-2
Section 3 – Getting Started ............................1-2
Section 4 – Control Functions.........................1-2
Section 5 – Application Functions ...................1-3
Section 6 – Chromatogram Viewer ..................1-3
Section 7 – Reports.......................................1-3
Section 8 – Logs...........................................1-3
Section 9 – Data Collection ............................1-4
Section 10 – Modbus Test .............................1-4
Appendix A, PC Config Report ........................1-5
Appendix B, Component Data Table ................1-5
Appendix C, Data Computations .....................1-5
Appendix D, Analog Output
Cal. 2350A GC .............................................1-5
Appendix E, Upgrade 2350A GC
S/W and 2350 EPROMS.................................1-5
Appendix F, Modbus Reg. List for 2350A GC ...1-5

1.2

Description of Online Help ..............................1-6

1.3

Description of MON2000 ...............................1-6

2.1

System Requirements ....................................2-1

2.2

Installing MON2000 ......................................2-3

2.3

Installing the CrypKey License Service for
MON2000 PLUS ...........................................2-4

2.4

Copying MON2000 to Disks ...........................2-4

2.5

Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License ...........2-6

2.6

Uninstalling MON2000................................. 2-15

2.7

Starting MON2000...................................... 2-17

2.8

Performing Your First Logon ......................... 2-18

ii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

MON2000

2.8.1

The Initial Logon ......................................... 2-18

2.8.2

Registering MON2000 ................................. 2-19

2.8.3

Update MON2000....................................... 2-21

2.9

Checklist for Setting Up MON2000 ............... 2-22

2.10

Communications ......................................... 2-22

2.10.1 Connect to the GC Unit ............................... 2-22
2.10.2 Disconnect from GC Unit ............................. 2-23
2.11

Customizing MON2000................................ 2-24

2.11.1 Configure Users .......................................... 2-24
2.11.2 Set Up GC Directory.................................... 2-27
2.11.3 Dial-up Connection ...................................... 2-30
2.11.4 Modem Initialization Strings/Setup................. 2-36
Black Box - Modem 325............................... 2-37
U.S. Robotics Sportster ............................... 2-38
GVC/MaxTech 28.8 Kbps Modem ................. 2-40
2.12

2350 to 2350A Retrofit Instructions ............. 2-41

2.13

Conversion Process ..................................... 2-43

2.14

BASIC 2350A CONFIGURATION ................... 2-49

2.15

2350A Options ........................................... 2-52

2.15.1 The COM4A Board ...................................... 2-52
2.15.2 2350A Modem Installation ........................... 2-55
2.15.3 2350A Ethernet Installation .......................... 2-58
2.15.4 Ethernet TCP/IP Settings .............................. 2-62
2.15.5 MON2000 TCP/IP Settings ........................... 2-64
2.16

CONNECT VIA GC EXTERNAL MODEM ......... 2-66

2.16.1 Hardware Setup .......................................... 2-66
2.16.2 Select Program Settings............................... 2-68
2.16.3 Generate PC Config Report........................... 2-70

Installation and Setup

JULY 2010

TABLE OF CONTENTS

MON2000

iii

2.17

Downloading an Application ......................... 2-72

2.18

Upgrading Flash .......................................... 2-75

2.19

Offline Edit of GC Application ....................... 2-76

2.19.1 File Selection .............................................. 2-77
2.19.2 Upload Application ...................................... 2-78
2.19.3 Upload BOS................................................ 2-81
GETTING STARTED

CONTROL FUNCTIONS

JULY 2010

3.1

Logging On...................................................3-1

3.2

Logging Off ..................................................3-3

3.3

MON2000 User Interface ...............................3-3

3.3.1

Main Window ...............................................3-4

3.3.2

GC Status Bar...............................................3-5

3.3.3

View Menu...................................................3-8

3.3.4

ToolTips.......................................................3-8

3.3.5

Data Entry and Function Features....................3-8

3.3.6

Shortcut to Save or Print Data ........................3-9

3.4

Keyboard Shortcuts .......................................3-9

3.5

Procedures Guide ........................................ 3-11

3.6

Keylock Switch Control................................ 3-15

3.7

Configuring Your Printer ............................... 3-16

3.8

Using Online Help........................................ 3-18

3.9

Operating Modes for Model 700.................... 3-19

3.10

About MON2000 ........................................ 3-19

4.1

Auto Sequence .............................................4-1

4.2

Single Stream ...............................................4-2

4.3

Halt .............................................................4-3

Getting Started

iv

TABLE OF CONTENTS

APPLICATION
FUNCTIONS

Application Functions

MON2000

4.4

Calibration.................................................... 4-4

4.5

Baseline Run................................................. 4-5

4.6

Auto BTU Start Up and Valve Timing............... 4-7

4.6.1

Initiating an Auto BTU Start Up Run ................ 4-7

4.6.2

Starting a Valve Timing Run ......................... 4-12

4.7

GC Time .................................................... 4-13

4.7.1

View GC Time ............................................ 4-13

4.7.2

Set GC Time............................................... 4-14

4.8

Stop Now .................................................. 4-15

5.1

System ........................................................ 5-1

5.2

Component Data ........................................... 5-6

5.2.1

Select Standard Component(s)...................... 5-10

5.2.2

Select Standard Values ................................ 5-11

5.2.3

Update Standard Component(s) .................... 5-11

5.2.4

View Raw Data........................................... 5-12

5.2.5

Sort Retention Time .................................... 5-14

5.3

Timed Events ............................................. 5-14
Timed Events Description............................. 5-14
Valve Events .............................................. 5-15
Integration Events ....................................... 5-15
Spectrum Gain Events ................................. 5-16

5.4

User Defined .............................................. 5-19

5.4.1

Numeric ..................................................... 5-19

5.4.2

Selection.................................................... 5-20

5.4.3

Text Strings ............................................... 5-20

5.5

Calculations ............................................... 5-21

5.5.1

Control ...................................................... 5-21

5.5.2

Averages ................................................... 5-23

JULY 2010

TABLE OF CONTENTS

MON2000

v

5.5.3

User Defined .............................................. 5-25

5.6

Limit Alarms ............................................... 5-27
Limit Alarms Description .............................. 5-30

5.7

Discrete Alarms .......................................... 5-31

5.7.1

Delayed Discrete Alarms .............................. 5-33

5.8

Streams ..................................................... 5-38

5.9

Analog Inputs ............................................. 5-44

5.10

Analog Outputs........................................... 5-48

5.10.1 Analog Output Dialog Description.................. 5-48
5.10.2 Changing a Variable..................................... 5-52
5.10.3 Changing the Bargraph................................. 5-52
5.10.4 Performing a Manual Calibration .................... 5-53
5.10.5 Performing an Automated Calibration............. 5-54
5.11

Discrete Inputs ........................................... 5-56

5.12

Discrete Outputs ......................................... 5-57

5.13

Valves ....................................................... 5-58

5.14

Temperature Control.................................... 5-61

5.15

FID Configuration ........................................ 5-62

5.16

LOI Status Variables .................................... 5-66

5.17

Serial Ports................................................. 5-68

5.17.1 Serial Ports Configuration ............................. 5-71
5.18

GC Serial Port and Cable Configurations......... 5-74

5.18.1 GC DB-9 Serial to External Modem DB-25 ...... 5-76
5.18.2 GC Phoenix Plug to External Modem DB-25 .... 5-77
5.18.3 Com ID ...................................................... 5-78
5.18.4 Registers.................................................... 5-80

JULY 2010

Application Functions

vi

TABLE OF CONTENTS

MON2000

5.18.5 Setting Optional Base Pressures .................... 5-86
5.18.6 Setting Optional Base Results ....................... 5-90

CHROMATOGRAM
VIEWER

Chromatogram Viewer

5.19

TCP/IP, Subnet, and Gateway Menu .............. 5-94

6.1

Chromatogram Viewer Function ...................... 6-1

6.2

Viewing a Live Chromatogram ........................ 6-2

6.2.1

From Online GC ............................................ 6-2

6.2.2

From GC Archive .......................................... 6-3

6.2.3

From File on Disk .......................................... 6-4

6.3

Removing a Chromatogram from View............. 6-8

6.4

Saving a Chromatogram to Disk ...................... 6-8

6.5

Graph Functions............................................ 6-9

6.5.1

Editing the Chromatogram Graph .................... 6-9

6.5.2

Changing Cursor Size .................................. 6-10

6.5.3

Printing the Chromatogram........................... 6-11

6.6

Chromatogram Functions ............................. 6-11

6.6.1

Editing the Chromatogram ............................ 6-12

6.6.2

Editing TEVs from CGM Viewer .................... 6-13

6.6.3

Editing Retention Times from CGM Viewer ..... 6-15

6.6.4

Editing TEVs from Cursor ............................. 6-15

6.6.5

Viewing the Chromatogram Results ............... 6-16

6.6.6

Entering a Description.................................. 6-18

6.6.7

Forcing a Calibration.................................... 6-19

6.6.8

Toggling TEVs and CGM Components ........... 6-19

6.7

Viewing Baseline Data ................................. 6-20

6.8

Viewing RAW Data ..................................... 6-21

6.9

Display Options .......................................... 6-21

JULY 2010

TABLE OF CONTENTS

MON2000

REPORTS

vii

7.1

Report Display ..............................................7-1

7.1.1

View Report from Live Data............................7-1

7.1.2

View Report from File ....................................7-4

7.1.3

Print Report ..................................................7-6

7.1.4

Save Report to Disk.......................................7-6

7.1.5

Report Contents............................................7-8
Analysis Report.............................................7-9
Raw Data Report......................................... 7-11
Calibration Report ....................................... 7-12
Final Calibration Report ................................ 7-13
Average Reports ......................................... 7-14
Sample 24-Hour Average Report ................... 7-14

7.2

GC Report Request...................................... 7-15

7.3

GC Printer Control ....................................... 7-16

7.4

MON2000 Printer Control............................. 7-18

7.5

Archive Data .............................................. 7-20

7.5.1

View Data Model 500/Model 700.................. 7-21

7.5.2

Archive Export Data .................................... 7-24

7.5.3

Reset......................................................... 7-27

7.6

Trend Data ................................................. 7-28

7.6.1

Trend Data Model 700/2350A GCs .............. 7-28

7.6.2

View Live Trend Online Model 700/2350A ..... 7-29

7.6.3

View Trend from File on Disk........................ 7-32

7.6.4

Edit Graph Display....................................... 7-34

7.6.5

Changing Cursor Size................................... 7-34

7.6.6

Describe Trend ........................................... 7-35

7.6.7

Print Trend ................................................. 7-35

7.6.8

Save Trend................................................. 7-36

7.6.9

Read Trend Archive ..................................... 7-36

7.6.10 Display Options........................................... 7-37

JULY 2010

Reports

viii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

LOGS

MON2000 PLUS DATA
COLLECTION/AUTOPOLLING

MON2000

8.1

Maintenance Log........................................... 8-1

8.2

Parameter List .............................................. 8-3

8.3

Alarm Log .................................................... 8-6

8.4

Clear or Acknowledge Active Alarms ............... 8-9

8.5

Event Log .................................................... 8-9

9.1

Overview ..................................................... 9-1

9.2

Data Collection Configuration ......................... 9-3

9.2.1

Create a New Polling Control File .................... 9-6

9.2.2

Open an Existing Polling Control File ................ 9-7

9.2.3

Await Command ........................................... 9-9

9.2.4

Connect/Logon Command ............................ 9-10

9.2.5

Connect/No Logon Command ....................... 9-11

9.2.6

Delay (Seconds) Command........................... 9-11

9.2.7

Delay (Hours) Command .............................. 9-12

9.2.8

Disconnect Command.................................. 9-13

9.2.9

End Command ............................................ 9-13

9.2.10 Poll Command: Alarms................................. 9-14
9.2.11 Poll Command: Averages ............................. 9-16
9.2.12 Poll Command: CGM Archive........................ 9-19
9.2.13 Poll Command: CGM on Alarm...................... 9-21
9.2.14 Poll Command: Condition Start ..................... 9-21
9.2.15 Poll Command: Condition End ....................... 9-23
9.2.16 Poll Command: Event Log ............................ 9-24
9.2.17 Poll Command: Maintenance Log .................. 9-26
9.2.18 Poll Command: Registers.............................. 9-28
9.2.19 Poll Command: Reports................................ 9-32
9.2.20 Repeat Command........................................ 9-34
9.2.21 Run Command ............................................ 9-35

Logs

JULY 2010

TABLE OF CONTENTS

MON2000

MODBUS TEST

ix

9.3

Data Collection ........................................... 9-35

9.3.1

Start Auto-Sequencing................................. 9-36

9.3.2

Transaction Log .......................................... 9-38

9.3.3

Auto-Sequencing Status............................... 9-38

9.3.4

Status Log ................................................. 9-39

10.1

Starting WinMB .......................................... 10-1

10.2

Establishing Communications........................ 10-2

10.2.1 Comparison of Modbus Protocols .................. 10-3
10.2.2 Set GC Com Parameters via MON2000.......... 10-4
10.2.3 Set Up Port via WinMB ................................ 10-5
10.3

Getting Modbus Data................................... 10-7

10.3.1 Use Single Data Type .................................. 10-9
10.3.2 Use Template (Mixed Data Types) ............... 10-10
10.4

Using Modbus Data ................................... 10-13

10.4.1 Set Log Parameters ................................... 10-14
10.4.2 Save Modbus Data .................................... 10-16
10.4.3 Assign Scale Ranges for User_Modbus......... 10-17
10.4.4 Print Modbus Data .................................... 10-17
10.5

Troubleshooting Communication Errors ........ 10-18

10.6

Using Modbus Test Online Help .................. 10-19

10.6.1 How to Access ......................................... 10-19
10.6.2 How to Navigate ....................................... 10-20
APPENDIX A, PC CONFIG
REPORT

A.1

How to Print................................................ A-1

A.2

Example Report............................................ A-2

C.1

Data Acquisition ...........................................C-1

APPENDIX B:
COMPONENT DATA
TABLE
APPENDIX C, DATA
COMPUTATIONS

JULY 2010

Modbus Test

x

TABLE OF CONTENTS

MON2000

C.2

Peak Detection .............................................C-2

C.3

Analysis Computations ..................................C-5

C.3.1

Conc. Analysis with Response Factor ..............C-5
Calibration....................................................C-5
Calc. in Mole Percent w/o Normalization ..........C-7

APPENDIX D, ANALOG
OUTPUT CAL. FOR 2350A

APPENDIX E, UPGRADE
2350A GC S/W AND
2350 EPROMS

C.4

Post Analysis Computations ...........................C-9

C.4.1

Liquid Equivalent Computations ......................C-9

C.4.2

Heating Value Calculations .............................C-9

C.4.3

Multi-Level Calibration .................................C-17

C.4.4

Indirect Calibration .....................................C-18

D.1

Calibrating by Volts .......................................D-1

D.2

Calibrating by Percentages .............................D-5

E.1

Connect to GC and Halt Analysis .................... E-1

E.2

Offline Edit to Upload App. & Rename ............. E-1

E.3

Upgrade User-Defined Applications.................. E-3

E.4

Upgrade from Disk ........................................ E-3

E.4.1

Upgrade from GC Controller ........................... E-6

E.4.2

Configure GC Connection............................... E-9

E.5

Disconnect Power and Disassemble............... E-10

E.6

Replace EPROMS/Reset CPU ........................ E-12

E.7

Reassembly Procedures ............................... E-13

E.8

Set-Up and Programming ............................. E-14

E.8.1

Procedure .................................................. E-14

E.8.2

Reprogramming the DiskOnChip .................... E-16

E.8.3

GC Reassembly........................................... E-17

Appendix D, Analog Output Cal. For 2350A

JULY 2010

TABLE OF CONTENTS

MON2000

xi

E.9

Connect to GC for Upgraded App. ................. E-18

E.10

Guide to Standard Application Files ............... E-19

E.10.1 Importance of Standard Application Files........ E-19
E.10.2 Standard Applications v1.50 and Later .......... E-20
E.10.3 Standard Applications Prior to v1.50 ............. E-22
APPENDIX F, MODBUS
REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC

JULY 2010

F.1

Introduction – SIM_2251 & User_Modbus ........ F-1

F.1.1

Notes on User_Modbus .................................. F-1

F.1.2

Notes on SIM_2251 Modbus .......................... F-2

F.2

User_Modbus Register List ............................. F-3

F.2.1

SIM_2251 Modbus Register List...................... F-6

Appendix F, Modbus Reg. List for 2350A GC

xii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

MON2000

This page is intentionally left blank.

Appendix F, Modbus Reg. List for 2350A GC

JULY 2010

INTRODUCTION

MON2000

1-1

INTRODUCTION
Welcome to the MON2000 User Manual
(P/N 3-9000-522), a user guide that
accompanies the MON2000 software produced
by Daniel Measurement and Control, Inc., a
Division of Emerson Process Management.
Use this manual for installing the MON2000
and Modbus Test (WinMB) software programs,
getting started, checking various gas
chromatograph (GC) application settings, and
configuring and monitoring your GC system.
1.1

DESCRIPTION OF MANUAL
See the following section summaries or the
Table of Contents for more information.
Section 1 – Introduction
This section includes:
• summary listing of the manual sections
• description of the MON2000 User Guide
online help file
• description of the MON2000 software
program

_________________________________________________________________________________________
JULY 2010

Description of Manual

1-2

INTRODUCTION

MON2000

Section 2 – Installation and Startup
This section includes:
• short description of the MON2000 software
• minimum system requirements for
installing MON2000 on a 32-bit Microsoft®
Windows® platform
• installation and Startup instructions
• establishing communications and Logon
procedures
• instructions for customizing MON2000 and
setting up security
• instructions for downloading an application
and using the Offline Edit function to
change an application’s configuration
Section 3 – Getting Started
This section includes:
• instructions on how to log on and log off
• navigation instructions for MON2000
• listing of available procedures and keyboard
shortcuts
• access and navigation instructions for the
MON2000 User Guide online help file
Section 4 – Control Functions
This section includes:
• description of available Control functions
and detailed step procedures

Description of Manual

JULY 2010

INTRODUCTION

MON2000

1-3

Section 5 – Application Functions
This section includes:
• description of available GC Application
functions and detailed step procedures
Section 6 – Chromatogram Viewer
This section includes:
• description of available Chromatogram
Viewer functions and detailed step
procedures to view, save, and print
chromatograms
Section 7 – Reports
This section includes:
• descriptions of available reports and sample
outputs
• instructions on how to generate and print a
given report
Section 8 – Logs
This section includes:
• description of Maintenance, Alarm, and
Event logs
• description of the Parameter List
• step procedures for viewing, editing, and
clearing logs

_________________________________________________________________________________________
JULY 2010

Description of Manual

1-4

INTRODUCTION

MON2000

Section 9 – Data Collection
This section includes:
• descriptions of Data Collection and AutoSequencing
• instructions on how to configure, generate
and run the Data Collection and AutoSequencing function using MON2000 PLUS
Section 10 – Modbus Test
This section includes:
• short description of the WinMB software
• minimum system requirements for
installing WinMB on a 32-bit Microsoft®
Windows® platform
• installation and start up instructions
• description of available Modbus Test
functions and detailed step procedures
• description of the WinMB online help file
and navigation instructions

Description of Manual

JULY 2010

MON2000

INTRODUCTION

1-5

Appendix A, PC Config Report
This appendix provides a sample PC Config
Report for reference only.
Appendix B, Component Data Table
This appendix provides two sample Component
Data Tables for reference only.
Appendix C, Data Computations
This appendix discusses the various equations
and computations involved with acquisition
and analysis tasks.
Appendix D, Analog Output
Cal. 2350A GC
This appendix demonstrates how to calibrate
an analog output for a 2350A GC Controller,
using the MON2000 software.
Appendix E, Upgrade 2350A GC
S/W and 2350 EPROMS
This appendix describes how to upgrade the GC
software and the 2350 GC Controller EPROMS,
the 2350A WinSystems CPU,
P/C104 Bus, and DiskOnChip.
Appendix F, Modbus Reg. List for 2350A GC
This appendix explains the differences between
SIM_2251 and User_Modbus protocols, and
lists the corresponding Modbus registers used
by the 2350A GC Controller.

_________________________________________________________________________________________
JULY 2010

Description of Manual

1-6

1.2

INTRODUCTION

MON2000

DESCRIPTION OF ONLINE HELP
Use the User Guide online help file to quickly
access information regarding any MON2000
function. See Section 3.8 for more detailed
information.

1.3

DESCRIPTION OF MON2000
MON2000 is a menu-driven, Windows-based
software program designed to operate the gas
chromatograph (GCs). MON2000 runs on an
IBM-compatible personal computer (PC) and
serves as an interface between you and the GC
unit. MON2000 can run on a Windows® 95,
Windows® 98, Windows® 2000, Windows® XP
or Windows® NT operating system.
MON2000, combined with the GC application(s), offers a complete software package for
operating and monitoring one or more GC
systems from a single PC. MON2000 includes
security features to help prevent unauthorized
access to GC data or control. MON2000 also
includes, for trouble-shooting purposes, an
auxiliary program (WinMB) to selectively poll
the GC Modbus registers (see Section 10 for
more information).
GC functions that can be initiated or controlled
by MON2000 include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

alarm parameters
alarm and event processing
analog scale adjustments
analyses
baseline runs
calculation assignments and configurations
calibrations
component assignments and configurations

Description of Online Help

When configured for RS-485
multi-drop networking,
MON2000 can interface with
up to 32 GC units, either in a
stand-alone configuration or via
a network.
When configured for
Ethernet networking MON2000
can interface with a number of
GC Units limited only by the
number of available TCP/IP
addresses.

JULY 2010

INTRODUCTION

MON2000

•
•
•
•
•
•

1-7

diagnostics
event sequences
halt operations
stream assignments and sequences
valve activations
timing adjustments

Reports that can be generated by MON2000
per the GC application:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

24-Hour Averages
Analysis
Calibration
Final Calibration
Hourly Averages
Monthly Averages
PC Configuration
Raw Data
Variable Averages
Weekly Averages

Logs that are maintained by MON2000:
•
•
•
•

Alarm Log
Event Log
Parameter List
Maintenance Log

_________________________________________________________________________________________
JULY 2010

Description of MON2000

1-8

INTRODUCTION

MON2000

This page is intentionally left blank.

Description of MON2000

JULY 2010

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

2-1

INSTALLATION AND SETUP
This section lists the system requirements to
run MON2000 and provides installation
procedures as well as initial logon instructions,
communications setup, and software
configuration.
2.1

SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
To achieve maximum performance when
running the MON2000 software, ensure your
PC system contains the following hardware.
• PC with a 486/90MHz or higher processor
(Pentium/100MHz or higher recommended)
running either
Windows® 95 (service pack 1 or better) or later
equipment and Microsoft® Windows® operating
system.

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 (or later) is required to view
spreadsheets or reports saved in HTML format.

If running Windows® 95 with the 2350A optional Ethernet
card, the user must download Socket 2 from
www.microsoft.com/windows95/downloads to utilize
MON2000’s ethernet feature.

JULY 2010

System Requirements

2-2

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

-

Windows® 98 version 1 or later

-

Windows® 2000 version 1 or later

-

Windows® XP version 1 or later (see note
for system requirements)
Windows® NT Server version 4 (service
pack 3 or later)

-

MON2000

Use the Settings>Control Panel>System/>General Page menu to check the system version
number.
For Windows® 95, the version number should be 4.00.950A/B or later.
For Windows® 98 or Windows® 2000, the version number should be 1 or later.
To use Windows® XP you need:
• Computer/Processor PC with 300 MHz or higher processor clock speed recommended;
• 233 MHz minimum required (single or dual processor system)
• *Intel® Pentium®/CeleronTM family, or AMD-K6®/AMD AthlonTM/AMD DuronTM family,
or compatible processor recommended.
• Memory: 128 MB of RAM or higher recommended (64 MB minimum supported; may limit
performance and some features).
• Hard Disk Minimum: 1.5 GB of available hard disk space.
For Windows® NT4, the version number should be 4.00.1381 or later.

• 16 megabytes (MB) of RAM (32 MB or
higher recommended)
• 5 MB of free hard disk space
• Super VGA monitor with 800x600
resolution
• free serial port for remote/local connection
to gas chromatograph (for online operations)
• free parallel port for connection to printer
• Windows® -compatible modem (for remote
connection only)
• Ethernet connection (when using Ethernet
networking)
System Requirements

JULY 2010

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

2.2

2-3

INSTALLING MON2000
To install MON2000, do the following:

If you are upgrading MON2000, you must install the new
software with same directory as the current version.

1. Either place the MON2000 CD in your
CD-ROM drive or insert Installation Disk 1
into your floppy drive.
2. Launch Windows® Explorer® by either:
• Clicking the
button (see the
taskbar) to access the Programs menu
option.
• Double-clicking the Windows® Explorer®
icon on your desktop.
3. Access either your CD-ROM drive or floppy
drive.
4. Double-click the file “setup.exe”.
5. The Installation Wizard begins. Follow the
instructions provided on each screen.
Upon successful installation, Windows®
automatically creates a MON2000 icon on
your desktop.

JULY 2010

Installing MON2000

2-4

2.3

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

INSTALLING THE CRYPKEY LICENSE SERVICE
FOR MON2000 PLUS
The CrypKey License Service must be installed
on all NT-based systems. If you try to run
MON2000 PLUS before installing the CrypKey
License Service, an error will result.

To install the CrypKey License Service, do the
following:
1. After installing MON2000 PLUS, the
program folder should display
automatically; if it doesn’t, open Windows®
Explorer® and access the MON2000 PLUS
program folder.
2. Double-click the SETUPEX.EXE file.
MON2000 PLUS can now be started. You have
30 days to evaluate the application. Once the
trial period expires, you must obtain a license
to continue to use MON2000 PLUS.
for more information, refer to the MON2000
PLUS Quick Start Guide (3-9000-743).
2.4

COPYING MON2000 TO DISKS
Use this procedure to copy the MON2000
installation files to 3 floppy disks for future
installation.

Installing the CrypKey License Service for MON2000 PLUS

JULY 2010

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

2-5

1. Label 3 blank formatted 3.5-inch floppy
disks “MON2000 Install Disk 1”, “MON2000
Install Disk 2”, and “MON2000 Install Disk
3”.
2. Place the MON2000 CD in your CD-ROM
drive.
3. Launch Windows® Explorer®.
4. Ensure that the Show all files option in
Windows® Explorer® is selected.
(a) Use the View > Folder Options menu to
access the Folder Options dialog.
(b) Click the View tab.

(c) In the Advanced Settings pane, find the
gray folder icon labeled Hidden Files.
(d) Click the Show all files radio button.
(e) Click the

button.

5. Use the Windows® Explorer® directory tree
to open the MON2000 Installation Files
folder on your CD.
6. Place the “MON2000 Install Disk 1” in your
floppy drive.
JULY 2010

Copying MON2000 to Disks

2-6

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

7. Open the Disk1 folder on your CD.
8. Copy all files from the Disk1 folder to the
“MON2000 Install Disk 1” floppy.
9. Remove the “MON2000 Install Disk 1” from
your floppy drive.
10. Repeat Steps 5 through 8 to copy the Disk2
and Disk3 folders to your “MON2000 Install
Disk 2” and “MON2000 Install Disk 3”
floppy disks.
11. Remove the MON2000 CD from your
CD-ROM drive.
2.5

TRANSFERRING A MON2000 PLUS LICENSE
To physically transfer the license file from one
computer to the other you will need a
removeable storage medium such as a 3.5-inch
floppy disk or a USB flash drive. Also, there
must be a licensed version on MON2000 PLUS
installed on the source computer and an
unlicensed version of MON2000 PLUS on the
targeted computer.
1. On the target computer, if using a floppy
disk, insert it into the disk drive; if using a
flash drive, insert it in to a USB slot.

Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License

JULY 2010

MON2000

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

2-7

2. Start MON2000 on the target computer.
The License Configuration screen displays.

3. Select Transfer in from another
computer... from the License menu. The

JULY 2010

Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License

2-8

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

Transfer License In (Step 1 of 3) screen
displays.

4. Click Browse to select a disk path to the
removeable storage medium that holds the
license file. Click OK to accept your
selection.

Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License

JULY 2010

MON2000

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

2-9

5. Click Next. The Transfer License In (Step 2
of 3) screen displays.

6. Remove the removeable storage medium
from the targeted computer and insert it
into the source computer.
7. Launch MON2000 PLUS on the source
computer. When the startup screen
displays, press Enter. The License

JULY 2010

Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License

2-10

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

Configuration screen displays with the
message “Unlimited license”.

8. Select Transfer out to another
computer... from the License menu of the

Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License

JULY 2010

MON2000

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

2-11

License Configuration screen. The Transfer
License Out (Step 1 of 2) screen displays.

9. Click Browse to select a disk path to the
removeable storage medium that holds the
license file. Click OK to accept your
selection.

JULY 2010

Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License

2-12

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

10. Click Next. The Transfer License Out (Step
2 of 2) screen displays.

Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License

JULY 2010

MON2000

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

2-13

11. Click Finish. MON2000 PLUS on the
source computer is no longer licensed.

12. Remove the removeable storage medium
from the source computer and reinsert it
into targeted computer.

JULY 2010

Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License

2-14

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

13. On the targeted computer, click Next on the
Transfer License In (Step 2 of 3) screen. The
Transfer License In (Step 3 of 3) screen
displays.

Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License

JULY 2010

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

2-15

14. Click Finish. The License Configuration
screen displays.

MON2000 PLUS is now licensed for unlimited
use on the targeted computer.
2.6

UNINSTALLING MON2000
To uninstall MON2000 using Windows® 95,
Windows® 98, Windows® 2000 or Windows®
NT,
1. Click the

JULY 2010

button (see the taskbar).

Uninstalling MON2000

2-16

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

2. Click Settings and then Control Panel. The
Control Panel dialog appears.

3. Double-click the Add/Remove Programs
icon.

If using Windows XP, click the Start button, then
Add/Remove Programs.

4. The Add/Remove Program Properties dialog
appears.

5. Select MON2000 and click the
button.
Uninstalling MON2000

JULY 2010

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

2-17

6. Windows® displays the following
confirmation dialog.

7. Click the
button to continue.
Windows® deletes the program files only.
Any files shared by other programs or
created by the user are not deleted.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the Add/Remove Program
Properties dialog.
2.7

STARTING MON2000
To start MON2000 after a successful
installation,
Use the Windows® Start menu (Start >
Programs >MON2000 menu) by clicking the
button.
Double-click the MON2000 icon automatically
created on your desktop during installation.

You cannot access the MON2000 functions
until you are successfully logged on.

To start MON2000 directly from the executable
file, use the directory you specified when
installing MON2000. Note that c:\Program

JULY 2010

Starting MON2000

2-18

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

Files\MON2000\MON2000 is the default
setting.

2.8

PERFORMING YOUR FIRST LOGON

2.8.1

The Initial Logon
Each new GC unit is shipped with one super
user named “Emerson”. After logon, ensure
that this user name appears in the Users list as
a super user (see Section 2.11.1).
To log on for the first time,
1. Start the MON2000 software program by
clicking the desktop icon or by using the
Windows® Start menu (see Section 2.7).

2. Click in the User Name data field.
3. Type emerson. Note that the user name is
not case-sensitive.

Performing Your First Logon

A PIN is not required for
the initial logon.

JULY 2010

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

2-19

4. When you have successfully logged on, the
MON2000 main window appears.

2.8.2

Registering MON2000
After your have successfully performed your
initial logon (see Section 2.8.1), MON2000
automatically prompts you to register your
copy of MON2000 software. An active Internet
connection is required for registration.
Registering your MON2000 software allows
you to receive information about free updates
and related products. A direct link to the
Emerson Internet website is provided via the
File > Update MON2000 menu.
You may choose to postpone registration. You
can register at any time via the File > Register
MON2000 menu.

JULY 2010

Registering MON2000

2-20

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

1. Use the File>Register MON2000 menu.
Follow the prompts in the Register
MON2000 dialog to input your name,
MON2000 serial number (located inside the
CD jewel case), and other relevant
information.

2. Click the

button to continue.

3. Choose the desired registration method by
clicking the corresponding radio button.
You must have an active
internet connection to
register via the website.

4. Click the

Registering MON2000

button.

JULY 2010

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

2.8.3

2-21

Update MON2000
Provided there is an active internet connection
to the computer on which MON2000 is
installed, clicking the File>Update MON2000
submenu sends the user to the Emerson®
Chromatograph Controllers website
(www.emersonprocess.com/daniel/products/GC/
Controllers/Productdetail.htm).

Updating the software
requires a previously installed,
registered copy of MON2000.

Use the File>Update MON2000 menu to
download the latest versions of MON2000 and
the BOS software programs.
To download the latest versions of the software,
1. Use the computer on which MON2000 is
installed and connect to the Internet.
Minimize the Internet window.
2. From MON2000, select the File>Update
MON2000 menu. This opens the Emerson
Chromatograph Controllers website
(www.emersonprocess.com/daniel/products/
GC/Controllers/Productdetail.htm).
3. From the Emerson Chromatograph
Controller website, you can download the
latest MON2000 and BOS updates, view
and/or download catalogs, brochures,
equipment specification sheets, product
manuals, drawings, application notes, and
white papers. Other links to products and
services are also available.

JULY 2010

Update MON2000

2-22

2.9

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

CHECKLIST FOR SETTING UP MON2000
To ensure optimum performance,
• Configure your system security (see
Section 2.11.1).
Verify that you have assigned a password to
the super user, and/or created a secure
system Admin account.
• Configure how MON2000 will save your
analytic and diagnostic information (see
Section 2.16.2).
• Establish communications between
MON2000 and the GC unit (see Section 2.10
and Section 5.17).

2.10

COMMUNICATIONS
MON2000 can communicate to the GC unit
locally via a serial port cable, Ethernet
connection, or remotely via a modem. If
performing a remote connection, ensure that
you have configured the PC modem first.
To configure the communication and serial port
settings for the GC unit, see Section 5.17.

2.10.1 Connect to the GC Unit
1. Use the File > Connect menu or click the
toolbar
icon to access the Select GC for
Connect menu.

2. Double-click the desired GC unit.

Checklist for Setting Up MON2000

JULY 2010

MON2000

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

2-23

3. MON2000 appears the connection status
dialog while dialing the selected unit.
If another user is already
connected to the GC, the unit
will “lock out” the second user.
When a PC connection is
active, the GC Controller front
panel will indicate a “System
Lockout”. This status times out
after 10 minutes.

The messages “Reading dictionary”,
“Reading GC Application data”’ and “Logon”
appears in the status bar and an
information screen appears.

Once connected, the name of the GC unit
displays in the lower left hand corner of the
MON2000 main window.
2.10.2 Disconnect from GC Unit
Use this process to terminate an active PC
connection to a GC unit.
The menu-driven procedure for disconnecting
is completely optional. MON2000 intelligently
and automatically disconnects when you exit
MON2000 or connect to a second GC
Controller.
1. Use the File > Disconnect menu or click the
toolbar
icon to access this function.
2. MON2000 automatically terminates all
open connections.

JULY 2010

Disconnect from GC Unit

2-24

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

A Terminating communications message
appears in the status bar.
If MON2000 does not detect an active
connection to terminate, an “Invalid
selection or not downloaded” message
appears.
2.11

CUSTOMIZING MON2000
Use the following functions to customize users,
the directory of GC applications, and PC
communications parameters.

2.11.1 Configure Users
Use this function to create new user accounts
or edit the existing account data. An extra level
of security is assigned to the File>Users
submenu. The File>Users submenu can only be
accessed by first entering a Password into a
dialog box titled 'Enter Administrator
Password'. After gaining access to the Users
dialog, the operator then has the ability to
create new user accounts or edit existing
account data. This feature is not available to
the 'Regular' and 'Read Only' user.
1. Use the File > Users menu to access this
function.
2. The Enter Administrator Password dialog
box appears.

Note that the default password admin is
not case sensitive. This password is used as
a security measure to deny unauthorized
Customizing MON2000

JULY 2010

MON2000

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

2-25

users access to the MON2000 Users
submenu, which allows Super users to add,
edit, or change security levels.
Click the
dialog appears.

button. Then the Users

3. Use the File>Change Administrator menu
to change the Administrator password.
The Change Administrator Password dialog
box appears.

Insert the old password, enter the new
password and confirm the change.
Then, click the
your changes.

JULY 2010

button to apply

Configure Users

2-26

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

4. To configure a new user or edit existing user
parameters,
(a) Click the appropriate Name cell and type
Super users can write changes
the desired user name.
to the GC unit, configure

Note that the user name is not caseMON2000, and access the
sensitive but punctuation (e.g., commas Users function.
or spaces) is preserved.
Regular and Read only users
(b) Click the appropriate Type cell and use
the provided combo box to select the
desired security level. Note that there
should be at least one Super user.
(c) Click the appropriate PIN cell and type
the desired PIN for this user. Note that
the PIN is limited to 12 numeric
characters.

can only view data.

If no PIN is entered, the user can log on
to the MON2000 software program or
the GC unit (via the front panel) with
the assigned user name – that is, no
password will be required.
5. To write user data to the online GC unit,
(a) Click the
or press
the F2 key.
(b) MON2000 writes the data to the GC
Controller.
6. Click the
button to apply your
changes and return to the main screen.
Click the
button to exit and
return to the main screen without applying
your changes.

Configure Users

JULY 2010

MON2000

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

2-27

2.11.2 Set Up GC Directory
Do not delete any currently
used applications from the GC
Directory. If an entry is
inadvertently deleted, you
may need to reinstall the
application software for that
GC.

This function allows you to set up a directory
listing of all GC units MON2000 can control for
this application. From the GC Directory, you
can configure the PC serial port communication
parameters for a specific GC unit.
Data entered in the GC Directory is stored in
the “Gcdir.dat” file (...\GC\BIN\). The Station
Name is the user assigned name to a GC
location. As GC applications are installed,
MON2000 adds the application name to the GC
Directory.
The GC unit name shown in the GC Status Bar
of the MON2000 main window is entered via
the System dialog (see Section 5.1).
To edit the GC directory,
1. Use the File > GC Directory menu to access
this function.
2. The GC Directory dialog appears.

JULY 2010

Set Up GC Directory

2-28

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

3. Press the F1 key to open the MON2000
Application help file for detailed
information about these settings.

4. MON2000 is configured with two default
directories:
• Default 1: parameters are set for 9600
baud rate
5. Default 2: parameters are set for 19200
baud rate.
6. Click the appropriate Com ID cell and type
the Modbus communication identification
number (set by DIP switch positions on the

Set Up GC Directory

JULY 2010

MON2000

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

2-29

GC Controller system interface board) for
the GC unit.
To successfully connect to the GC unit, the
COM IDs specified via the File>GC
Directory and the Application>Serial Ports
dialogs must match. See Section 5.17.1 for
more information.
7. Click the Comments cell to enter any helpful
information regarding a particular GC unit,
such as location or purpose.
8. Use the dynamic pull-down menus to select
the desired PC Port, Baud Rate, Data Bits,
Stop Bits, Parity, and Handshaking
settings.

The following parameters support an auto-detect
setting: Baud Rate, Data Bits, Stop Bits, Parity,
Protocol.
Set any of these parameters to “?” (autodetect) and
MON2000 will conform to the settings used by the GC
unit.

9. Use the provided cells to input RTS On
Delay, RTS Off Delay, and Extra Delay
values.
The Extra Delay field accepts numerical
values (0 to 9000 milliseconds) for
additional time to be added to the current
communication timeout delay.
10. Use the Protocol pull-down menu to select
the desired Modbus communications
protocol.
11. If you plan to connect remotely to the GC
unit via a modem or Ethernet connection,
use the Connection Type (Direct/Remote)

JULY 2010

Set Up GC Directory

2-30

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

pull-down menu for a “Direct Connect”
option or a previously configured modem.
2.11.3 Dial-up Connection
Use this command to run the Dial-up dialog to
configure the GC Controller modem. The
default properties from Windows® Control
Panel are used so you must ensure that the
modem connects at the GC Controller’s
configured baud rate. It may be necessary to
enter a modem initialization string.

The Direct Connect option allows you to connect from the PC
to the GC Controller via a serial port, per its default settings.
If you select a modem, the modem property dialog appears,
allowing you to change its attributes.

To configure the modem and make a
connection,
1. Use the File>GC Directory menu, and the
GC Directory appears.

2. Click the Station Name data field and click
the Modem Properties button or press the
F2 button.

Dial-up Connection

JULY 2010

MON2000

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

2-31

3. The Modem Properties dialog appears and
the General Data Connection Modem
Preferences are activated.

The General Data default settings are:
Table 2-1 General Data Connection Preferences

JULY 2010

Port Speed

19200

Data Protocol

Disabled

Compression

Disabled

Flow Control

None

Dial-up Connection

2-32

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

4. Click the Advanced tab to configure the
Hardware settings.

The Advanced Data default settings are:
Table 2-2 Advanced Data Connection Preferences
Data Bits

8

Parity

None

Stop Bits

1

5. Click the

button to apply your

changes, or click the
button to
discard the changes and return to the GC
Directory dialog.

Dial-up Connection

JULY 2010

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

2-33

6. Next, from the GC Directory dialog, scroll
over to configure the following parameters:

The Baud Rate, Data Bits, and Stop Bits parameters
were configured above.
Table 2-3 GC Directory Dialog Default Settings

JULY 2010

Heading

Pull-down Menu Selection

PC Port

COM1, COM2,COM3

Handshaking

None

RTS On Delay

0

RTS On Delay

0

Extra Delay

0 (See note)

Connection Type
(Direct/Remote)

Direct Connection
Modem

Telephone

Complete number
(Area Code) (XXX-XXXX)

Server Type IP Address

XXX.XX.XX.XXX
(10 digits)

Retries
• Modem
• IP Address

5
3

IC Multiplier

10

Dial-up Connection

2-34

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

The Extra Delay is enabled for Ethernet connections.
The default value is “0” and the default 30 seconds timeout is used. If
the value is changed to greater than “0”, the value is used as the
timeout. The entered value is multiplied by 10 inside MON2000,
therefore the maximum timeout is 100,000 ms or 100 seconds (ex: If
timeout value needs to be 15 seconds, the user should enter 1,500).

Dial-up Connection

JULY 2010

MON2000

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

2-35

7. Click the
button to accept the
changes. While connecting, MON2000 dials
the number, attempts to connect via the
selected modem and displays progress
messages. A message box appears when a
connection has been made or if the attempt
to connect fails.
Once a connection has been established and
while MON2000 remains connected via the
modem, the Connect button is disabled and
the Disconnect button is enabled.
If the connection fails at any time,
MON2000 displays a message in the GC
Status bar that it has been disconnected.
You can end the connection from the
File>Disconnect menu, by clicking the
disconnect icon on the MON2000 toolbar, or
by exiting MON2000.

If you are using the Modbus RTU protocol, the values for baud
rate, data bits, stop bits, and parity must match the settings
you configured in the Modem Properties dialog.
These values are required to correctly calculate character
timing.

When you start MON2000 after the
parameters are established, you can connect
to the GC via the File>Connect menu or by
clicking the Connection icon on the
MON2000 toolbar.

JULY 2010

Dial-up Connection

2-36

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

2.11.4 Modem Initialization Strings/Setup
This section provides “examples” of modem
initialization strings and setups that have been
tested and proven operable. This string of text
characters, known as 'AT commands', has
special meaning to the PC modem and is used
by the modem for every telephone connection
made to a selected GC unit.
To edit or enter a modem initialization string,
use the
button and use the Control
Panel > Modems > General > Properties >
Connection > Advanced to access the Advanced
Modem Connection Settings dialog. Enter the
modem initialization string in the Extra
Settings field.

Modem Initialization Strings/Setup

JULY 2010

MON2000

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

2-37

By default, MON2000 provides a modem
initialization string that serves the purpose for
most Hayes-compatible modems. Therefore, in
most cases, you need not enter a different
string.
However, for some modems, you may want to
consult the following pages which document
initialization strings and modem setups that
have been field-tested.

The default initialization string that MON2000 provides is
sent to the PC modem first. Then the custom initialization
string you provide is sent. In this manner, MON2000 sets the
modem parameters that it requires, while you can customize
the modem's operation to respond to special conditions.
Once the optimum modem initialization string has been
determined, it should need no further revision unless a
different brand or model of modem is installed.

Black Box - Modem 325

During development of the GC Controller, a
Black Box Modem 325 was used to test modem
communications with the GC unit. For that test
and that modem, the modem initialization was
set as follows:
\N0\C0\Q0

JULY 2010

(where 0 = zero)

Modem Initialization Strings/Setup

2-38

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

Interpretation of the AT commands for that
particular modem was as follows:
• \N0 = normal mode; no error control; data
is buffered (versus ‘direct mode,’ ‘reliable
mode, ’or ‘auto reliable mode’)
• \C0 = disable auto reliable buffer (versus
‘buffer data for 4 seconds or 200 characters’)
• \Q0 = disable flow control (versus ‘enable
XON/XOFF flow control,’ ‘enable unilateral
CTS flow control,’ or ‘enable bilateral CTS/
RTS flow control’)
U.S. Robotics Sportster

The following setup for U.S. Robotics Sportster
28.8 Kbps external FAX-modems was verified
at the GC assembly and checkout lab:
• At the GC Controller, the modem DIP
switches were set to 5 and 8 UP, the rest
DOWN.
• At the PC, the modem DIP switches were
set to 2, 4, 6, and 7 UP, the rest DOWN.

Modem Initialization Strings/Setup

JULY 2010

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

2-39

With these switch settings, initialization string
&F was required. See Table 2-4 for further
explanation of these switch settings and the
parameters they control.
Table 2-4 DIP Switch Settings for U.S. Robotics Sportster Modem
Switch

Function

1

UP (off) – Normal DTR; computer must provide
DTR signal for modem to accept commands.

At GC

At PC

DOWN (on) – Modem ignores DTR.
2

UP (off) – Verbal (word) results.
DOWN (on) – Numeric results.

3

UP (off) – Suppress result codes.
DOWN (on) – Enable result codes.

4

UP (off) – Display keyboard commands.
DOWN (on) – Suppress echo.

5

UP (off) – Modem answers on first ring or higher.
DOWN (on) – Disable auto answer.

6

UP (off) – Modem sends carrier detect (CD) signal
on connect, and drops CD on disconnect.
DOWN (on) – CD always on.

7

UP (off) – For power-on and ATZ reset, the Y or Y1
configuration is used from user-defined nonvolatile
memory (NVRAM).
DOWN (on) – For power-on and ATZ reset, the
generic template, &F0, is used from read only
memory (ROM).

8

UP (off) – Disable AT command set recognition.
DOWN (on) – Enable AT command set recognition.

JULY 2010

Modem Initialization Strings/Setup

2-40

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

GVC/MaxTech 28.8 Kbps Modem

The following setup for GVC 28.8 Kbps
external Voice/Data/FAX modems was verified
at Daniel Canada. At the GC Controller:

To make these settings for the modem at the GC Controller,
you will need to use a terminal program (such as ProComm o
other commercial modem software) to input the “AT”
commands to the modem before connecting it to the GC
Controller.
AT&F5

Factory default with v.42bis flow control
disabled (must be first).

ATB8

9600 baud

Or
ATB11

19200 baud

AT&D0

Modem ignores DTR (not necessary if using a
cable that incorporates the DTR signal from
the Controller).

ATM0

Turn OFF speaker.

ATS0=n

n is number of rings for auto answer (e.g.,
ATS0=1, ATS0=2, etc.).

AT&C0

Force carrier detect high

AT%C0

Turn OFF compression.

If compression is turned ON with AT%C1,
or OFF with AT%C0, then the modem at
other end should match.
AT&W0

Write to stored profile “0” (zero).

AT&Y0

Use stored profile “0” (zero) when turned on.

Modem Initialization Strings/Setup

JULY 2010

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

2-41

At the PC, use &F5%C1M0 which indicates
a factory default with v.42bis flow control
disabled / compression ON / speaker OFF.
2.12

2350 TO 2350A RETROFIT INSTRUCTIONS
The 2350A GC Controller CPU assembly has
been designed to include all digital I/O and
COM3 and COM4 serial ports. This eliminates
the requirement (and additional cost) for an I/O
assembly or DSPI/O assembly.
In addition, BOS is now resident in the
DiskOnChip, instead of an EPROM set. The
DiskOnChip provides additional expanded
memory for archiving data, instead of having to
purchase a memory expansion board assembly.
The BOS file in the DiskOnChip may be
upgraded in the field through MON2000.
Optional boards may be plugged directly into
the PC/104 Bus (connectors J19 and J20) on the
CPU board assembly. The COM4A board
provides four additional serial ports (COM5
through COM8). A modem board and/or
Ethernet board may be also be plugged directly
into the PC/104 Bus for additional
communications requirements.

JULY 2010

2350 to 2350A Retrofit Instructions

2-42

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

The PC/104 Bus is designed to allow any
combination of option boards to be installed in
any order, with the exception of the CSA
approved Radicom modem board which must be
the top board in the assembly. (see Figure 2-1).

Figure 2-1 2350A Controller Card Cage Assembly

If you are using the CSA approved Radicom modem;
ensure that it is the top card in the card cage assembly.
The connection configuration of the Radicom modem
requires installation at the top of the assembly.

2350 to 2350A Retrofit Instructions

JULY 2010

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

2.13

2-43

CONVERSION PROCESS
Use the following process to retrofit a 2350 GC
Controller to a 2350A GC Controller.
1. At the GC Controller site, remove the
Controller enclosure's front panel.

SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH POSSIBLE
Before removing the unit cover from the GC Controller, make certain the power supply
switch is OFF and the AC power cord is disconnected. Observe all safety precautions
when you are working in a hazardous environment.
Failure to observe all safety precautions could result in serious injury or death.

(a) For the explosion-proof Controller, the
front panel is secured by 16 screws.
Remove those screws first.
(b) Then carefully lower the front panel on
its bottom hinges. The front panel is
heavy, so make sure it does not drop and
cause damage.
(c) For the rack mount Controller, the rear
of the enclosure is open; it allows access
for most field wiring procedures without
removing the enclosure.
2. Locate the GC Controller's Terminal Board
for Field Wiring (TB). The TB is attached to
the GC Controller's card cage assembly,
facing the enclosure's front panel. (In the
rack mount Controller, the TB faces
outward toward the rear of the enclosure.)
3. Loosen the six screws that secure the TB.
Then unplug the TB from its connections at
the back, top of the board.

JULY 2010

Conversion Process

2-44

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

4. Lower the TB down and out of the way, held
in place by its ground straps at the bottom
of the board. This exposes the Card Cage
Assembly.
5. Loosen the four screws that secure the Card
Cage Assembly to the chassis. Then remove
the Card Cage Assembly away from its
chassis mount so that it is easy to work on.
6. Locate the System Interface and Driver
board. It is mounted to the top of the Card
Cage Assembly.
7. Remove all cables connected to the System
Interface Board (P/N 3-2350-005,
P/N 3-2350-022, or P/N 3-2350-023).
8. Remove the I/O48 Board assembly (drawing
P/N BE-12973) and cables from the top slot
of the Cage Card Assembly. This board is
not used on the 2350A GC Controller.
9. Remove the CPU Board assembly (P/N CE19281) and cables from the second slot of
the card cage assembly. This board is not
used on the 2350A GC Controller.

Conversion Process

JULY 2010

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

2-45

10. Remove the DSPI/O board assembly
(drawing P/N CE-12976) and cables from
the third slot of the card cage assembly.
This board is not used on the 2350A GC
Controller.
11. Remove any other optional boards, such as
memory expansion boards and associated
cables. These parts are not used on the
2350A GC Controller.
12. Leave the Analog Board assembly (drawing
P/N BE-18044) with attached cable in the
card cage. This board is used on the 2350A
basic configuration.
13. Change the fuse in the in-line fuse holder
from 1 amp to the 2.5 amp, Slo-Blo fuse
provided. The fuse is located in the cable (P/
N 2-3-2350-069) between the power supply
and the System Interface Board.
14. Ensure that DIP Switches 6, 7, and 8 of S1
are all in the "OFF" position. If the 2350A is
powered up with S8 in the OFF position, it
will delete the current application
(commonly called a "Cold Start").
15. To inspect or change the GC Controller's
COM ID setup at the GC Controller site,
locate the DIP switch as described in the
following steps.

SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH POSSIBLE
Before removing the unit cover from the GC Controller, make certain the power
supply switch is OFF and the AC power cord is disconnected. Observe all safety
precautions when you are working in a hazardous environment.
Failure to observe all safety precautions could result in serious injury or death.

16. For the explosion-proof Controller, the front
panel is secured by 16 screws. Remove those
screws first.
JULY 2010

Conversion Process

2-46

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

(a) Then carefully lower the front panel on
its bottom hinges. The front panel is
heavy, so make sure it does not drop and
cause damage. The DIP switch is located
on the lower left side of the front panel
(see Figure G-2).

Figure 2-2 Explosion-Proof Controller Dip Switch

Conversion Process

JULY 2010

MON2000

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

2-47

17. For rack mount and panel mount
Controllers, use a flat head screw driver to
remove the access panel on the right side of
the card cage assembly (see Figure 2-3).

Figure 2-3 Right Side View Rack and Panel Mount Units

18. Inspect or change the DIP switch settings as
necessary.
(a) See Table 2-5 as a guide.
(b) Make sure you record in the GC
Controller's maintenance records any
changes you make to the switch settings.
• Switches "1" through "5" form a 5-bit
binary number for setting the Modbus
slave address (also known as COM ID or
Device ID.)
• Switch number "1" is the least
significant bit, and switch number "5" is
the most significant bit.
Switch to ON = 1
Switch to OFF = 0

JULY 2010

Conversion Process

2-48

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

• Switch "6" is a spare for future use.
Switches "7" and "8" are set as needed
for the presence of an optional LOI
(Local Operator Interface) connected via
COM8 When the COM4A Board is
installed. If the COM4A Board is not
installed, the LOI is connected via
COM4.
Table 2-5 Dip Switch Settings Switch Positions

COM ID

1

2

3

4

5

1

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

2

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

3

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

4

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

5

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

6

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

7

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

8

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

RAM CLEAR
Dip Switch Setting Positions
8
Clears RAM when unit is powered down

ON

Keeps RAM data when unit is powered down

OFF

Conversion Process

JULY 2010

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

2.14

2-49

BASIC 2350A CONFIGURATION
At this point, install, if any, all mounting
hardware and optional PC/104 boards onto the
2350A CPU Board.
1. Install the 2350A CPU (P/N 3-2350-090)
into slot 3 of the card cage assembly.
2. Install cables on the CPU Board in the
following sequence:
(a) Digital I/O cable (P/N 3-2350-081) from
CPU J7 to the System Interface Board
J2.
(b) Digital I/O cable (P/N 3-2350-080) from
CPU J4 to the System Interface Board
J3.
(c) COM1, COM2, and the printer cable (P/
N 3-2350-083) from CPU J1 to the
System Interface Board J4, J9, and J11.
(d) COM3 and COM4 can be configured two
different ways. To configure a system
WITHOUT a keyboard and display,
connect cable (P/N 3-2350-084) from
CPU J6 to the System Interface Board
J8 and J10. This provides access to
COM3 on J10 and COM4 on J11 of the
Field Termination board. The serial port
setup in the MON2000 Software for
COM4 must be selected as a PC port.
(e) For a system WITH a keyboard and
display, connect cable (P/N 3-2350-087)
from CPU J6 to the System Interface J8
and J12. This provides access to COM3
on J10 and COM4 is dedicated for use as
a serial interface to the keyboard and
display. COM4 will not be available at
J11 of the Field Termination board.

JULY 2010

BASIC 2350A CONFIGURATION

2-50

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

The serial port setup in the MON2000
Software for COM4 must be selected as
Front Panel (see Figure 2-4). If all four
serial ports are required for
communications on a system with
keyboard and display, an optional
COM4A Board must be installed and a
COM7 and COM8 cable (P/N 3-2350-086)
connected (see Figure 2-5). The serial
port setup in the MON2000 Software for
COM8 must be configured as Front
Panel. See Figure G-4b.
(f) Reinstall the Analog cable to J6 on the
System Interface Board.
(g) Place the "Unit Updated to 2350A" label,
included with the upgrade kit, on the
instruction decal located on the inside,
right wall of the explosion-proof units or
on the card cage of the rack or panel
mount units.

BASIC 2350A CONFIGURATION

JULY 2010

MON2000

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

2-51

Figure 2-4 Serial Port 4 with COM4A Board

Figure 2-5 Serial Port 8 with COM4A Board

JULY 2010

BASIC 2350A CONFIGURATION

2-52

2.15

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

2350A OPTIONS
The following board configurations are optional
for the Model 500 GC with 2350A Controller.

2.15.1 The COM4A Board
1. To add four additional communications
ports at the GC Controller site, remove the
Controller enclosure's front panel.

SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH POSSIBLE
Before removing the unit cover from the GC Controller, make certain the power
supply switch is OFF and the AC power cord is disconnected. Observe all safety
precautions when you are working in a hazardous environment.
Failure to observe all safety precautions could result in serious injury or death.

(a) For the explosion-proof Controller, the
front panel is secured by 16 screws.
Remove those screws first.
(b) Then carefully lower the front panel on
its bottom hinges. The front panel is
heavy, so make sure it does not drop and
cause damage.
(c) For the rack mount Controller, the rear
of the enclosure is open; it allows access
for most field wiring procedures without
removing the enclosure.
2. Locate the GC Controller's Terminal Board
for Field Wiring (TB). The TB is attached to
the GC Controller's Card Cage Assembly,
facing the enclosure's front panel. (In the
rack mount Controller, the TB faces
outward toward the rear of the enclosure.)
3. Loosen the six screws that secure the TB.
Then unplug the TB from its connections at
the back, top of the board.

2350A Options

JULY 2010

MON2000

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

2-53

4. Lower the TB down and out of the way, held
in place by its ground straps at the bottom
of the board. This exposes the Card Cage
Assembly.
5. Loosen the four screws that secure the Card
Cage Assembly to the chassis. Then remove
the Card Cage Assembly away from its
chassis mount so that it is easy to work on.
6. Locate the System Interface and Driver
board. It is mounted to the top of the Card
Cage Assembly.
(a) Disconnect the Analog cable from J6 on
the System Interface Board, then
disconnect all CPU cables from the
System Interface Board.
(b) Remove the CPU assembly and install
the COM4A Board, with associated
mounting hardware to J19 and J20 PC/
104 Bus connector on the CPU assembly.
(c) Connect COM5 (P22) and COM6 (P23)
on the Field Termination board via cable
(P/N 3-2350-085) to J6 on COM4A.
(d) Connect COM7 (P24) on the Field
Termination board and COM8 via cable
(P/N 3-2350-086) to J3 on COM4A.
(e) Install the CPU assembly into the third
slot of card cage. Connect the CPU cables
as detailed in Section 6.3 Basic 2350A
Configuration.
(f) Install the DB9 connector from COM5 to
P22 on the Field Termination board with
jackpost assemblies.
(g) Install the DB9 connector from COM6 to
P23 on the Field Termination board with
jackpost assemblies.
(h) Install the DB9 connector from COM7 to
P24 on the Field Termination board with
jackpost assemblies.

JULY 2010

The COM4A Board

2-54

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

(i) Install the ten position connector from
COM8 to J12 on the System Interface
Board.
(j) Connect the Analog cable to J6 on the
System Interface Board.
With COM4A Boards installed, Serial Port 8 is
usually assigned via MON2000 Application>Serial Ports menu. Select Front Panel
from the Usage pull-down menu (see Figure 2-6
and Figure 2-7).

Figure 2-6 Serial Port 4 with COM4A Board

Figure 2-7 Serial Port 8 with COM4A Board

The COM4A Board

JULY 2010

MON2000

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

2-55

2.15.2 2350A Modem Installation
To install the Internal Modem for the 2350A
GC Controller, follow these steps:

Refer to P/N 3-9000-537 2350A GC Hardware manual
for COM settings and pinouts.

1. To add a modem, at the GC Controller site,
remove the Controller enclosure's front
panel.
(a) For the explosion-proof Controller, the
front panel is secured by 16 screws.
Remove those screws first.
(b) Then carefully lower the front panel on
its bottom hinges. The front panel is
heavy, so make sure it does not drop and
cause damage.
(c) For the rack mount Controller, the rear
of the enclosure is open; it allows access
for most field wiring procedures without
removing the enclosure.
2. Locate the GC Controller's Terminal Board
for Field Wiring (TB). The TB is attached to
the GC Controller's Card Cage Assembly,
facing the enclosure's front panel. (In the
rack mount Controller, the TB faces
outward toward the rear of the enclosure.)
3. Loosen the six screws that secure the TB.
Then unplug the TB from its connections at
the back, top of the board.
4. Lower the TB down and out of the way, held
in place by its ground straps at the bottom
of the board. This exposes the Card Cage
Assembly.

JULY 2010

2350A Modem Installation

2-56

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

5. Loosen the four screws that secure the Card
Cage Assembly to the chassis. Then remove
the Card Cage Assembly away from its
chassis mount so that it is easy to work on.
6. Locate the System Interface and Driver
board. It is mounted to the top of the Card
Cage Assembly.
(a) Disconnect the Analog cable from J6 on
the System Interface Board, then
disconnect all CPU cables from the
System Interface Board.
(b) Remove the CPU assembly and install
the COM4A Board, with associated
mounting hardware to J19 and J20 PC/
104 Bus connector on the CPU assembly.

If an option board is already plugged into the PC/104 bus
on the CPU, the modem and mounting hardware will be
installed into the PC/104 connector on the option board.

Figure 2-8 Modem Piggy-backed on CPU Board

2350A Modem Installation

JULY 2010

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

2-57

(c) Plug one end of the modem extension
cable (P/N 3-2350-075) into J1 of the
modem assembly. The in-line jack on the
remaining end of the modem extension
cable attaches to the lower left inside
wall of the card cage shield (after the
CPU assembly is reinstalled and all
cables reconnected to the System
Interface board). No software setup is
required for this board.
7. To use an existing Modem (1414):
(a) For operation with the 2350A CPU, set
the Standard 1414 Modem jumpers per
the following table:
Table 2-6 1414 (Standard) Modem Jumper Settings
Jumper

Pin

J4/J5

Open

J6

3-5, 4-6

J7

7-8

J9

Open

(b) On the 2350A WinSystems CPU, set J21,
pin 13-14.

JULY 2010

2350A Modem Installation

2-58

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

2.15.3 2350A Ethernet Installation
To add an ethernet assembly:
1. To add an ethernet card at the GC
Controller site, remove the Controller
enclosure's front panel.
(a) For the explosion-proof Controller, the
front panel is secured by 16 screws.
Remove those screws first.
(b) Then carefully lower the front panel on
its bottom hinges. The front panel is
heavy, so make sure it does not drop and
cause damage.
(c) For the rack mount Controller, the rear
of the enclosure is open; it allows access
for most field wiring procedures without
removing the enclosure.
(d) Locate the GC Controller's Terminal
Board for Field Wiring (TB). The TB is
attached to the GC Controller's Card
Cage Assembly, facing the enclosure's
front panel. (In the rack mount
Controller, the TB faces outward toward
the rear of the enclosure.)
2. Loosen the six screws that secure the TB.
Then unplug the TB from its connections at
the back, top of the board.
3. Lower the TB down and out of the way, held
in place by its ground straps at the bottom
of the board. This exposes the Card Cage
Assembly.
4. Loosen the four screws that secure the Card
Cage Assembly to the chassis. Then remove
the Card Cage Assembly away from its
chassis mount so that it is easy to work on.

2350A Ethernet Installation

JULY 2010

MON2000

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

2-59

5. Locate the System Interface and Driver
board. It is mounted to the top of the Card
Cage Assembly.
(a) Disconnect the Analog cable from J6 on
the System Interface Board, then
disconnect all CPU cables from the
System Interface Board.
(b) Remove the CPU assembly and install
the COM4A Board, with associated
mounting hardware to J19 and J20 PC/
104 Bus connector on the CPU assembly.

If an option board is already plugged into the PC/104 bus
on the CPU, the ethernet card and mounting hardware
will be installed into the PC/104 connector on the option
board.

If you are using the CSA approved Radicom modem;
ensure that it is the top card in the card cage assembly.
The connection configuration of the Radicom modem
requires installation at the top of the assembly.

(c) Plug one end of the Ethernet extension
cable (P/N 3-2350-088) into J5 of the
Ethernet assembly.
6. The in-line jack on the remaining end of the
Ethernet extension cable attaches to the
lower left inside wall of the card cage shield,
after the CPU assembly is reinstalled and
all cables reconnected to the System
Interface board (see Table 2-7 and Table 2-8
below).

JULY 2010

2350A Ethernet Installation

2-60

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

No software setup is required for this board.
Table 2-7 System Interface Board Cable Connections
Connection

Ribbon Cable

J5 and J6

Analog I/O

J8

Com3

J10

Com4

J4

Printer

J11

Com2

J2 and J3

Digital I/O

J12

Front Panel and Keyboard
(if installed)

Table 2-8 CPU Board Cable Connections
Connection

Ribbon Cable

J1

Com1, Com2, and Printer

J4 and J7

Digital I/O

J6

Com3 and Com4

(a) If the 2350A BOS version is v1.84 or
later, ensure that J6 Jumper on pins 1314 of J1 has been removed.
(see Figure 2-9 and Figure 2-10).
7. If a modem is installed, remove the phone
cord.
8. Install the Ethernet card and set the
jumpers as shown below.

2350A Ethernet Installation

JULY 2010

MON2000

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

2-61

Figure 2-9 Ethernet Jumper Configuration BOS v1.82 and Earlier

Figure 2-10 Ethernet Jumper Configuration BOS v1.84 and Later

JULY 2010

2350A Ethernet Installation

2-62

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

2.15.4 Ethernet TCP/IP Settings
If you plan to connect via an Ethernet
connection, use the following instructions.
To configure the Ethernet TCP/IP settings for
the 2350A GC Controller:
1. Obtain the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and
Gateway addresses (numbers) for the
Target 2350A GC Controller from your
supervisor or Information Technology
Department.

If the controller has never been configured for Ethernet
communications, logon to the Model 500 GC using either the
Direct Connect option, or connect remotely via a Modem.

2. Use the Application > TCP/IP menu to
access this function.
3. The TCP/IP dialog appears.

4. Go to the Use DHCP/Specify an IP Address
field and select Specify an IP Address.
5. In the IP Address field, enter the IP Address
(number) obtained from your Supervisor or
the Information Technology Department.

Ethernet TCP/IP Settings

JULY 2010

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

2-63

6. In the Subnet Mask field, enter the subnet
mask address (number) obtained from your
Supervisor or the Information Technology
Department.
7. In the Gateway Address field, enter the
Gateway Address (number) obtained from
your Supervisor or the Information
Technology Department.
8. Click the
changes.

button to apply all

9. Disconnect from the controller, using the
toolbar icon or by using the File>Disconnect
menu.

JULY 2010

Ethernet TCP/IP Settings

2-64

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

2.15.5 MON2000 TCP/IP Settings
To configure the Ethernet TCP/IP settings for
the MON2000,
1. From the File menu, select GC Directory.
2. Ensure that an Ethernet location has been
created or an existing location modified and
that an Ethernet card installed in the PC
has been selected in the field labeled
Connection Type (Direct/Remote).

MON2000 TCP/IP Settings

JULY 2010

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

2-65

3. Enter the same 'IP Address' into the Server
Name/IP Address field of the GC Directory
that was previously entered in the GC
Controller (see Section 2.11.2).

4. Set the number of retries to three.

Click the
changes.

JULY 2010

button to apply your

MON2000 TCP/IP Settings

2-66

2.16

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

CONNECT VIA GC EXTERNAL MODEM

Ensure you have a pre-existing PC connection to the GC
unit before installing the external modem. If the GC unit is
already on location, do this via another remote operator
connection, or, onsite, via use of a portable PC and serial
cable. Ideally, configure the GC unit and install the
external modem prior to placement at the remote location.
Note: You cannot set the Serial Ports parameters from the
GC unit front panel.)

2.16.1 HARDWARE SETUP
1. Halt any ongoing analysis runs.
Use the Control > Halt menu to access this
function.
2. Disconnect AC power from the GC
Controller.

SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH POSSIBLE
Before removing the unit cover from the GC Controller, make certain the
power supply switch is OFF and the AC power cord is disconnected. Observe
all safety precautions when you are working in a hazardous environment.
Failure to observe all safety precautions could result in serious injury or death.

3. For the explosion-proof Controller, remove
the cover from the GC Controller housing to
expose the GC Controller Terminal Board
for field wiring.
For the rack mount Controller, the rear of
the enclosure is open; it allows access for
most field wiring procedures without
removing the enclosure.

CONNECT VIA GC EXTERNAL MODEM

JULY 2010

MON2000

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

2-67

4. Connect a custom-made serial line cable (for
RS-232 serial transmission) from the serial
port of the external modem to an available
serial port on the GC Controller Terminal
Board for field wiring.

Special hardware modifications may be needed when
operating an external GC modem from the GC serial ports 3 or
4 (COM3 or COM4), as follows:
• DE-20782 (see drawing addendum of Model 500 Gas
Chromatograph System Hardware Reference Manual,
P/N 3-9000-537).
• Transient protection modules M7 and/or M4, located on the
back side of the GC Controller Terminal Board for field
wiring, may need replacement with the transient protection
modules for RS-232 signals (P/N 3-2350-027). Note that
M4 serves COM3 and M7 serves COM4.

• Make note of the serial port number you
choose for connection. You will need this
information later to make appropriate
software settings.
• Use an RS-232 serial cable no longer
than 50 feet. Longer distances may
result in spurious loss or corruption of
transmitted data.
• See Section 5.17, for details of GC
Controller serial port connectivity (i.e.,
port locations, pinouts, connector types,
gender, cabling, etc.).
5. Connect a telephone line (from wall phone
jack, if available) to the phone jack for the
external modem.
6. Set external modem for Auto Answer (see
external modem user manual).

JULY 2010

Hardware Setup

2-68

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

2.16.2 Select Program Settings
This function allows you to configure where
database, GC applications, and Modbus Test
program files are stored.
1. Use the File > Program Settings menu to
access this function.
2. The Program Settings dialog appears.

3. To use a Chromatogram file extension other
than the default (e.g. .CGM) or to select the
location of saved data, GC database, and GC
application files,
• click in the Chromatogram file extension
data field and type the desired file
extension
• click in the appropriate data field and
type the desired directory,
Or
• click the
button and use the
directory tree to select the desired
location

Select Program Settings

JULY 2010

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

2-69

4. Use the provided check boxes to turn the
following settings on/off. Note that the
default settings are ON.
Table 2-9 Optional Program Settings
Setting

Function

Editing replaces existing text
in tables

If enabled, replaces selected table cell
entry with user input.
If disabled, appends user input to end of
the selected table cell entry.

Prompt to confirm discard
changes

Display confirmation dialog before
exiting a dialog that contains changed
data.

Prompt to confirm save
changes

Display confirmation dialog before saving
changed data.

Synchronize GC Controller’s
time to PC on download, etc.

Program the GC Controller clock to
match the PC clock upon download.

Tab from spreadsheet to next
control

Move from field to field and button to
button (rather than from cell to cell
within a spreadsheet or tabular display).

Enable display in PPM

If enabled, percentages less than 0.99%
are displayed in PPM (parts per million)
rather than as a percentage.

5. Click the
button to apply your
changes and return to the main screen.
Click the
button to exit and
return to the main screen without applying
your changes.

JULY 2010

Select Program Settings

2-70

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

2.16.3 Generate PC Config Report
This function allows you to generate or print
out a report of the currently active GC
application control settings. See Appendix A for
a sample print-out of a PC Config Report.

Output data for the PC Config
Report depends on the GC
Controller and its application.

To view a PC Config Report already saved to
disk, see Section 7.1.2.
1. Use the File > PC Config Report menu to
access this function. The PC Config Report
dialog appears.
2. Click the check boxes (see Select column) to
choose the data you want included in the
configuration report.

Click the
button or press the F2
key to select all options.
Click the
button or press F3 to
deselect (i.e., clear) all checked options.

Generate PC Config Report

JULY 2010

MON2000

If you want to use the
standard Windows®
Print dialog to select a
printer, deselect the Use
default printer option.

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

2-71

3. Use the Output radio buttons to either save
the report to disk, print the report with or
without form feeds, or display the report via
the report viewer (see Section 7.1).
The File option will open the Save As dialog,
with CONFIG.TXT as the default file name.
The Printer (with form feeds) option will
print the report, with form feeds, to your
configured printer (see Section 3.7).
The Printer (without form feeds) option will
print the report, without form feeds, to your
configured printer (see Section 3.7).
The Screen option will launch the report
viewer (see Section 7.1).
4. Click
the button or press the F4
key to generate your customized PC Config
Report.

If you are online with the GC Controller, a PC Config
Report that includes all options can require up to 20
minutes to generate and save. Printing a full report can
take longer.
If you press the ESC key, MON2000 will stop after the
current option is completed.

A progress bar appears, indicating the
completion status.

JULY 2010

Generate PC Config Report

2-72

2.17

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

DOWNLOADING AN APPLICATION
This function allows the MON2000 operator to
download applications to GC Controllers. GC
applications with the .APP extension can only
be down loaded to 2350A GC Controllers and
Model 700 units. The Download feature is NOT
available if the keylock switch is closed.
At the end of the download process, MON2000
displays the Set GC Time dialog, which allows
you to accept or change the GC Controller's
date and time.
Only download an application when performing
an initial startup, downloading a new GC
application, or after the GC unit has been out of
service. You must first connect to the GC to use
the Download function.
1. Use the File > Download menu to access the
Select GC Application File To Download
dialog.

Downloading an Application

JULY 2010

MON2000

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

2-73

2. Click the desired .app file. The file name
appears in the File name data field.

GC application files contain all control settings and
application program functions (see Section 5) specific
to a particular GC Controller.
For 2350A GC Controllers and the Model 700
controller, application files (.app files) are normally
stored in the \GC\APP directory.

3. Click the
button to download the
selected application file to the connected GC
unit.
Click the
button to exit and
return to the main window.
4. MON2000 reads the time at the GC
Controller and the Set Time dialog appears
appears for you to edit or accept (see
Section 4.7.2 for more information).
5. A progress bar appears, indicating the
completion status. See Table 2-10 for a
listing of the automatically enabled function
keys.

JULY 2010

Downloading an Application

2-74

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

Table 2-10 Main Menu Function Keys Enabled by Download
Key

Function

Description

F1

Help

Access context-sensitive online help.

F2

Start Auto Sequence

Initialize the Auto-Sequencing function.
This function is also available via the
Control > Auto Sequence menu.

F3

Halt

Stop a function at the end of the current
cycle. This function is also available via the
Control > Halt menu.

F5

Edit TEVs

Display the Timed Event Tables. This
function is also available via the Application
> Timed Events menu.

F6

Edit CDTs

Display the Component Data Tables. This
function is also available via the Application
> Component Data menu.

F7

View Current CGM

Display chromatogram of the stream
currently being analyzed. This function is
also available via the Chromatogram menu.

F8

View Last CGM

Display chromatogram stored in the GC
unit. This function is also available via the
Chromatogram menu.

Downloading an Application

JULY 2010

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

2.18

2-75

UPGRADING FLASH
Use this function to download a BOS file to a
connected GC Controller.
Only download a BOS file when upgrading the
GC firmware or after the GC unit has been out
of service. You must first connect to the GC to
use the Upgrade Flash function.
1. Use the File > Upgrade Flash menu to
access the Select BOS File To Download
dialog.

2. Click the desired BOS file. The file name
appears in the File name data field.
3. Click the
button to download the
selected BOS file to the connected GC unit.
Click the
button to exit and
return to the main window.

JULY 2010

Upgrading Flash

2-76

2.19

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

OFFLINE EDIT OF GC APPLICATION
Use this function to edit a GC application file
that is saved on disk or has been downloaded
(and is currently on, or being used by, the GC
unit).
When selecting Offline Edit, you can choose
either:
• File Selection – Allows you to edit a GC
application file stored on disk.
• Upload Application – Allows you to upload
the current GC application data from the
GC Controller and save to file for future
editing.
• Upload BOS - Allows you to upload the
current BOS (i.e., firmware) file from the
GC Controller to save for future download.
See the following sections for detailed
instructions.

Offline Edit of GC Application

JULY 2010

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

2-77

2.19.1 File Selection
This function allows you to edit a GC
application file stored on disk.
1. Use the File > Offline Edit > File Selection
menu to access this function.

The Open GC Application File dialog
appears.

Using the directory tree, select the desired
application file.
The GC application files
(.APP) are normally stored
in the \GC\App directory.

JULY 2010

2. Click the

button.

3. Edit this file by using the MON2000
Application functions (see Section 5 for
more information).

File Selection

2-78

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

Note that the application file name is
displayed in the GC status dialog and the
File Edit mode (i.e., Offline Edit) is
displayed in main screen titlebar.

When you have finished editing this file,
you can download it to the GC Controller
(see Section 2.17) or save for future use.
2.19.2 Upload Application
This function allows you to upload the
application from an online GC Controller to a
disk file and edit that file.
When connected to the GC, this function allows
you to upload the current GC application data
from the GC Controller and save to file for
future editing. When the application upload is
complete the connection will be terminated
(i.e., disconnected).
1. Establish a connection to the GC.
2. Use the File > Offline Edit > Upload
Application menu to access this function.

Upload Application

JULY 2010

MON2000

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

2-79

3. The Save Uploaded GC Application File
menu appears.

Use this dialog to choose the directory and
file name or create a special file name for
this particular application upload. Click the
button.
4. MON2000 displays the message “Uploading
C:\GC\APP\2350A.app” in the progress
status bar.

MON2000 continues with the upload
process and displays the message,
“Uploading Segment 1 (through segment
15)” in the status bar and a progress bar
appears.

Once all of the segments are uploaded and
the application file (.app) has been saved,

JULY 2010

Upload Application

2-80

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

MON2000 prompts you to save the
parameters file.
5. The Save Parameter File dialog appears.

Use this dialog to choose the directory
location and file name or create your own
parameter file name. Click the
button to continue.
6. MON2000 saves the parameter data to the
selected directory. When the upload is
complete, your connection to the GC unit is
automatically terminated.
7. You are now viewing the uploaded
application file off-line.
You can edit this application by using the
MON2000 Application functions (see
Section 5 for more information).
Note that the application file name is
displayed in the GC status dialog and the
File Edit mode is displayed in the main
screen titlebar.

When you have finished editing this file,
you can download it to the GC Controller
(see Section 2.17) or save for future use.

Upload Application

JULY 2010

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

MON2000

2-81

2.19.3 Upload BOS
When connected to the GC, this function allows
you to upload the current BOS (i.e., firmware)
file from the GC Controller to save for future
download (see Section 2.18).
1. Use the File > Offline Edit > Upload BOS
menu to access this function.

2. The Save Uploaded GC BOS File dialog
appears.
By default, GC BOS files are
stored in C:\GC\APP folder.

JULY 2010

Upload BOS

2-82

INSTALLATION AND SETUP

3. Use this dialog to choose the directory
location and file name or create a file name
for this particular upload. Click the
button to continue.
The message:
“Uploading C:\GC\APP\2350A.bos”
appears in the status bar and a progress bar
appears.

4. MON2000 begins to upload the BOS to the
selected file. When the upload is complete,
normal MON2000 operations resume.

Upload BOS

MON2000

MON2000 will not perform
a BOS upload during an
analysis run. You must halt
the analysis first (see
Section 4.3) or wait until
the GC is idle.

A BOS upload usually takes
10 minutes to complete.

JULY 2010

GETTING STARTED

MON2000

3-1

GETTING STARTED
3

This section shows you how to get started with
the MON2000 software, covering such
functions as logging on, navigation, and
configuring your PC printer for MON2000.
3.1

LOGGING ON
To log on,
1. Start the MON2000 software program by
clicking the desktop icon or using the
Windows® Start menu (see Section 2.7).

2. Click the User Name data field and type
your assigned user name (up to 12
characters). Note that the user name is not
case-sensitive and can include characters
such as “*”, “-”, “.”, etc.

JULY 2010

Logging On

3-2

GETTING STARTED

MON2000

3. If required, click the User PIN data field
and type your assigned PIN.

If you enter an incorrect user name or user PIN,
a error message appears:

Click the
to the Logon dialog.

button to exit and return

4. When you have successfully logged on, the
MON2000 main window appears.

Logging On

JULY 2010

GETTING STARTED

MON2000

3.2

3-3

LOGGING OFF
To log off,

Ensure that you exit the
MON2000 program and
shut down Windows before
powering off the PC.

1. Disconnect from the GC unit (see
Section 2.10.2).
2. Exit the MON2000 program by
• using the File > Exit menu
• pressing the ESC key
• clicking the
3.3

button

MON2000 USER INTERFACE
Use the following sections to familiarize
yourself with the MON2000 user interface.

JULY 2010

Logging Off

3-4

3.3.1

GETTING STARTED

MON2000

Main Window
The MON2000 main window typically looks
like this:
titlebar, with connection data

GC Status bar

view area

toolbar

menu bar

MON2000 Status bar

Use the available menus, icons (see toolbar
area and Section 3.3.4), and function keys (see
Section 3.4) to access the desired functions.

Main Window

JULY 2010

GETTING STARTED

MON2000

3.3.2

3-5

GC Status Bar
The status bar appears across the bottom of the
application window. To display or hide the
status bar, click the Status Bar command using
the View menu (ALT + V, G).
Access this menu command from the View
menu (ALT+ V, S) to display and hide the GC
Status Bar, which displays the following:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

GC - name of the GC currently online
Alarm status (Unacknowledged)
Detector number
Mode (e.g., analysis; Calibration mode or
Analysis mode)
Streams - number current streams
Next - next stream number to run)
Anly - analysis cycle
Run - run time
Date - current date is displayed
Time - current time is displayed

The left area of the status bar describes actions
of menu items as you use the mouse pointer
over the menu selection. This area similarly
shows messages that describe the actions of
toolbar buttons as you press and hold them.
After viewing the description of the toolbar
button command and you do not wish execute
the command, move the mouse pointer away
from the toolbar command, then release the
mouse button.

JULY 2010

GC Status Bar

3-6

GETTING STARTED

MON2000

The right areas of the status bar indicate which
of the following keys are activated:
Indicator

Description

CAP

the Caps Lock
key is ON.

NUM

the Num Lock
key is ON

SCRL

the Scroll Lock
key is ON

Your connection status is also displayed in the titlebar.
If “Online Edit” appears, then MON2000 is connected to
the GC and is recognizing the existing application.
If “Connected” appears, then MON2000 is connected to
the GC but does not recognize the existing application.
If no connection data is displayed, there is no connection.

GC Status Bar

JULY 2010

GETTING STARTED

MON2000

3-7

The GC Status bar consists of:
Item

Description

GC

GC unit to which MON2000 is currently
connected
A status flag indicates an active alarm, an
unacknowledged alarm, or the File Edit mode
(offline editing).

Det #

detector monitoring the alarm status of the
currently connected GC
A GC unit can have up to 2 detectors.

Mode

mode of the Detector
Typical modes are:
• Idle
• Auto Cal
• Auto Base
• Auto Anly
• FCal

JULY 2010

Stream

current stream being analyzed

Next

next sample stream to be analyzed

Anly

analysis time

Cycle

total cycle time (seconds), selected before
starting another analysis

Run

time (seconds) elapsed since current cycle
began

Date/Time

date and time, per PC clock

GC Status Bar

3-8

3.3.3

GETTING STARTED

MON2000

View Menu
Use the View menu to toggle (i.e., switch ON or
OFF) which main window component you wish
to view. See Section 3.3.1 for an identification
and definition of each component.

3.3.4

ToolTips
To view a ToolTip, move the mouse cursor to
the Toolbar icon you want identified. MON2000
displays the ToolTip for five seconds.

3.3.5

Data Entry and Function Features
Use the data boxes, buttons, check boxes, and
toggles to input data or to choose options and
activate features.
click check box to
turn setting ON or OFF

use dynamic pull-down type input
menus to select option in data fields

click radio button
to select option

scroll to access additional settings
click push-buttons
to activate features

View Menu

JULY 2010

GETTING STARTED

MON2000

3.3.6

3-9

Shortcut to Save or Print Data
From any active dialog, right-click the
displayed data to access this menu.

Microsoft Internet Explorer
5.0 (or later) is required to
view a spreadsheet file
saved in HTML format.

Choose the Save Sheet option to save data to
disk or the Print Sheet option to queue data to
your PC printer. MON2000 prints the report to
your configured printer (see Section 3.7).
3.4

KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
MON2000 supports keystrokes as well as a
standard PC mouse interface. Use a mouse to
perform point-and-click operations.
Refer to the following table for common
keyboard shortcuts. See Table 3-2 for function
keys that can be used after an application has
been downloaded to the GC Controller.

Table 3-1 Frequently Used Keystrokes
Keystroke

Action

ARROW
keys

Move cursor:
• left or right in a data field
• up or down in a menu or combo box
• up or down (column), left or right (row) through displayed data entries

DELETE

• Delete the character after cursor.
• Delete selected rows from a table or return row values to the default settings.

ENTER

• Add a blank item or row to selected table.
• Activate the default control element (e.g., the OK button) in current window.

ESC

Exit application or active window without saving data.

F1

Access context-sensitive help topic.

INSERT

• Toggle between insert and type-over mode in selected cell.
• Insert a new row above the highlighted row.

SHIFT+TAB

Move to previous control element (e.g., button) or data field in window; see TAB
description.

JULY 2010

Shortcut to Save or Print Data

3-10

GETTING STARTED

MON2000

Table 3-1 Frequently Used Keystrokes (Continued)
Keystroke

Action

SPACE

Toggle settings (via radio buttons or check boxes).

TAB

Move to next control element (e.g., button) in window; use File > Program
Settings (see Section 2.16.2) to use TAB key to move to next data field.
Table 3-2 Application-Specific Function Keys

Function
Key

Action

F2

Start Auto Sequence

These keystrokes are available from the
main menu only. Function key definitions
will change per the active dialog/function.
Starts the Auto-Sequencing function (see Section 4.1).
F3

Halt
Halts the GC program (e.g., an analysis run) at the end of the current cycle (see
Section 4.3).

F5

Edit TEVs
Displays the Timed Event Table (TEV) per specified stream (see Section 5.3).

F6

Edit CDTs
Displays the Component Data Table (CDT) per specified stream (see
Section 5.2).

F7

View Current CGM
Displays the chromatogram for the sample stream being analyzed (see
Section 6.1).

F8

View Last GC CGM
Displays any chromatogram stored in the GC Controller (see Section 6.1).

Keyboard Shortcuts

JULY 2010

GETTING STARTED

MON2000

3.5

3-11

PROCEDURES GUIDE
Use the following table to look up the related
manual section and menu (and keystroke) for a
given procedure.

Table 3-3 Menu and Manual Section per MON2000 Procedure
Task or Data Item

Section(s)

Menu [Keystroke]

24-Hour Average, component(s)
measured

5.5.2

Application > Calculations > Averages

alarms, related components

5.2
5.6
5.7
5.12

Application > Component Data
[F6]
Application > Limit Alarms
Application > Discrete Alarms
Application > Discrete Outputs

alarms, stream number(s) programmed

5.6

Application > Limit Alarms

Analysis Report (on/off)

7.3
7.4

Reports > GC Printer Control
Reports > MON2000 Printer Control

analysis time

5.3

Application > Timed Events [F5]

auto-calibration (on/off)

5.8

Application > Streams

Auto-Calibration Interval

5.8

Application > Streams

Auto-Calibration Start Time

5.8

Application > Streams

autocal time

5.8

Application > Streams

Baseline

5.8

Application > Streams, Baseline Values [F2]

base pressure used for calculations

5.8

Application > Streams

BTU-dry (on/off)

5.5.1

Application > Calculations > Control

calibration concentration

5.2

Application > Component Data [F6]

calibration cycle time

5.3

Application > Timed Events [F5]

calibration runs, number averaged

5.8

Application > Streams

calibration runs, number of

5.8

Application > Streams

calibration stream number

5.8

Application > Streams

communications baud rate, at GC

5.17

Application > Serial Ports

JULY 2010

Procedures Guide

3-12

GETTING STARTED

MON2000

Table 3-3 Menu and Manual Section per MON2000 Procedure (Continued)
Task or Data Item

Section(s)

Menu [Keystroke]

communications baud rate, at PC

2.11.3

File > (COM ID)

component code and name

5.2

Application > Component Data [F6]

component full scale (for output)

5.1
5.10

Application > System
(CGM Analog Output Config and Baseline
Offset)
Application > Analog Outputs

component(s) programmed for input

5.9
5.11

Application > Analog Inputs
Application > Discrete Inputs

component(s) programmed for output

5.6
5.7
5.10
5.12

Application > Limit Alarms
Application > Discrete Alarms
Application > Analog Outputs
Application > Discrete Outputs

component, retention time

5.2

Application > Component Data [F6]

component zero (for output)

5.10

Application > Analog Outputs

Compressibility (on/off)

5.5.1

Application > Calculations > Control

current date

4.7

Control > GC Time

current time

4.7

Control > GC Time

cycle time

5.3

Application > Timed Events [F5]

delete alarms

5.6
8.3

Application > Limit Alarms
Log > Alarm Log

delete component from component list

5.2

Application > Component Data
[F6], [DELETE]

delete inhibit, integration, peak width

5.3

Application > Timed Events [F5]

delete output(s)

5.6
5.7
5.10
5.12

Application > Limit Alarms
Application > Discrete Alarms
Application > Analog Outputs
Application > Discrete Outputs

edit numeric value

5.4.1

Application > User Defined > Numeric

edit select values

5.4.2

Application > User Defined > Selection

edit text strings

5.4.3

Application > User Defined > Text Strings

Procedures Guide

JULY 2010

GETTING STARTED

MON2000

3-13

Table 3-3 Menu and Manual Section per MON2000 Procedure (Continued)
Task or Data Item

Section(s)

Menu [Keystroke]

existing alarm(s)

8.3

Log > Alarm Log

full-scale value (for input)

5.9

Application > Analog Inputs

GPM liquid equivalent (on/off)

5.5.1

Application > Calculations > Control

height or area measurement method

5.2

Application > Component Data [F6]

High Alarm

5.6

Application > Limit Alarms

(Analyzer) I.D.

2.11.2
5.1

File > GC Directory
Application > System

inhibit on-off times

5.3

Application > Timed Events [F5]

input(s) being used

5.9
5.11

Application > Analog Inputs
Application > Discrete Inputs

integration on-off times

5.3

Application > Timed Events [F5]

Low Alarm

5.6

Application > Limit Alarms

Mole percent (on/off)

5.5.1

Application > Calculations > Control

Normalization (on/off)

5.5.1

Application > Calculations > Control

outputs being used

5.6
5.7
5.10
5.12

Application > Limit Alarms
Application > Discrete Alarms
Application > Analog Outputs
Application > Discrete Outputs

Peak Width, on time

5.3

Application > Timed Events [F5]

Ratio (on/off)

5.5.3

Application > Calculations > User Defined

Ratio Denominator

5.5.3

Application > Calculations > User Defined

Ratio, stream number(s)

5.5.3

Application > Calculations > User Defined

Relative Density (on/off)

5.5.1

Application > Calculations > Control

Response Factor

5.2

Application > Component Data [F6]

Response Factor, percent deviation

5.2

Application > Component Data [F6]

Retention Time, percent deviation

5.2

Application > Component Data [F6]

Rolling Average (on/off)

5.5.2

Application > Calculations > Averages

JULY 2010

Procedures Guide

3-14

GETTING STARTED

MON2000

Table 3-3 Menu and Manual Section per MON2000 Procedure (Continued)
Task or Data Item

Section(s)

Menu [Keystroke]

Rolling Average, component for

5.5.2

Application > Calculations > Averages

Rolling Average, number of analyses

5.5.2

Application > Calculations > Averages

Rolling Average, stream number(s)

5.5.2

Application > Calculations > Averages

Spectrum Gain

5.3

Application > Timed Events [F5]

stream number(s) (for output)

5.6
5.7
5.10
5.12

Application > Limit Alarms
Application > Discrete Alarms
Application > Analog Outputs
Application > Discrete Outputs

stream sequences skipped, number

5.1
5.8

Application > System
Application > Streams

streams analyzed, number

5.1
5.8

Application > System
Application > Streams

streams analyzed, sequence

5.1
5.8

Application > System
Application > Streams

Valve on/off times

5.3

Application > Timed Events
[F5]

Weight Percent (on/off)

5.5.1

Application > Calculations > Control

Wobbe value (on/off)

5.5.1

Application > Calculations > Control

Zero value (for input)

5.9

Application > Analog Inputs

Procedures Guide

JULY 2010

GETTING STARTED

MON2000

3.6

3-15

KEYLOCK SWITCH CONTROL
If your GC unit has the keylock control
enabled, you will not be able to write changes
or new data to the GC Controller. The following
error dialog will display.

To see which Modbus registers are affected by
the keylock control, view the Communications
section of the PC Config Report via the Report
Viewer (see Appendix A for instructions and an
example).
When closed ('on'), the GC keylock switch
protects many of the GC Controller's
parameters from being changed using
MON2000.

The keylock switch affects
only online operations, i.e.
those that are performed while
connected to a GC Controller.
The keylock switch feature is
only available on controllers
with BOS version 1.6 and
later. The GC Controller
parameters protected by the
keylock switch may vary
slightly from version to
version.

JULY 2010

Most of the dialog boxes in the Application’s
menu allows you to view data but does not
allow you to save changes when the keylock
switch is closed. Several items in the Reports
and Control menus are unavailable when the
keylock switch is closed. The Users dialog
cannot be downloaded to the GC Controller
when the keylock switch is closed. A GC
application cannot be downloaded to the GC
Controller when the keylock switch is closed.
Since most of the GC Controller's parameters
are protected by the keylock switch, it is easiest
to list the operations that are available when
the keylock switch is closed. The following
operations are available when the keylock
switch is closed:

Keylock Switch Control

3-16

GETTING STARTED

MON2000

The stream sequences can be changed in the
System dialog box. (GC applications version
1.7 and above.)
• Automatic calibration in the Analog
Outputs dialog box
• Report display
• GC report request (GC applications version
1.7 and above)
• MON2000 printer control (GC applications
version 1.7 and above)
• View archive data
• Trend data
• Maintenance Log editing (GC applications
version 1.7 and above)
• Alarms (except clear/ack all active alarms)
• Event log
• Chromatogram viewer (including forced
calibration using archived chromatograms)
• Start Auto-Sequencing
• Start single stream
• Halt analysis
• Start calibration
• View and set GC time (GC applications
version 1.7 and above)
3.7

CONFIGURING YOUR PRINTER
Use this function to configure the settings for
the printer connected to your PC. This
configuration will apply to any print job queued
from MON2000.
The settings available depend on the printer
type. Refer to the manufacture’s user manual
for more information.
1. Use the File > Print Setup menu to access
this function.

Configuring Your Printer

JULY 2010

GETTING STARTED

MON2000

3-17

2. The Printer Setup dialog appears.

3. Use the provided data fields, radio buttons,
check and combo boxes to select the desired
settings.
Your configuration will be
cleared (i.e., the settings will
return to the default values)
when you exit MON2000.

Click the
button to configure
more advanced settings.
Refer to the printer operator manual for
more information.
4. Click the
printer.

button to queue the

Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.

JULY 2010

Configuring Your Printer

3-18

3.8

GETTING STARTED

MON2000

USING ONLINE HELP
Currently, the online help feature contains all
user information and instructions for each
MON2000 function as well as the MON2000
system.
To access the MON2000 Application Help file,
• Press the F1 key at any time to view help
topics that discuss the currently active
dialog or function.
• Use the Help > Help Topics menu to view
the help contents dialog.
Use the scroll bars and arrows to display more
of a topic. You can also resize and/or move the
topic dialog for better viewing convenience.
When applicable, a topic will contain links to
other related topics, notes, and helpful popups.
Use these links as you need.

Using Online Help

JULY 2010

GETTING STARTED

MON2000

3.9

3-19

OPERATING MODES FOR MODEL 700
The Model 700 GC supports four different
operating modes. Each mode allows the GC to
analyze data from a given number of detectors,
streams, and methods. See Table 3-4 for more
information.
Table 3-4 Operating Modes for Model 700

Mode ID
Number

Detectors
Supported

Streams
Supported

Methods
Supported

0

1

1

1

1

2

1

1

2

2

2

2

3

2

1

2

3.10

ABOUT MON2000
To verify information such as the software
version number, copyright date, and the call/
query ratio.
1. Use the Help > About MON2000 menu to
access this dialog.

JULY 2010

Operating Modes for Model 700

3-20

GETTING STARTED

MON2000

2. MON2000 appears the About MON2000
dialog.

The Call/Query Ratio estimates the quality
of your serial communications. If this ratio
is less than or equal to 0.5, then the
connection is problematic. The maximum
value of 1 indicates a good connection.
The TAPI version represents the Telephony
API software MON2000 accesses for dial-up
(i.e., remote) communications.
3. Click the
button to exit and
return to the main window.

About MON2000

JULY 2010

CONTROL FUNCTIONS

MON2000

4-1

CONTROL FUNCTIONS
4

The options in the Control pull-down menu
allow you to initiate various operating modes of
the gas chromatograph (GC) unit.
4.1

AUTO SEQUENCE
Use this function to start continuous GC
analysis runs that follow a predefined stream
sequence. At the initial startup, the current
stream (in the stream sequence) is the first
stream analyzed. See Section 5.8 for detailed
instructions on configuring the predefined
sequence.
1. Use the Control > Auto Sequence menu or
press the F2 key to access this function.
2. The Start Auto Sequence dialog appears.

3. Click the Purge check box to set the purging
option. Note that the default setting is ON.
Purging allows sample gas to flow through
the sample loop for 60 seconds prior to
beginning the first analysis.
4. Click the

button to continue.

Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.
Use the Report Display
option in the Reports menu
to view the results of the
Auto Sequence function.

JULY 2010

5. The Auto Sequence GC Analysis begins (if
you selected the Purge Stream option,
MON2000 performs this 60-second task
first).

Auto Sequence

4-2

CONTROL FUNCTIONS

MON2000

Use the status bar to monitor the progress
of this function.
To change the operating parameters, such
as the Timed Event Tables (TEVs) and
Component Data Tables (CDTs), See
Section 4 for information about Application
functions.
4.2

SINGLE STREAM
Use this function to start continuous GC
analysis run(s) on a single stream.
1. Use the Control > Single Stream menu to
access this function.
2. The Start Single Stream Analysis dialog
appears.

3. Select the desired stream from the Stream
menu.
4. Click the Purge check box to set the purging
option. Note that the default setting is ON.
Purging allows sample gas to flow through
the sample loop for 60 seconds prior to
beginning the first analysis.
5. Click the Continuous operation check box to
perform repetitive analysis runs. Note that
the default setting is ON.
Deselect this option if you want to perform
only one analysis run.

Single Stream

JULY 2010

CONTROL FUNCTIONS

MON2000

4-3

6. Click the
button to accept your
selections and continue.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.
7. The Single Stream GC Analysis begins (if
you selected the Purge Stream option,
MON2000 performs this 60-second task
first).

Use the Report Display
option in the Reports menu
to view the results of the
Single Stream function.

Use the status bar to monitor the progress
of this function.

4.3

HALT
Use this function to stop the current operation
mode at the end of the run in progress.
1. Use the Control > Halt menu or press the F3
key to access this function.
2. MON2000 prompts you to confirm your
selection.

Click the

button to proceed.

Click the
button to abort and return
to the main window.
3. After the current run finishes, the function
stops and “Idle” appears in the status bar.

JULY 2010

Halt

4-4

4.4

CONTROL FUNCTIONS

MON2000

CALIBRATION
Use this function to calibrate the GC unit.
Calibration runs are determined by the CDT
and Streams settings. See Section 5.2 and
Section 5.8 for detailed instructions on how to
edit these settings.
1. Use the Control > Calibration menu to
access this function.

If the GC unit is in Auto Sequence mode,
calibration will not start until 2 or more
analysis runs have been completed. This delay
is required to complete the current analysis
and the analysis of the stream currently
purging through the valve.

2. The Start Calibration dialog appears.

MON2000 displays the stream to be used
for the calibration.
To select which stream is used for
calibration, See Section 5.8.
3. Click the Purge check box to set the purging See Section 7.1 to select
report parameters.
option. Note that the default setting is ON.

Calibration

JULY 2010

CONTROL FUNCTIONS

MON2000

4-5

Purging allows sample gas to flow through
the sample loop for 60 seconds prior to
beginning the first analysis.
4. Select the desired calibration type.
(a) Click the Manual radio button to
perform a manual calibration.
The CDT for the selected stream(s) will
not be updated with raw data that are
outside the acceptable deviations (as
listed on the CDT). For more
information, See Section 5.2.

For either choice, only VAR
(variable) components on
the CDT are updated. See
Section 5.2 for details.

(b) Click the Forced radio button to perform
a manual calibration.
The CDT for the selected stream(s) will
be updated with raw data that are
outside the acceptable deviations (as
listed on the CDT). For more
information, See Section 5.2.
5. Click the
button to accept your
selections and continue.

Use the Report Display option
in the Reports menu to view
the results of the Calibration
function.

Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.
6. The Calibration begins.
Use the status bar to monitor the progress
of this function.
4.5

BASELINE RUN
Use this function to initiate a single GC
baseline run, to assess chromatogram peaks
caused by the GC valve action alone. A baseline
run is a calibration-like run during which no
calibration or sample gas is injected (i.e., the
valve is not fired).

JULY 2010

Baseline Run

4-6

CONTROL FUNCTIONS

MON2000

1. Use the Control > Baseline Run menu to
access this function.

If the GC unit is in Auto Sequence mode, MON2000
prompts that the continuous analysis must be stopped.
Halt the analysis (See Section 4.3) and wait for an Idle
status. Then continue initiating the baseline run.

2. The Start Baseline Run dialog appears.

MON2000 displays the stream to be used
for the baseline run.
To select which stream is used for the
baseline calibration, See Section 5.8.
3. Click the

button to continue.

Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.
Use the status bar to monitor the progress
of this function. Use the Report Display
option in the Reports menu to view the
results of the Baseline Run function?

Baseline Run

JULY 2010

CONTROL FUNCTIONS

MON2000

4.6

4-7

AUTO BTU START UP AND VALVE TIMING
The Auto BTU Start Up process, which takes
about an hour to complete, automatically
performs the following sequence of tasks:
1. Sets the timing for each valve.
2. Matches all the component peaks.
3. Adjusts the timed events based on peak
integration times.
4. Runs a calibration.
5. Checks the range and order of response
factors.
6. Adjusts the retention time deviations to
avoid peak overlapping.
You can also initiate a valve timing run, which
is the first step of the Auto BTU Start Up
process, independently of that process. See
“Starting a Valve Timing Run” on page 12 for
more information.

4.6.1

Initiating an Auto BTU Start Up Run
To launch the Auto BTU Start Up process, do
the following:
1. If the GC is currently performing an
analysis, select Halt from the Control menu
to put the GC in Idle mode after the current
analysis run.

JULY 2010

Auto BTU Start Up and Valve Timing

4-8

CONTROL FUNCTIONS

MON2000

2. Select Valve Timing from the Control menu.
The Valve Timing window displays.

MON2000 displays in the Stream field the
calibration stream(s) to be used for the Auto
BTU Start Up run.
3. Select the Auto BTU Start Up checkbox.
4. To use the default Component Data and
Timed Event tables, select the Default CDT/
TEV checkbox.

Initiating an Auto BTU Start Up Run

JULY 2010

MON2000

CONTROL FUNCTIONS

4-9

It is strongly recommended that you use the Default
CDT/TEV.

When the Default CDT/TEV checkbox is
selected, the Valve # and CDT Component
fields are read-only.
5. To use the GC’s existing CDT/TEV tables,
select the Configured CDT/TEV checkbox.

You can enter a valve number in the Valve #
field and select the component number from
the drop-down list of the CDT Component
field in the table below the checkboxes. The
list of components are from the CDT of the
corresponding calibration stream.

neo-Pentane is not available in the CDT Component
drop-down list.

JULY 2010

Initiating an Auto BTU Start Up Run

4-10

CONTROL FUNCTIONS

MON2000

6. To allow sample gas to flow through the
sample loop for 60 seconds prior to
beginning the first analysis, click the Purge
stream for 60 seconds check box.

It is strongly recommended that you check the Purge
stream for 60 seconds check box.

7. Click OK to begin the Auto BTU Start Up
process. When the process starts, the GC
Status window indicates that the GC is in
Vlv Timing mode.

If the Auto BTU Start Up run fails, an
alarm will be triggered and displayed in the
Alarm Log.

Initiating an Auto BTU Start Up Run

JULY 2010

MON2000

CONTROL FUNCTIONS

4-11

The following six potential system alarms can be
triggered during the Auto BTU Start Up process:
• Valve Timing 1 Failure: Triggered if the timing for
valve 1 cannot be determined after a ten second
change of VALVE OFF time.
• Valve Timing 2 Failure: Triggered if the timing for
valve 2 cannot be determined after a ten second
change of VALVE OFF time.
• Valve Timing 3 Failure: Triggered if the timing for
valve 3 cannot be determined after a ten second
change of VALVE OFF time.
• Auto BTU RT Failure - Missing Peaks: Triggered if
not all the peaks are found after running the
calibration stream to match all component peaks.
• Auto BTU Response Factor Failure: Triggered if all
of the response factors are not within +/- 50% of
the default values after the calibration runs.
• Auto BTU Calib Failure - RF Order: Triggered if the
response factors are not in the proper order after
the calibration runs.
A triggered alarm will be posted in the Alarm Log.
See Section 8.3 for detailed instructions on reading
Alarm Logs.

JULY 2010

Initiating an Auto BTU Start Up Run

4-12

4.6.2

CONTROL FUNCTIONS

MON2000

Starting a Valve Timing Run

If the GC is in Auto Sequence mode, halt the analysis
(See Section 4.3) and then return to the Valve Timing
window.

1. Select Valve Timing from the Control menu.
The Start Valve Timing Run dialog appears.
2. If the Auto BTU Start Up checkbox is
selected, uncheck it. The valve timing
feature is now enabled.

3. MON2000 displays in the Stream field the
calibration stream(s) to be used for the
valve timing run.
4. To allow sample gas to flow through the
sample loop for 60 seconds prior to
beginning the first analysis, click the Purge
stream for 60 seconds check box..

Starting a Valve Timing Run

JULY 2010

CONTROL FUNCTIONS

MON2000

4-13

5. You can enter a valve number in the Valve #
field and select the component number from
the drop-down list of the CDT Component
field in the table below the checkboxes. The
list of components are from the CDT of the
corresponding calibration stream.
6. Click the
button to accept your
selections and to continue.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.
7. The Valve Timing run begins.
If no change was made to a valve’s timing,
the following message will be posted in the
Alarm Log: “Valve Timing N Failure”,
where N is the ID number for the valve. See
Section 8.3 for detailed instructions on
reading Alarm Logs. If all valves are
successfully optimized, no messages will be
recorded.
4.7

GC TIME
Use the GC Time function to view and, if
necessary, set the system date and time used
by the GC Controller.

4.7.1

View GC Time
To view the system date and time used by the
GC, do the following:
1. Use the Control > GC Time > View menu to
select the View option.

JULY 2010

GC Time

4-14

CONTROL FUNCTIONS

MON2000

2. The following MON2000 dialog appears.

3. Click the
button to exit this dialog
and return to the main window.
4.7.2

Set GC Time
To set the system date and time used by the
GC,
1. Use the Control > GC Time > Set menu to
select the Set option.
2. The Set GC Time dialog appears MON2000
indicates whether the GC Controller is on
daylight saving or standard time, which
depends on the configured system
parameters.

3. Use the provided pull-down arrow to access
an interactive calendar.
Click the left/right arrows to view the
previous or future months.
Click the desired day for the date. Note that
a blue oval appears on the selected day.
4. Select which part of the time (hour, minute,
or seconds) you wish to change. Use the

Set GC Time

JULY 2010

CONTROL FUNCTIONS

MON2000

4-15

provided scroll arrows to increase or
decrease the highlighted value.
5. Click the
button or press the
enter key to write the selected date/time to
the GC Controller.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.
4.8

STOP NOW
Use this function to immediately stop all
analysis runs.
1. Use the Control > Stop Now menu to access
this function.
2. MON2000 prompts you to confirm your
selection.

Click the

button to proceed.

Click the
button to abort and return
to the main window.

This function forces the system to the Idle mode. If
Stop Now is performed while an analysis is in
progress, the components will continue to elute from
the columns per the Idle mode. All resultant data will
be lost.
Do not perform a Stop Now unless absolutely
necessary. Whenever possible, use the Halt function.

JULY 2010

Stop Now

4-16

CONTROL FUNCTIONS

MON2000

3. Any GC function in progress is stopped. The
Mode field in the status bar displays ‘Idle’.

Stop Now

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5-1

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
5

The options in the Application pull-down menu
allow you to manipulate or edit the control
settings that exist for particular gas
chromatograph (GC) application functions. You
can edit an application while online with the
GC Controller or when using the Offline Edit
function (see Section 2.19 for information on
Offline Edit; see Section 2.17 to download an
application first).
5.1

SYSTEM
Use this function to define or edit the GC
stream sequence, unit name, and system
description. You can also use this function to
activate Metric Base Condition for calculations
based on metric units.
The System dialog also includes a series of noneditable fields for reference or trouble shooting.
See Table 5-1 for a summary of the items
provided by the System dialog, along with the
related functions and editing status.
1. Use the Application > System menu to
access this function.

JULY 2010

System

5-2

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

2. The System dialog appears.

Click and edit any value presented in the
white cells.
Note that the Daylight Savings Time option,
when set to “Override,” will make the GC
Controller ignore the time change from
Standard to Daylight Savings (i.e.,
Standard Time will remain).
3. Click the
button to accept your
changes and return to the main window.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.

System

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5-3

Table 5-1 Description of Items in System Dialog
Item

Function

Stream Sequence

Defines the order of stream analysis for Detector 1.

Stream Sequence 2

Defines the order of stream analysis for Detector 2;
only available with selected hardware.

Edit

Note that this item is not available in all GC applications.
Aux. Stream Sequence

Defines the auxiliary order of stream analysis for
Detector 1. Can be used to run an alternative stream
sequence when a Discrete Input is set (see Section 5.11
for detailed instructions).
Note that this item is not available in all GC applications.

Aux. Stream Sequence 2

Additional alternative stream sequence provided for
second detector in dual detector applications.
Auxiliary order of stream analysis for Detector 2. Can
be used to run an alternative stream sequence when a
Discrete Input is set (see Section 5.11 for detailed
instructions).
Note that this item is not available in all GC applications.

Analyzer Name

Defines the GC unit name that appears in the status
bar of the main window when connected to the GC Controller. Can contain up to 12 characters.

Unit Type

Identifies GC unit type (i.e., model number).

System Description

A field to record miscellaneous reference
information to further identify the system. Can contain
up to 28 characters.

Chromatogram Buffer Size

Provides number of bytes used to store a
chromatogram.

Max Peaks

Provides maximum number of peaks (application-specific).

JULY 2010

System

5-4

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

Table 5-1 Description of Items in System Dialog (Continued)
Item

Function

Number of Valves

Identifies number of chromatographic valves
(application-specific).

Daylight Savings Time

Allows the GC Controller to adjust automatically for
DST. “Normal” enables automatic DST adjustment
(United States). “Override” disables automatic DST
adjustment.

CGM Analog Output

Displays chromatogram trace signals for strip chart
generation from Detectors 1 and/or 2, trace 1 only.
Identifies the analog output number.

Edit

If this field is set to 0, then no analog output will
produce the CGM signal.

When assigning a CGM Analog Output, also check the
Analog Outputs dialog (see Section 5.10). A CGM
Analog Output setting that uses a previously assigned
analog output number will produce erratic CGM trace
output, possibly with incorrect scaling.
Do not assign this item analog output number 1 if the
connected GC unit supports bargraph output
(see Section 5.10.3 for details).
CGM Baseline Offset

A fixed offset (percent of full scale) added to the CGM
analog output to allow the user to conveniently position
the chromatogram on a strip chart recorder. Displays
chromatogram trace signals for strip chart generation
from Detectors 1 and/or 2. Identifies the baseline offset.

CFG Baseline Number

Identifies the Standard GC Application software from
which this GC application or configuration was
developed (i.e., the number of the standard configuration file that was used to generate the current application).

Metric Base Condition

Enables (metric) or disables (off) whether MON2000
displays the GC Control Calculation in metric units.
See Section 5.5.1 for details.

System

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5-5

Table 5-1 Description of Items in System Dialog (Continued)
Item

Function

Max Archive Averages

maximum number of averages (1-254)

Max Archive Avg. Records

maximum number of archive records per average
without an extended memory card (1-128)

Application Revision

(non-edit) - revision level of the current application

Application Base Name

(non-edit) - base name of the application

Archive Days

(non-edit) – maximum number of days that archive
records are kept (1-400)

BOS Revision

(non-edit) – revision level of the BOS

JULY 2010

Edit

System

5-6

5.2

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

COMPONENT DATA
Use this function to view and/or edit the
Component Data Tables (CDTs) for a given GC
application.
1. Use the Application > Component Data
menu or press the F6 key to access this
function.
2. The Component Data Tables menu appears,
listing the CDTs available per associated
stream(s).

Choose the desired CDT.

The number of available CDTs depends on the GC unit
configuration.
The standard GC application contains 4 CDTs. MON2000
can operate GC applications with up to 5 CDTs.
To assign a CDT to a stream, see Section 5.8.

3. Click the
button to accept your
selection. The Component Data Table dialog
appears.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.

Component Data

JULY 2010

MON2000

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

5-7

4. View or edit data. Double-click a given table
cell or use one of the edit function buttons to
make your changes.
To add a new component,
move the cursor to the last
table cell (last row, last
column) and press ENTER.

Some table cells will change into pull-down
menus when selected. Choose your data
from the pull-down menu provided.
Note that a red component name indicates a
standard component. A black component
name indicates that this component has
been edited or defined by the user.
For more information on the editing
functions available, see Section 5.2.1
through Section 5.2.4.
For descriptions of the standard data
presented in a CDT, see Table 5-2.
5. Click the
button to accept your
changes and return to the main window.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.

JULY 2010

Component Data

5-8

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

Table 5-2 Description of Standard Parameters in a CDT
Item

Function

Number (#)

component number

Edit

An index number that acts as an identification
label when used in other menus/dialogs (e.g., Limit
Alarms, Analog Outputs). Up to 20 components
can be defined per data table.
Component

names assigned to the various components
displayed
Components can be selected from the standard
list, by pressing the F2 key (see Section 5.2.1), or
entered by the user. Up to 15 characters can be
used for the component name.

USR/STD

whether the component data is standard or userdefined
If the component was added by the Select
Standard Component function (see Section 5.2.1)
and no changes were made to the component data,
STD displays. If the component was added
manually by the user or modified, USR displays.

Detector ID

component detector number

Retention Time

time in seconds that apex of the component peak
will appear
Range = 0 to 6000 seconds

Ensure that the component retention times do
not exceed the analysis time, as defined by the
TEV Table (see Section 5.3). MON2000 does not
automatically prevent the user from defining
excessive component retention times.
Response Factor

equal to the raw data of component peak divided
by component concentration
The maximum value is 1.0E+38.

Component Data

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5-9

Table 5-2 Description of Standard Parameters in a CDT (Continued)
Item

Function

Edit

Fixed/Variable

whether a component response factor is fixed or
variable
A fixed response factor will not be updated during
calibration.

Calibration Concentration

component concentration in calibration gas
To enter a PPM, type “Xp”; e.g., “4.0p” will appear
as “4.0 ppm”. Values above 90 PPM are converted
to percentages.

Analysis Method

used to determine component raw data value
Use the pull-down menu to select either area,
height, fixed, or the appropriate analog input
(used with auxiliary analyzer).

RT Percent Dev.

maximum acceptable percentage of deviation of
the new retention time from the current retention
time

RT Secs. Dev.

maximum acceptable deviation time, in seconds, of
the new retention time from the current retention
time

RT Update Method

determines when component retention time will be
updated
Select Analysis to update after each run.
Select Calib to update only during final calibration
run.

Resp. Factor % Dev.

maximum acceptable percent deviation between
the new response factor and the current response
factor

Total Concentration

total concentration of all components

JULY 2010

Component Data

5-10

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

See Table 5-2 an asterisk (*) in the column heading indicates a column that contains
standard component values. If any of these values is modified, the corresponding
component becomes non-standard (i.e., user-defined). It is not recommended that you
edit a standard component value.

5.2.1

Select Standard Component(s)
To select standard component(s) to be used by
the displayed CDT,
1. Select the Component cell where you want
the new component.
2. Click the
button or press the
F2 key to access the Standard Components
menu.

To add a new row to the
CDT, click the last cell in the
last row and press the
ENTER key.

3. The Standard Components menu appears.
4. Double-click the selected component to add
it to the CDT. The component is
automatically inserted into the selected
table cell.
Click the
button or press the ESC key to
abort and return to the Component Data
Table dialog.

Select Standard Component(s)

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5.2.2

5-11

Select Standard Values
To read the values for the standard
components, click the
button or
press the F3 key to access the Standard
Components dialog.

Click the
CDT.
5.2.3

Typically, this function
should only be performed
when the MON2000
software is upgraded.
User-defined components
are not affected by this
update.

JULY 2010

button to return to the

Update Standard Component(s)
Click the
or press the F5 key to
upgrade the Standard Components list of this
CDT to match the MON2000 Standard
Component menu.
Note that this function updates the standard
component list for the current CDT. MON2000
displays a confirmation dialog when a standard
component is changed.

Select Standard Values

5-12

5.2.4

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

View Raw Data
To view the raw data for the displayed CDT,
1. Select the desired row from the currently
displayed CDT.
2. Click the
button or press the
F4 key to access the Raw Data dialog.
3. The Stream Selection dialog appears.
Double-click the desired stream or click the
button to exit. Only the streams
associated with this CDT will display in the
list menu.
4. The Raw Data dialog appears, listing the
peak raw data from the last run of the
stream represented by the CDT.

When first displayed during a
session, the Select Stream
dialog highlights the stream
that has the most recent raw
data. Thereafter, the
previously selected stream is
highlighted.

5. The MON2000 operator can now copy the
Retention Time from the Raw Data screen
to the CDT as follows:
(a) Before pulling up the Raw Data screen,
click Component #1 of the CDT.
(b) Click the Raw Data button or press the
(F4) key to access the Raw Data screen.
(c) Press the ENTER key to copy the
Retention Time (the next component's

View Raw Data

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5-13

RT is automatically targeted by
MON2000). Then, press the DOWN
ARROW key to advance to the next 'Raw
Data' value.
(d) Repeat Step (c) until all Retention Times
have been copied to the CDT.
6. Click the
Data screen.

button to clear the Raw

Following is an example of a Raw Data
Table.
Table 5-3 Raw Data Table

Some methods are a
combination of the above
types, e.g. 103 is LAST OF
FUSED GROUP (3) and
INHIBIT ON (100).

JULY 2010

Description

Method

Baseline Resolved

1

Fused

2

Last of Fused Group

3

Tangent Skimmed

4

Resolved Rider Peak

5

Fused Rider

6

Last of Fused Rider

7

Tailing Peak

8

Forward Horizontal

20

Backward Horizontal

40

Baseline Forced at Valley

60

Inhibit On

100

Forced Integrate On

200

Forced Integrate End

300

Plateau Detect

400

Summation

500

View Raw Data

5-14

5.2.5

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

Sort Retention Time
To sort the components listed in the displayed
CDT by their retention times,
1. Click the
button or press the
F6 key to access this function.

MON2000 sorts
components by the
corresponding detector
number first, then by the
Retention Time.

2. MON2000 automatically sorts the
components.

Sorting the CDT components by retention time
may affect one or more of the following:
•
•
•
•
•

5.3

Analog Outputs
Averages
Bargraphs
Limit Alarms
User Defined Calculations

TIMED EVENTS
Use this function to view and/or edit the GC
Timed Events Tables (TEVs) assigned to and
used by particular gas streams.
Timed Events Description•

See Section 6.6.2 for details about editing
from the Chromatogram > Chromatogram
Viewer menu.

• Analysis Time - Input total analysis time.
LIMITS: 0.0 to 6000.0 seconds
• Cycle Time - Input total cycle time. LIMITS:
0.0 to 6000.0 seconds
• Off During Baseline (per sample valve) toggle check boxes to select which valve(s)
remain off during a baseline run

Sort Retention Time

The Cycle Time must be at
least 10 seconds greater
than the Analysis Time.

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5-15

Valve Events

• Type - use the pull-down menu to select
between valve number (Valve #), discrete
output channel number (DO #), and stream
switch (Strm Sw); additional selections
SSO1, SSO2, Bleed1, Bleed2, Block1 and
Block2 are available for the Model 700 GC
applications
• Valve/DO # (for valves and discrete outputs
only) - input the valve number or discrete
output channel number. Use the provided
combo box to select valve number by name
• State (for all types except for stream switch)
- use the pull-down menu to toggle ON\OFF
• Time - input the time that the event is to
occur. LIMITS: 0.0 to 6000.0 seconds
Integration Events

• Type - use the pull-down menu to select
between Inhibit, Integrate, Auto Zero, Slope
Sensitivity, Peak Width, Single Baseline,
FID Gain, Summation, or Fused Override
• Value - For peak width or slope sensitivity,
input the number of points to be used.
LIMITS: Peak Width and Slope Sensitivity,
1 to 99
• For FID gain, use the pull-down menu to
toggle Low\High.
• For Single Baseline, use the pull-down
menu to toggle OFF\BGN (Beginning)\END.
• Except for AutoZero, for all others use the
pull-down menu to toggle ON\OFF. Auto
Zero does not have 'Value' field.
• Det - enter the appropriate detector number
that the event will effect. Valid range is '1'
or '2'
• Time - input the time that the event is to
occur. LIMITS: 0.0 to 6000.0 seconds

JULY 2010

Timed Events

5-16

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

Spectrum Gain Events

• Detector # - use the pull-down menu to
select between detectors #1 and #2
See Section 6.6 for editing
• Gain - input the gain value for that detector. TEVs from CGM Viewer.
LIMITS: 0 to 24
• Time - input the time that the event is to
occur. LIMITS: 0.0 to 6000.0 seconds
To access the Timed events feature,
1. Use the Application > Timed Events menu
or press the F5 key to access this function.
2. The Timed Event Tables menu displays,
listing the TEVs available per associated
stream(s).

Choose the desired TEV.

The number of available TEVs depends on the GC
unit configuration.
The standard GC application contains four TEVs.
MON2000 can operate GC Applications with up
to five TEVs.
To assign a TEV to a stream, use the Streams
function (see Section 5.8).

Timed Events

JULY 2010

MON2000

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

5-17

3. Click the
button to accept your
selection. The Timed Events Table dialog
appears.
Click the
button to abort and
MON2000 returns you to the main window.

4. View or edit data.

To add a new timed event, move the cursor
to the last table cell (last row, last column)
and press the ENTER key.

Use the check boxes to toggle the listed
sample valves ON or OFF.
Double-click a given table cell or use one of
the edit function buttons to make your
changes. Some table cells will change into
pull-down menus when selected. Choose
your data from the pull-down menu
provided.

JULY 2010

Timed Events

5-18

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5. To sort data based on time, click the
button for the corresponding table.
6. Click the
button to accept your
changes and return to the main window.

If you configure duplicate TEVs (i.e., 2 or more
TEVs contain the same parameter settings), an
error dialog will display but your data will be saved.

Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.

Timed Events

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5.4

5-19

USER DEFINED
The user-defined functions allow you to edit a
user-defined operator entry for an applicationspecific variable. These variables may be used
in reports, calculations, and/or for controlling
the GC operations; however, user-defined
variables are not used by all applications.

5.4.1

Numeric
Use this function to edit values for defined
initialized variables. The User Defined
Numerics dialog defines the names, types, and
values for all application-specific numeric
variables.
1. Use the Application > User Defined >
Numerics menu to access this function.
2. The User-Defined Numerics dialog appears.

Double-click the desired Value cell and type
the new number.
3. Click the
button to accept your
changes and return to the main window.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.

JULY 2010

User Defined

5-20

5.4.2

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

Selection
Use this function to edit values for defined
selection variables. The User Defined
Selections dialog defines the names and values
for all application-specific selection variables.
1. Use the Application > User Defined >
Selection menu to access this function.
2. The User-Defined Selections dialog appears.

Double-click the desired Option cell and use
the provided pull-down menu to select the
new setting.
3. Click the
button to accept your
changes and return to the main window.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.
5.4.3

Text Strings
Use this function to edit text strings for defined
string variables that may be used in reports.
The User Defined Text Strings dialog defines
the symbol name, size, and assigned text string
for all application-specific text variables.
1. Use the Application > User Defined > Text
Strings menu to access this function.

Selection

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5-21

2. The User-Defined Text Strings dialog
appears.

Double-click the desired String cell and type
the new text.
3. Click the
button to accept your
changes and return to the main window.

String length (i.e., how many
characters you can enter) is
limited to the number cited in
the Size cell.

Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.
5.5

CALCULATIONS
These options allow you to activate and define
how the output of standard or user-defined
chromatograph analysis data is used in various
calculations.

5.5.1

Control
Use this function to designate, by streams, the
standard calculations (e.g., mole percent, liquid
volume, gas density, Wobbe index, etc.) that
should be performed from the GC analysis
data. Calculations are enabled or disabled for
each sample stream.
1. Use the Application > Calculations >
Control menu to access this function.

JULY 2010

Calculations

5-22

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

2. The Control Calculations dialog appears.

Click the check boxes to toggle a calculation
ON or OFF for a given stream.
Scroll towards the end of the list to set
metric calculations.

You can use the arrow
keys to move from one
Stream cell to another, and
press the space bar to
toggle the calculation.

Before enabling a metric calculation, ensure
that you also enable the Metric Base
Conditions setting in the Systems dialog
(see Section 5.1).
3. Click the
button to accept your
selections and return to the main window.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.

Control

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5.5.2

5-23

Averages
Use this function to designate, by streams and
components, averages of standard calculations
MON2000 should perform.
1. Use the Application > Calculations >
Averages menu to access this function.
2. The Averages Calculations dialog appears.
Double-click the desired cell and either type
the new data or use the provided pull-down
menu to select the new setting.

When changing the reset time, note the
following:

JULY 2010

Average

Setting Used

Hourly

Reset Time

24-Hour

Day, Reset Time

Weekly

Weekday

Monthly

Day, Reset Time

Averages

5-24

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

To set a custom time interval per
calculation, set the Type to Variable and
enter the desired interval length in the
Hours cell. A setting of “0” means an
average calculation will be performed for
each analysis run of that stream.

Any GC analysis variable with defined
alarm limits cannot be averaged or archived
while in an active alarm state (see
Section 5.6 for more information on Limit
Alarms).
To disable this feature, use the Control
Calculations function to set Avg Limit
Alarm Test to OFF (see Section 5.5.1).

Note that this custom Hours setting
overrides the Reset Time setting.
3. Use the provided pull-down menu to add a
new variable to the list.
4. To view an archive of averages for a given
variable, select the desired variable and
click the
key.

button or press the F5

The Archive Data dialog for that variable
appears.

Averages

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5-25

To save this archive to disk, right-click the
archive table and select the Save Sheet
option from the pop-up menu.
An error message displays
when the last available stream
or component is reached.

5. To copy the stream settings from a
highlighted row and apply them to the next
row, click the
button or press
the F7 key. This feature also increments the
Stream value to the next available stream
(e.g., incrementing from Stream 2 to
Stream 8), per the GC application.
6. To copy the component settings from a
highlighted row and apply them to the next
row, click the
button or press
the F8 key. This feature also increments the
Component value to the next available
component (e.g., incrementing from
“Ammonia” to “Benzene”), per the GC
application.
7. To copy the Restart setting from a
highlighted row and apply it to the next
row, click the
the F9 key.

button or press

8. Click the
button to accept your
selections and return to the main window.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.
5.5.3

User Defined
Use this function to create and edit customized
calculations on GC analysis data. MON2000
will allow up to 20 user-defined calculations.
1. Use the Application > Calculations > User
Defined menu to access this function.

JULY 2010

User Defined

5-26

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

2. The User-Defined Calculations dialog
appears.

3. Click the calculation name you wish to edit,
or click in the next available blank Label
cell. The Label field accepts 15 characters.
4. Click the
button to edit or
create the calculation function. The Edit
User-Defined Calculation dialog appears.

Your user-defined calculation
becomes a variable that can be
used when:
•
•
•
•

calculating averages
assigning alarm limits
calculating analog outputs
generating bargraphs and
reports
• creating other user-defined
calculations

User Defined

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5-27

(a) To change the calculation function, click
the appropriate cell and use the pulldown menu to choose the desired
operator.

The calculation completes
each step from top to
bottom.

To change or add a variable name, use
the Variables pull-down menu.
To select a stream or component, click
the appropriate cell and use the pulldown menu to choose the desired stream/
component.
Enter any constant values in the Value 1
and Value 2 cells.
(b) Click the
button to accept
your changes and return to the UserDefined Calculation dialog.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the User-Defined Calculation
dialog.
5. Click the
button to accept your
new or edited calculation and return to the
main window.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.
5.6

LIMIT ALARMS
Use this function to set threshold limits for GC
analysis data. When a limit is exceeded, an
alarm is activated and logged. See Section 8.3
for information on Alarm Logs.
Note that Modbus Registers assigned to alarms
are application-specific.

JULY 2010

Limit Alarms

5-28

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

1. Use the Application > Limit Alarms menu
to access this function.
2. The Limit Alarms dialog appears.

3. To change the assigned variable, stream or
component, click the appropriate cell and
use the provided pull-down menu.
Note that you must first select a variable
before entering the related data.
4. To assign the discrete hardware output that
will be set when the alarm is active, click in
the appropriate cell and use the provided
pull-down menu.

You can add a new variable
only if an available row is
blank. The number of
allowed limit alarms is fixed
by the GC application.

Output values range from “1” to “N”, per the
discrete hardware output identification
number and the GC application. A discrete

Limit Alarms

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5-29

output of “0 - Not used” indicates that no
output is set.

A discrete output can be used to monitor one or
more inputs.
If you are using discrete outputs to reflect the status
of discrete inputs, ensure that the output
assignments set here coordinate with those set in
the Discrete Alarms dialog (see Section 5.7).

To set discrete outputs, see Section 5.12.
5. To change the alarm type, click the
appropriate cell and use the provided pulldown menu.
Type

Purpose

All

use all 4 limits (both Low and both High)

High

use only High and High-High limits

Low

use only Low and Low-Low limits

6. Input the desired high/low limits in the
appropriate cells.
7. To copy the stream settings from a
highlighted row and apply them to the next
An error message displays
when the last available
stream or component is
reached.

JULY 2010

row, click the
button or press
the F5 key. This feature increments the
Stream value to the next available stream
(e.g., incrementing from “Stream 2” to
“Stream 8”), per the GC application.

Limit Alarms

5-30

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

8. To copy the component settings from a
highlighted row and apply them to the next
row, click the
button or press
the F6 key. This feature increments the
Component value to the next available
component (e.g., incrementing from
“Ammonia” to “Benzene”), per the GC
application.
9. Click the
button to accept your
changes and return to the main window.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.
Limit Alarms Description

• Variable - selected variable assigned to the
limit alarm
• Stream - stream number assigned to the
variable or the channel number if an analog
input or analog output
• Component - component name and number
assigned to the variable
• Discrete Output - number of the discrete
hardware output that will be set when the
alarm is active; zero indicates no discrete
output will be set

Limit Alarms

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5-31

• Type - High uses only the high and the highhigh limits, Low uses only the low and the
low-low limits, and All uses both low and
both high limits

5.7

Type

Purpose

Low-Low

If the variable value falls below this
limit, the low-low limit alarm is activated. This alarm is for extreme situations

Low

If the variable value falls below this
limit, the low limit alarm is activated.

High

If the variable value rises above this
limit, the high limit alarm is activated.

High-High

If the variable value rises above this
limit, the high-high limit alarm is activated. This alarm is for extreme situations.

DISCRETE ALARMS
Use this function to assign discrete hardware
inputs, used to set alarms, to one of the
available discrete hardware outputs.
For more information on discrete outputs, see
Section 5.12.
1. Use the Application > Discrete Alarms menu
to access this function.

JULY 2010

Discrete Alarms

5-32

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

2. The Discrete Alarms dialog appears.

3. Use the provided Discrete Input pull-down
menu to select the identification number of
the discrete hardware input to be used for
alarm purposes.
Input values can range from “1” to “N”, per
the discrete hardware output identification
number and the GC application. A discrete
input of “0 - Not used” indicates that no
input has been assigned.
To configure discrete inputs, see
Section 5.11.

All alarms from digital
inputs with assignments
other than “0” are recorded
in the Alarm Log.

4. Use the provided Discrete Output pull-down
menu to select the identification number of

Discrete Alarms

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5-33

the discrete hardware output to be used for
alarm purposes.

A discrete output can be used to monitor one or
more inputs.
If you are using discrete outputs to reflect the
status of GC analysis data alarms, ensure that the
output assignments set here coordinate with those
set in the Limit Alarms dialog (see Section 5.6).

Output values can range from “1” to “N”, per
the discrete hardware output identification
number and the GC application. A discrete
output of “0 - Not used” indicates that no
output has been assigned. To configure
discrete outputs, see Section 5.12.
5.7.1

Delayed Discrete Alarms
A delayed discrete alarm can be set to trigger a
discrete alarm and activate the appropriate
discrete output if a previously specified discrete
input has been closed for a user-defined
amount of time.

JULY 2010

Delayed Discrete Alarms

5-34

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

For example, if discrete input #1 is closed for 60
seconds, discrete alarm #1 will be activated,
which will in turn activate discrete output #3.
MON2000 will display an active alarm in the
bottom row of the GC column of the GC Status
Bar. MON2000 will also copy the alarm
description in the Alarm Text column to the
appropriate Alarm screens.
The delayed discrete alarm feature is only
available with the following apps installed:
• 700_Mode0_v192 or later;
• 700_DewUS_v184 or later;
• 700_Mode1_v193 or later;
• 2350A_Mode0_v183 or later;
• 2350A_Mode1_v184 or later.

Delayed Discrete Alarms

JULY 2010

MON2000

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

5-35

To set up a discrete alarm, do the following:
1. Select Applications > User Defined >
Selection.... The User-Defined Selections
window displays.

2. Locate the Delyd_alm variable under the
Name column and set its Option to ON and
click OK.
Note that setting the Option to OFF
disables the delayed discrete alarm feature.
3. Select Applications > Discrete Alarms....
The Discrete Alarms window displays.

JULY 2010

Delayed Discrete Alarms

5-36

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

4. For the appropriate alarm, select the
discrete output that should be activated if
the associated discrete input is closed.
By default, discrete outputs #1, #2, and #3
can be selected.
To make discrete output #4 available for
selection, do the following:
(a) Select Applications > User Defined >
Selection.... The User-Defined Selections
window displays.
(b) Set EnableComAlarm to Disable.
(c) Select Applications > Discrete Outputs....
The Discrete Outputs window displays.
(d) Set the Switch field for discrete output
#4 to Auto.
To make discrete output #5 available for
selection, do the following:
(a) Select Applications > User Defined >
Selection.... The User-Defined Selections
window displays.
(b) Set EnableCalMan to Disable.
(c) Select Applications > Discrete Outputs....
The Discrete Outputs window displays.
(d) Set the Switch field for discrete output
#5 to Auto.

All discrete inputs should be set to “0 - Not used”.

5. Enter the appropriate alarm text in the
Alarm Text column, if desired. This text
will be copied to the appropriate alarm
screens if the discrete alarm is triggered.
6. Click OK to accept your changes.

Delayed Discrete Alarms

JULY 2010

MON2000

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

5-37

7. Select Applications > User Defined >
Numeric.... The User-Defined Numerics
window displays.

8. The following variables apply to the delayed
discrete alarm:
• delay_alm_da: Defines which discrete
alarm will be activated.
• delay_alm_di: Defines which discrete
input will be used to initiate the delayed
discrete alarm.

Although there are five discrete inputs available, closing
Discrete Input #4 will result in an active Analyzer Failure
alarm that will cause the GC to go to idle if Discrete
Input #4 remains closed up to the end of the current
analysis.
Discrete Input #5 can be used if the run_Aux_Seq option
in the 'User-Defined Selections window is set to OFF.

• delay_time: Defines the time, in
seconds, between the moment the
discrete input is closed and the delayed
discrete alarm is activated. Range is 0 to
500 seconds. Default value is 60
seconds.

JULY 2010

Delayed Discrete Alarms

5-38

5.8

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

STREAMS
This function allows you to:
• assign CDTs and TEVs to a particular
stream
• designate a stream for analysis or
calibration (or none)
• control automatic calibration parameters,
such as the total number of runs, runs to be
averaged, starting times, and time between
automatic calibrations and baseline runs
• define baseline pressure and temperature
conditions that are applicable to calculated
GC analysis data, such as compressibility

Streams

JULY 2010

MON2000

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

5-39

To use the Streams function,
1. Use the Application > Streams menu to
access this function.
2. The Streams dialog appears.

3. To edit the settings displayed, click the
appropriate cell, use the provided pull-down
menus, or to choose the check boxes to
enable or disable the automatic calibration
and baseline calibration.
See the following tables for details.

JULY 2010

Streams

5-40

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

The standard settings include:
Table 5-4 Description of Standard Stream Settings
Std Setting

Description



number label assigned by MON2000
This number correlates with the stream
switch. A maximum of 12 streams can be controlled by MON2000 and a standard GC application.

Name

text string label to identify a stream (12
character maximum)

Use

how stream is used
Settings include: calibration (CAL); analysis
(ANL); not used (NOT)

Det

detector used by this stream
Control of the detector is application-specific.
For example,
• for Model 700/2350A, Modes 0 and 1, the
Det col is “DET1” and read-only
• for Model 700/2350A, Mode 2, the Det col is
editable
• for Model 700/2350A, Mode 3, the Det col is
“DUAL” and read-only

CD

CDT associated with this stream (see
Section 5.2)

CD2

CDT 2 For the Model 700/2350A Modes 2 and
3, an additional CD column displays.

TE

TEV associated with this stream (see
Section 5.3)

TE2

TEV 2 For the Model 700/2350A Modes 2 and
3, an additional TE column displays.

Streams

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5-41

For calibration (CAL) streams, you can
edit the following control parameters:
Table 5-5 Description of Calibration Stream Settings
Cal Setting

Description

Tot

number of runs made for each calibration
Range: 1 to 10

Avg

number of last calibration runs to
average
E.g., if 5 calibration runs are performed
and Avg is set to “3”, then the last 3 runs
are used to average the calibration
results.

JULY 2010

Start

time the first automatic calibration is to
be performed

Int

number of hours between automatic
calibrations

Streams

5-42

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

Table 5-5 Description of Calibration Stream Settings (Continued)
Cal Setting

Description

Auto Cal
Auto Base

enable/disable the automatic calibration
and baseline run (first check box sets the
automatic calibration; second check box
sets the baseline run)

For the automatic calibration to work,
at least one stream switch (valve
event Strm Sw) must be included in
the corresponding TEV
(see Section 5.3).
If the automatic baseline run is enabled,
the GC performs an additional calibration run (before the calibration runs to be
averaged) without the calibration gas.
This run evaluates peaks caused by the
GC valve action alone; any peak areas
found are subtracted from the subsequent analyses. To view or print the
baseline run results, see Step 4.

Disabling the Auto Base setting will
delete existing CDT baseline data for
the associated stream.

You can edit the following parameters for a
defined stream used in GC calculations.
These parameters are also used for postanalysis calculations that use streamspecific base pressure and temperature
values. Note that these parameters are not
applicable for every application.

Streams

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5-43

.

Table 5-6 Description of GC Calculation Parameters
Par Setting

Description

PSIA
BAR

base temperature in PSIA or bar units

To change the displayed system
units, see Section 5.1 for details.
deg F
deg C

base temperature in degrees Fahrenheit
or Celsius

Opt Pres 1
Opt Pres 2
Opt Pres 3

If compressibility is activated for a particular stream (Calculation Control
function, (see Section 5.5.1), up to 3
optional pressures can be defined to
calculate additional post-analysis data.

Only the base pressure can be edited. The
base temperature is a constant 6 oF (15 oC)
for all calculations.
4. To view or print the baseline run results,
If a stream is not used,
you cannot access
baseline data for that
stream.

click the
button or press
the F2 key. The Baseline Values dialog
appears.

5. Click the
main window.

JULY 2010

button to return to the

Streams

5-44

5.9

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

ANALOG INPUTS
This function allows you to:
• assign identifying labels
• assign scale ranges
• calibrate analog inputs for zero and full
scale values
Electrical current signals ranging from 4 to
20mA ( ± 10 %) are accepted as analog inputs.
To use the Analog Inputs function,
1. Use the Application > Analog Inputs menu
to access this function.
2. The Analog Inputs dialog appears.

To edit the settings displayed, click the
appropriate cell or click and use the
provided pull-down menus.
The 2350A GC Controller and
the Model 700 unit supports
up to four AI channels.

Analog Inputs

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5-45

See the following table for details or refer to
Step 3 for a more automated process.
Table 5-7 Description of Analog Input Settings
Setting

Description

Channel

channel number assigned
Number of available analog inputs is
dependent upon the GC Controller
model.

Label

name used to identify the analog input
(12 characters maximum)

Zero Scale

value used as the zero scale when converting the analog input value

Full Scale

value used as the full scale when converting the analog input value

Fixed/Variable

analog input operation mode
FXD = fixed
VAR = variable
If the operation mode is fixed, the analog
input is set to the number entered for the
Fixed Value.

MON2000 accepts a Zero
Scale calibration value that
is higher than the Full Scale
value.
A higher Zero Scale value
can be useful in applications
that require an inverse
display, or record of analog
signal levels.

JULY 2010

Fixed Value

analog input value used during fixed
operation

Current Value

current readout values of the analog
inputs (values reflect scale assignments)

GC
GRI
PAZ

Gain Ratio Index (GRI) and Preamp Zero
(PAZ) readouts from the GC preamplifier’s 4 stages; use as a troubleshooting
aid
Normal preamp stage (gain) operating
ranges for Models 500, 700 and 1000 GC
units are shown in Table 5-8 below.

Zero Scale Calib
Adjustment mA

calibrated analog inputs for known zero
scale electrical current levels

Analog Inputs

5-46

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

Table 5-7 Description of Analog Input Settings (Continued)
Setting

Description

Full Scale Calib
Adjustment mA

calibrated analog inputs for known full
scale electrical current levels

Table 5-8 Gain Operating Ranges for Models 500, 700 and 1000 GCs
GC

GRI

PAZ
(12-bit AD)

Value
(12-bit AD)

PAZ
(16-bit AD)

Value
(16-bit AD)

1

0.0 to 0.0

600 to 800

0 to 4095

4800 to 6400

-32767 to 32767

2

0.8 to 1.1

600 to 800

0 to 4095

4800 to 6400

-32767 to 32767

3

0.8 to 1.1

600 to 800

0 to 4095

4800 to 6400

-32767 to 32767

4

0.8 to 1.1

1150 to 1500

0 to 4095

9200 to 12000

-32767 to 32767

3. To perform an automated input calibration,
(a) Select the desired channel by clicking
anywhere in that row.
(b) Set the analog input signal to either its
minimum level or the anticipated Zero
Value.

This step may require adjusting a rheostat, or
another controlling device, at the source of
the analog input signal.

(c) Set the anticipated Full Value.
(d) Click the
the F3 key.

button or press

You can abort this process at any time by
clicking the

Analog Inputs

button.

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5-47

4. The Zero Scale Adjustment dialog appears.

Click the

button to continue.

MON2000 accepts a Zero Scale calibration
value that is higher than the Full Scale
value. A higher Zero Scale value can be
useful in the applications that require an
inverse display, or record, of analog signal
levels. 2350A GC Controllers and Model 700
units support up to 4 Analog channels.
5. The Full Scale Adjustment dialog appears.
Adjust the Analog Input to its Full Scale
value.

Click the

button to continue.

6. MON2000 verifies that the recorded values
are acceptable. A confirmation dialog
displays.

Click the
changes.

button to accept your

Click the
button to cancel and return
to the Analog Input dialog.

JULY 2010

Analog Inputs

5-48

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

7. To perform a GRI (Gain Ratio Index)
calculation, click the
press the F4 key.

button or

A GRI calculation confirms the GC
Controller preamp operation. It can be
performed after a preamp calibration has
been completed, or as a trouble shooting
procedure.

Ensure that you halt any
ongoing analysis runs
(see Section 4.3) before
performing a GRI
calculation.

8. Click the
button to accept your
changes and return to the main window.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.
5.10

ANALOG OUTPUTS
This function allows you to:
• assign variables to Analog Outputs
• assign scale ranges
• calibrate analog outputs for zero and full
scale values

5.10.1 Analog Output Dialog Description
To use the Analog Outputs function,
1. Use the Application > Analog Outputs menu
to access this function.

Analog Outputs

JULY 2010

MON2000

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

5-49

2. The Analog Outputs dialog appears.

To edit the settings displayed, double-click
the appropriate cell or click and use the
provided pull-down menus.

When assigning analog outputs, first check the
CGM Analog Output Config field in the System
dialog (see Section 5.1).
An analog output assignment that uses the
same analog output number as the CGM
setting will produce erratic CGM trace output,
possibly with incorrect scaling.

JULY 2010

Analog Output Dialog Description

5-50

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

See the following table for details.
Table 5-9 Description of Analog Output Settings
Setting

Description



number assigned to Analog Output
Number of available analog outputs is
dependent upon the GC Controller model.

If the GC unit includes a Daniel Analog
Expansion Module (AEM), P/N 1-0500001, reserve analog output number 1
(first row) for the variable Bargraph.
Variable

type of GC analysis data on which to base
signal level of analog output

Stream

stream number assigned to the variable or
the channel number if referencing an
analog output

Component

name of component monitored by this
output

Current Value

current readout values of the analog output
(values reflect scale assignments)

Zero Scale

value used to represent the minimum value
(4mA) when scaling the analog output
value

Full Scale

value used to represent the maximum
value (20mA) when scaling the analog
output value

Fixed/Var

analog output operation mode
Fixed = fixed
Var = variable
If the operation mode is fixed, the analog
output is set to the number entered for the
Fixed Value.

Analog Output Dialog Description

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5-51

Table 5-9 Description of Analog Output Settings (Continued)

When defining a new analog
output, perform a calibration
first to obtain accurate Zero
and Full Adjustment values
(see Section 5.10.4 or
Section 5.10.5).

JULY 2010

Setting

Description

Fixed Value

analog output value used during fixed
operation

Zero Adjustment

value used to correct Zero Scale

Full Adjustment

value used to correct Full Scale

3. Click the
button to accept your
changes and return to the main window.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.

Analog Output Dialog Description

5-52

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5.10.2 Changing a Variable
To change a variable assignment, click the
appropriate Variable cell. Use the provided
pull-down menu and click the desired variable
to select it.
5.10.3 Changing the Bargraph
Use this function to designate which AEM
output analog signals can be used to drive the
bargaph device inputs. Each of the 16 available
AEM output signals can be assigned to
represent various GC analysis data variables.
To edit the variables and corresponding
settings displayed by the bargraph,
1. Click the
F5 key.

button or press the

2. The Bargraph dialog appears.

To edit the settings displayed, double-click
the appropriate cell or click and use the
provided pull-down menus. See Section
5.10.1 for more details.

Changing a Variable

Multiple streams can be
entered by separating the
stream numbers with
commas (e.g., 2,3).
Bargraph results will be
produced for each stream.

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5-53

3. To change a variable assignment, click the
appropriate Variable cell. Use the provided
pull-down menu and click the desired
variable to select it.
4. Click the
button to accept your
changes and return to the Analog Outputs
dialog.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the Analog Outputs dialog.
5.10.4 Performing a Manual Calibration
To manually calibrate an analog output,
1. Select the desired analog output by clicking
anywhere in the corresponding row.
2. Set the Zero Scale and Full Scale values as
desired.
3. Set the Fixed/Var parameter to “Fixed”.
4. Set Fixed Value equal to the Zero Scale
value.
5. Set Zero Adjustment and Full Adjustment to
“0.0”.
Setting both adjustment values
to “0.0” disables the scale
adjustment.

6. Click the
button to accept your
changes and exit from the Analog Outputs
dialog.

See Appendix D for an
alternative calibration method
for analog outputs.
Appendix D includes an
example of calibrating an
output scale of 0 to 1200.

7. Return to the Analog Outputs dialog. Wait
until the Current Value of the analog output
is equal to the Zero Scale value (see Step 2).
8. Record the value, in engineering units, read
by the receiving device (e.g., a voltmeter).
9. Set Fixed Value equal to the Full Scale
value (see Step 2).

JULY 2010

Performing a Manual Calibration

5-54

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

10. Click the
button to accept your
changes and exit from the Analog Outputs
dialog.
11. Return to the Analog Outputs dialog. Wait
until the Current Value of the analog output
is equal to the Full Scale value (see Step 2).
12. Record the value, in engineering units, read
by the receiving device (e.g., a voltmeter).
13. Set Zero Adjustment to the value recorded
in Step 8.
14. Set Full Adjustment to the value recorded in
Step 12.
15. Set the Fixed/Var parameter to “Var”.
16. Click the
button to complete the
calibration and return to the main window.
5.10.5 Performing an Automated Calibration
To perform an automated analog output
calibration,
1. Select the desired analog output by clicking
anywhere in the corresponding row.
2. Click the
F8 key.

To determine the
uncalibrated Zero Scale and
Full Scale analog output
levels, see Section 5.10.1.

button or press the

You can abort this process at any time by
clicking the

button.

3. The Zero Scale Adjustment dialog appears.

Input the appropriate value and click the
button.

Performing an Automated Calibration

To prevent scale adjustment,
set both adjustment values to
zero (0.0).
See Appendix D for additional
instructions on calibrating
analog outputs. Appendix D also
includes a calibration example
for an output scale of 0 to
1200.

JULY 2010

MON2000

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

5-55

4. The Full Scale Adjustment dialog appears.

Input the appropriate value and click the
button.
5. If the values entered are within tolerance,
data in the zero and full adjustment
columns is updated. Otherwise, MON2000
displays an error message.

JULY 2010

Performing an Automated Calibration

5-56

5.11

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

DISCRETE INPUTS
Use this function to assign labels to the GC
discrete inputs and control their operational
modes. The number of discrete inputs available
depends on the GC application.
1. Use the Application > Discrete Inputs menu
to access this function.
2. The Discrete Inputs dialog appears.

To edit the settings displayed, double-click
the appropriate cell or click and use the
provided pull-down menus.
See the following table for details.
Table 5-10 Description of Discrete Input Settings
Setting

Description

Channel

channel number assigned

Label

name used to identify the discrete input
(12 characters maximum)

Switch

sets operational mode for this discrete
input
Auto = value is determined by application
Off = value is set to OFF
On = value is set to ON

Current Value

Discrete Inputs

current state of the discrete input

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5-57

3. Click the
button to accept your
changes and return to the main window.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.
5.12

DISCRETE OUTPUTS
Use this function to assign labels to the GC
discrete outputs and control their operational
modes. The number of discrete outputs
available depends on the GC application.
1. Use the Application > Discrete Outputs
menu to access this function.
2. The Discrete Outputs dialog appears.

To edit the settings displayed, double-click
the appropriate cell or click and use the
provided pull-down menus.
Signals routed to discrete
outputs are assigned via the
Limit Alarm and Discrete
Alarm functions (see
Section 5.6 and Section
5.7).

JULY 2010

Discrete Outputs

5-58

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

See the following table for details.
Table 5-11 Description of Discrete Output Settings
Setting

Description

Channel

channel number assigned

Label

name used to identify the discrete output (12 characters maximum)

Switch

sets operational mode for this discrete output
Auto = value is determined by application
Off = value is set to OFF
On = value is set to ON

Current Value

current state of the discrete output

On Time
Off Time

time the digital output will be turned ON/OFF (MON2000 clock
based on user PC system clock)
If the ON/OFF times are the same, the timing feature has no effect.

3. Click the
button to accept your
changes and return to the main window.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.
5.13

VALVES
This function allows you to:
• assign identifying labels
• monitor valve operation
• control the operation modes
The number of discrete outputs available
depends on the GC application.
To use the Valve function,
1. Use the Application > Valves menu to access
this function.

Valves

2350A GC Controllers support
up to 12 Stream valves and 5
Analyzer valves, for a total of
17 valves.
Model 700 controllers support
up to Analytical Valves (AV-1 to
AV-5 and S-1 to S-8 Stream
valves

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5-59

2. The Valves dialog appears, per GC type.

Valves dialog for Model 700 GC

Valves dialog for 2350A GCs

To edit the settings displayed, double-click
the appropriate cell or click and use the
provided pull-down menus.

JULY 2010

Valves

5-60

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

See the following table for details.
Table 5-12 Description of Valve Settings
Setting

Description

Channel

channel number assigned

Label

name used to identify the valve (12 characters maximum)

By default, the 2350A GC stream valves are shown first and are
labeled S1 - S12 followed by the analytical valves (AV1 - AV5). Model
700 GCs analytical valves are shown first and are labeled AV1 - AV5
followed by the stream valves (S1 - S8).
Switch

sets operational mode for this valve
Auto = valve operation is determined by the GC application
Off = valve is set to OFF
On = valve is set to ON

Usage
(Model 700 and
Model 500 GCs with
2350A Controllers)

sets which digital output from the Timed Events function
(see Section 5.3) is assigned to this valve
Each Usage option is created per the following example:
1-AV1 - where the digit “1” is taken from the valve number set by the
Valve/DO# option (see Timed Events, see Section 5.3), and the name
“AV1” is taken from Label set in this Valve dialog.

The same Usage assignment cannot be used for multiple valves,
unless these valves are set to “Unused”.
Current Value

current state of the valve

3. Click the
button to accept your
changes and return to the main window.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.

Valves

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5.14

5-61

TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Use the Temperature Control function for
monitoring the Temperature of the Oven
(Detector/s and Columns) and the Stream
Switching block to determine when the
Model 700 is thermally stable. The bottom row
labeled Temperature (C) displays the current
temperatures.
The settings and values are shown in the
following figure and table. The settings and
values are preset at the factory and are based
on the specific customer application. These
values should not be changed unless
recommended by Daniel Customer Service
Personnel, or it is a factory application
requirement.
1. Use the Application>Temperature Control
menu to access this function.
2. The Temperature Control dialog displays.

JULY 2010

Temperature Control

5-62

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

3. Use the pull down menu to select the
appropriate mode setting (e.g. AUTOMATIC,
MANUAL, or OUT OF SERVICE). Ensure that
the temperature is constant for the Oven
(i.e. Multivalve System block and column
module kit) and the SSS.
Column

Function

Factory Default Setting

Column 1

Detector/s or Block Temperature

80o C (176.0o F)

Column 2

Column Temperature

80o C (176.0o F)

Column 3

Sample Stream Block Temperature

40o C (104.0o F)

Column 4

(Spare)

Future Use

4. Click the OK button to apply the changes or
click the Cancel button to discard your
changes and return to the MON2000 Main
window.
5.15

FID CONFIGURATION
Use this function to view the status
information about the Model 700 Gas Chromatograph’s Preamplifier Assembly, as well as
to modify certain FID parameters.
To access the FID Configuration window,
MON2000 must be connected to a GC that has
its serial port #4 configured to use ‘ADC700’.

FID Configuration

JULY 2010

MON2000

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

5-63

1. Use the Application > FID Configuration
menu to access this function. The FID
Configuration window appears.

Information concerning the current status
of the FID Preamplifier Assembly displays
in the upper left corner.
2. To modify FID parameters, do the following:
(a) Halt the analysis.

JULY 2010

FID Configuration

5-64

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

(b) Click Modify. The blue background of
the parameter fields will turn white,
indicating that they are now modifiable.

The parameters that you can configure
are:
• FID ignition - Select Manual if you wish
to control the ignition of the FID
(default); select Auto to let the GC
control the ignition of the FID.
• Number of ignition attempts - Indicates
the number of times the GC will try to
light the flame. If an 'Auto' FID ignition
sequence fails to light the flame after the
specified number of attempts, the GC
will close the hydrogen valve, switch the
FID ignition parameter to Manual, and
set an active alarm.
• Wait time between tries.
• Igniter on duration.
• Flame On sense temperature.
• Flame Out sense temperature.
• Electrometer gain - Your choices are
High and Low (default).
(c) Click Save to accept the changes or
Cancel to reject them.

FID Configuration

JULY 2010

MON2000

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

5-65

3. If Flame status is OFF, due to a power
failure or maintenance, for example, you
can restart the flame by doing the following:
(a) Click H2 Open. The H2 valve status
parameter displayed in the FID PreAmp
Status table changes to OPEN.
(b) Click Light flame. The Flame status
parameter displayed in the FID PreAmp
Status table will change to ON when the
FID internal temperature exceeds the
value set in the Flame On sense
temperature field.
If FID ignition is set to Auto, the GC will
automatically restart the flame if it goes
out.
4. To enable or disable digital filtering, do the
following:
(a) Right-click on the FID Configuration
window. The FID Advanced
Configuration window appears.

JULY 2010

FID Configuration

5-66

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

(b) Click Modify to make the appropriate
selection from the Digital filtering dropdown list.

(c) Click Save to accept the change, or
Cancel to reject the change.
(d) Click Close to leave the FID Advanced
Configuration window.
5. To reset the FID counts parameter, click
Autozero FID.
5.16

LOI STATUS VARIABLES
Use this function to select and configure up to
25 GC parameters that you would like to
monitor using the LOI’s Display mode (refer to
the Model 700 Gas Chromatograph System
Reference Manual for more information about
this mode).

LOI Status Variables

JULY 2010

MON2000

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

5-67

1. Use the Application > LOI Status Variables
menu to access this function. The LOI
Status Variables window appears.

2. If Include Mole Percents for current stream
is checked, which is the default, the
maximum number of variable you can select
is five; if Include Mole Percents for current
stream is not checked, you can choose up to
25 variables.
3. To select a new variable, click on the
appropriate drop-down list under the
Variable column.
4. Select a stream from the drop-down list in
the Stream column. If you want to use the
current stream, select ‘0’ in this column.
To copy the stream settings from a
highlighted row and apply them to the next
row, click the
button or press
the F7 key. This feature also increments the
Stream value to the next available stream
(e.g., incrementing from Stream 2 to
Stream 8), per the GC application.
5. Select a component from the drop-down list
in the Component column. If you do not
want to use a component, select ‘0’ in this
column.
To copy the component settings from a
highlighted row and apply them to the next
row, click the
JULY 2010

button or press
LOI Status Variables

5-68

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

the F8 key. This feature also increments the
Component value to the next available
component (e.g., incrementing from
“Ammonia” to “Benzene”), per the GC
application.
6. Enter a value in the Precision column that
indicates the number of decimal places to
display for this particular variable. For
component concentrations, the range of
possible Precision values is between 2 and
6. For all other variables, the range of
possible values is between 0 and 6.
5.17

SERIAL PORTS
Use this function to configure and manipulate
the serial port communication parameters the
GC Controller uses to connect with MON2000.
1. Use the Application > Serial Ports menu to
access this function.
2. The Serial Ports dialog appears.

The Mode column applies only to the following
CPU boards:
• 2350A CPU board (P/N 2-3-2350-190)
• Model 700 CPU board (P/N 2-3-0700-036)

Serial Ports

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5-69

To edit the settings displayed, double-click
the appropriate cell or click and use the
provided pull-down menus.

For proper communications, these parameters,
which are continuously downloaded to the GC,
must be identical to the parameters set in the
MON2000 GC Directory.

See the following table and individual
sections for details.
Table 5-13 Description of Serial Port Settings
Setting

Description

Port

Serial port number for GC Controller.
The Model 700 and Model 500 with 2350A Controller (with the PC/104 COM 4A
board installed) the controller supports 8 ports (9 ports with the modem).
With the Multifunction board installed, COM3 is the assigned port.

Usage

Defines port usage – such as a slave config-uration (i.e.,User_Modbus,
SIM_2251), PC communication port, a Report, or Serial Port – as well as the
general type of serial communications protocol.
To accommodate installations that use Modbus registers and the SIM_2251
protocol along with a data acquisition system, MON2000 enables you to arrange
data values for a more effective polling.
Note that the contents of all SIM_2251 Modbus registers are predefined, and
the values for component variables are predetermined. However, a cross-index
to these predefined assignments can be developed.
With the Multifunction board installed, COM3 is the assigned port.

JULY 2010

Serial Ports

5-70

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

Table 5-13 Description of Serial Port Settings (Continued)
Setting

Description

Baud Rate

Baud rate setting.
Range: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400.
For high performing PCs, set the baud rate to 19200. If you experience a communications failure at this rate, set the baud rate to 9600. Baud rate settings
less than 9600 may result in real-time delivery that is unacceptably slow.

Data Bits

Number of data bits.
Range: 7, 8.
Default: 8.

Stop Bits

Number of stop bits.
Range: 1, 2.
Default: 1.

Parity

Parity check method.
Range: None, Even, Odd.
Default: None.

Handshake

Handshaking method.
Range: None, RTS-CTS, XON-XOFF.
Default: None.

RTS On

Delay in milliseconds between RTS activation and the start of data transmission .
NOTE: If used, it may be necessary to set an extra delay in the GC Directory,
accessed via the File>GC Directory menu.
Range: 0 to 5000.

RTS Off

Delay in milliseconds between RTS termination and the end of data transmission.
Range: 0 to 5000.

Protocol

Transmission protocol.
Range: ASCII, RTU
Default: ASCII

Serial Ports

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5-71

Table 5-13 Description of Serial Port Settings (Continued)
Setting

Description

Com ID

Modbus slave address.
To use the address defined by the GC Controller DIP switches, set to 0.

Read/Write

Read/write setting
Range: R (Read only), W (Write only), RW (Read and write).
This parameter only functions with slave ports.

Mode

Only applies to 2350A CPU board (P/N 2-3-2350-190) or Model 700 CPU board
(P/N 2-3-0700-036).
Sets the communication protocol directly, instead of through jumper settings.
Range: RS232, RS422, RS485.

Click the
button to accept your
changes and return to the main window.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.
5.17.1 Serial Ports Configuration
Each GC Controller port number is listed in the
Port column of the Serial Ports dialog. The
number of available ports is hardware-specific.

JULY 2010

Serial Ports Configuration

5-72

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

These ports can be configured with the Usage
settings to accommodate any one of the
following end-connection devices:

The optional internal modem installed on a Model 700
or Model 500 uses COM9 only, except when a
keyboard and display are installed. The optional internal
modem would then use COM8 only.

For proper communications, these parameters, which
are continuously downloaded to the GC, must be
identical to the parameters set in the MON2000 GC
Directory.

• PC – direct serial line connection to the PC,
a serial line connection to an external or
internal modem or an ethernet connection
• Report – direct serial line connection to a
printer
• User_Modbus or SIM_2251 – connection to
a Data Collection System (DCS) or a multidrop serial data highway network
Specific configurations of these ports may also
include settings for serial interface protocols
(i.e., RS-232, RS-485, or RS-422).
These protocols can either be set from the
Serial Ports window, or they can be configured
through jumper settings that are located on the

Serial Ports Configuration

JULY 2010

MON2000

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

5-73

CPU board. See the appropriate GC hardware
manual for instructions and drawings.

Communications between the GC and a DCS or multi-drop
serial data highway can be established with Modbus
protocol. For this, the Usage setting should be either
User_Modbus or SIM_2251.
In any Modbus host-slave configuration, there must be
one Host to which any one of the GCs can respond as a
Slave. Thus, the controller could be connected to a
maximum of 4 different serial data networks.

The serial interface protocol RS-232 will service
most end-connection devices (i.e., PC and
Report). DCS connections use either RS-485 or
RS-422 protocols although, in some cases, the
RS-232 protocol can be used.
To access this function,
1. From the Application>Serial Ports menu,
select the Usage column and use the pulldown menu to select the appropriate
configuration.

JULY 2010

Serial Ports Configuration

5-74

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

The Mode column applies only to the following
CPU boards:
• 2350A CPU board (P/N 2-3-2350-190)
• Model 700 CPU board (P/N 2-3-0700-036)

5.18

GC SERIAL PORT AND CABLE
CONFIGURATIONS
This section provides more detailed
information about the serial port connections of
the 2350A GC Controller. It identifies serial
port pin assignments and diagrams for
designing RS-232 serial cables necessary for
your application.
GC serial ports are found on the GC Controller
Terminal Board for field wiring, and the
connection points for external devices are as
follows:
Table 5-14 Serial Ports on GC Terminal Board
Port

DB-9 Plug

Phoenix Plug

1 (COM1)

P2

J5

2 (COM2)

P3

J6

3 (COM3)

n/a

J10

4 (COM4)

n/a

J11

External modem connections can be made to
any of the four serial ports. However, a possible
exception exists for Serial Port 4: the internal
modem for the Model 500 with the 2350A
Controller, if installed, uses Serial Port 4.

GC Serial Port and Cable Configurations

JULY 2010

MON2000

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

5-75

Phoenix plug (bare-wire) connections are
available to all four serial ports. Pin-outs are
identical for all four serial port Phoenix plugs
and jacks. Each Phoenix plug / jack (male)
combination allows bare-wire connection and
uses 9 pins as illustrated:

Figure 5-1 Phoenix Connector Pinout for J5, J6, J10, J11

DB-9 plug connections available for serial ports
1 and 2 only. Two of the serial ports, as noted in
Table 5-14, permit connection to an external
modem via a DB-9 plug.

JULY 2010

GC Serial Port and Cable Configurations

5-76

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

Both of the GC Controller DB-9 jacks are
female and have identical pin assignments.
A DB-9 male pin numbering
scheme is also illustrated,
but for reference purposes
only.

Figure 5-2 DB-9 Connector and Pinout, P2 and P3

5.18.1 GC DB-9 Serial to External Modem DB-25
To make an RS-232 serial connection between
one of the DB-9 serial ports of the GC, and an
external modem with DB-25 serial port, you
will need to manufacture a cable. The cable will
need DB-9, male, and DB-25, male, plug cable
ends as illustrated in Figure 5-3.

GC serial ports were wired to appear as DCE so that a
straight-through serial cable could be used, instead of a
null-modem cable, for direct serial connection between
the GC Controller and the PC, which is Data Terminal
Equipment (DTE).

The DB-9 jack on the GC serial port is wired to
appear like a Data Communications
Equipment (DCE). Therefore, you use a custom

GC DB-9 Serial to External Modem DB-25

JULY 2010

MON2000

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

5-77

“null-modem” type cable, as shown below, to
make the connection between the GC and an
external modem.

Figure 5-3 GC DB-9 Port to External Modem DB-25 Port

5.18.2 GC Phoenix Plug to External Modem DB-25
To make an RS-232 serial connection between
one of the Phoenix Plug serial ports of the GC,
and an external modem with DB-25 serial port,
you will need to manufacture the cable and its
DB-25, male plug cable end as illustrated in
Figure 5-4.

JULY 2010

GC Phoenix Plug to External Modem DB-25

5-78

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

Figure 5-4 Phoenix Plug Port to External Modem DB-25 Port

5.18.3 Com ID
The GC Controller Com ID is usually preset at
the factory and defined by the DIP switch
settings on the controller system interface
board. Five switches are reserved for defining
the Com ID; therefore, Com ID values range
from 1 to 31.
Normally it is not necessary to change the Com
ID value to anything other than 0. Setting the
Com ID to zero allows the MON2000 software
to automatically recognize the Com ID defined
by the controller DIP switches. When
connected, MON2000 displays the controller
DIP setting as the Com ID in the main window
titlebar. See Table 5-15 for more information.

Com ID

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5-79

Table 5-15 Description of Com ID Settings
Connection

Usage

Read/Write

Protocol

PC or modem
(direct serial connection)

PC
User_Modbus
SIM_2251

R
RW

ASCII
RTU

DCS

User_Modbus
SIM_2251

R
RW

ASCII
RTU

Printer
(direct serial connection)

Report

W

ASCII

1. User_Modbus and SIM_2251 are slave port
protocols (the GC Controller can operate only as a
slave).
2. User_Modbus, a PLC emulation Modbus protocol,
can use scaling to convert floating point numbers to
integers.
3. SIM_2251 emulates Daniel 2500 communication
protocol and is a simulation of the 2251 GC
Controller.
4. See Appendix I for instructions on how to connect
a modem to the GC Controller.

JULY 2010

Com ID

5-80

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5.18.4 Registers
To accommodate installations that use Modbus
registers and the User_Modbus protocol,
MON2000 enables you to assign GC analysis
variables to registers.

This function is not required for normal GC operation.
Only use this function if you are designing a special
installation to directly access the GC Controller Modbus
registers.

See Appendix F for more information regarding
GC Modbus registers.
For a list of variable assignments made to all
registers, print the communication section of
the PC Config Report.
To assign GC analysis variables and scale
ranges,
1. Use the Application>Serial Ports menu to
access this function.
2. The Serial Ports dialog displays.

Registers

JULY 2010

MON2000

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

5-81

3. From the Serial Ports dialog, click the
button or press the F3 key.
4. The Registers dialog appears.

5. View or edit data. Double-click a given table
cell or use one of the edit function buttons,
described below, to make your changes.

For each default 0 FloatPt scale assigned, reserve 2
Modbus registers for a given variable.
Scale assignments other than 0 FloatPT require
only one register per variable.

Note that the Reg column displays the
number for the GC Controller Modbus
register that will be polled by a connected
data acquisition system.
6. To change a variable assignment, click the
appropriate Variable cell. Use the provided
pull-down menu and click the desired
variable to select it.
From the Variables menu, you can assign
the results of optional base pressure(s) to
the Modbus register. See Section 5.18.5.

JULY 2010

Registers

5-82

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

7. To change the stream assignment, click the
appropriate cell. Use the provided pulldown menu and click the desired stream to
select it.
To copy the stream settings from a
highlighted row and apply them to the next
row, click the
button or press
the F7 key. This feature also increments the
Stream value to the next available stream
(e.g., incrementing from Stream 2 to Stream
8), per the GC application. An error
message displays when the last available
stream is reached.
8. To change the component assignment, click
the appropriate cell. Use the provided pulldown menu and click the desired option to
select it.
To copy the component settings from a
highlighted row and apply them to the next
row, click the
the F8 key.

button or press

This feature also increments the
Component value to the next available
component (e.g., incrementing from
Ammonia to Benzene), per the GC
application. An error message displays
when the last available component is
reached.
9. To select a scale and range,
(a) Select the scale/range to be replaced.
By assigning a scale range, a floating
point value can be converted to an
integer value per the user-defined scale
assignment.

Registers

Assigning a scale and
corresponding range is an
optional step.
The default scale assignment
is 0 FloatPt, which means
the value is not converted to
integer and is stored in two
(2) adjacent Modbus
registers.

JULY 2010

MON2000

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

5-83

(b) Click the
button or press
the F5 key. A menu list of all available
scales and ranges appears.
(c) Double-click the desired new scale and
corresponding range.
Note that any of the available 33 scales
can be redefined via the Edit Scales
function (see Step 10).
10. To redefine a scale or create a custom scale,
(a) Click the
button or press
the F2 key.
(b) The Edit Scales dialog appears.

All 33 scaling options will display.

JULY 2010

Registers

5-84

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

(c) Input the new Zero Scale or Full Scale
values as appropriate.

To convert floating point data to a whole integer,
each scale definition follows this algorithm:
RF – RZ
integer = ⎛ -------------------⎞ D fp = 3977
⎝ SF – SZ ⎠
where
RF = range, Full Scale =4095
Rz = range, Zero Scale =0
SF = scale, Full =100
Sz = scale, Zero =0
Dfp = data, floating pt =97.13
(% from Methane)

(d) Click the
button to accept
your changes and return to the Registers
dialog.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the Registers dialog.

Registers

JULY 2010

MON2000

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

5-85

11. To check for conflicting Modbus register
assignments,
(a) Click the
button or press the
F6 key.
(b) MON2000 displays the first encountered
error.

For this example, you would change the
register number for Row 2. You would
then verify all subsequent register
numbers as well.
(c) Click the
button to accept
your changes and return to the Serial
Ports dialog. MON2000 automatically
checks for conflicting Modbus register
assignments.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the Serial Ports dialog.

JULY 2010

Registers

5-86

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5.18.5 Setting Optional Base Pressures
As discussed in Section 5.18.4, you can assign
GC analysis variables to various Modbus
registers. Follow the procedure below to add
the “Optional Base Pressure” variable to the
Registers List.
Up to three (3) optional base pressures can be
used for GC analysis calculations. These
optional base pressure values are entered via
the Streams function (see Section 5.8).
• “Results - Opt. Base Press” – A group of 12
GC analysis calculations can be used to
reflect the use of different base pressures.
See Section C.3 for more information.
To assign the “Optional Base Pressure”
variable,
1. Verify the values for optional base pressures
that have already been entered.
(a) Use the Application > Streams menu to
access this function.
(b) The Streams dialog box displays.

Setting Optional Base Pressures

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5-87

(c) Scroll to the Opt Press columns and note
these values along with the
corresponding optional pressure and
stream number(s).
(d) If you wish to enter different pressure
values, do so now and then click the
button to accept your
changes.
Otherwise, click the
return to the main window.

button to

2. Use the Application > Serial Ports menu to
access the Register function.

JULY 2010

Setting Optional Base Pressures

5-88

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

3. From the Serial Ports dialog, click the
button or press the F3 key.
The Registers dialog appears.

4. From the Registers dialog, use the Variable
pull-down menu to select the Optional Base
Pressures option.
5. Use the corresponding component pulldown menu to select the desired optional
base pressure option.

Setting Optional Base Pressures

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5-89

6. To assign a scale, ensure that the correct
row is selected and click the
button or press the F5 key. Double-click the
desired scale option to apply.
For instructions on creating or editing a
scale, see Section 5.18.4.
7. The “Optional Base Pressure” variable
should be listed with the settings specified.
8. Click the
changes.

JULY 2010

button to accept your

Setting Optional Base Pressures

5-90

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5.18.6 Setting Optional Base Results
As discussed in Section 5.18.4, you can assign
GC analysis variables to various Modbus
registers. Follow the procedure below to add
the “Results - Opt. Base Press” variable to the
Registers List.
A group of 12 GC analysis calculations can be
used to reflect the use of different base
pressures. See Section C.3 for more
information.
To assign the “Results - Opt. Base Press”
variable,
1. Verify the values for optional base pressures
that have already been entered.
(a) Use the Application > Streams menu to
access this function.
(b) The Streams dialog displays.

(c) Scroll to the Opt Press columns and note
these values along with the
corresponding optional pressure and
stream number(s).

Setting Optional Base Results

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5-91

(d) If you wish to enter different pressure
values, do so now and then click the
button to accept your
changes.
Otherwise, click the
return to the main window.

button to

2. Use the Application > Serial Ports menu to
access this function.

3. From the Serial Ports dialog, click the
button or press the F3 key.
The Registers dialog appears.

JULY 2010

Setting Optional Base Results

5-92

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

4. From the Registers dialog, use the Variable
pull-down menu to select the Results - Opt.
Base Press option.
5. Use the corresponding component pulldown menu to select the desired optional
base pressure option.

Metric GC analysis
variables are available only
if the Metric Base
Conditions option has been
enabled (see Section 5.1).

See Table 5-16 to determine which number
you should enter.
6. To assign a scale, ensure that the correct
row is selected and click the
button or press the F5 key. Double-click the
desired scale option to apply.
For instructions on creating or editing a
scale, see Section 5.18.4.
7. The “Results - Opt. Base Press” variable
should be listed with the settings specified.
8. Click the
changes.

Setting Optional Base Results

button to accept your

JULY 2010

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

5-93

.
Table 5-16 GC Analysis Variable Number per Optional Pressure
GC Analysis Variable

Optional Pressure

U.S.

Metric

1

2

3

Gross Heating Value or
Btu (Dry)

Heating Value,
Superior, MJ/m3 (Dry)

1

13

25

Gross Heating Value or
Btu (Sat.)

Heating Value,
Superior, MJ/m3 (Sat.)

2

14

26

Gross Heating Value or
Btu (Act.)

Heating Value,
Superior, MJ/m3 (Act.)

3

15

27

Net Btu (Dry)

Heating Value, Inferior,
MJ/m3 (Dry)

4

16

28

Net Btu (Sat.)

Heating Value, Inferior,
MJ/m3 (Sat.)

5

17

29

Net Btu (Act.)

Heating Value, Inferior,
MJ/m3 (Act.)

6

18

30

Real Relative Density
Gas

Heating Value,
Superior, kcal/m3 (Dry)

7

19

31

Gallons/1000 SCF C2 +

Heating Value,
Superior, kcal/m3 (Sat.)

8

20

32

Gallons/1000 SCF C3 +

Heating Value,
Superior, kcal/m3 (Act.)

9

21

33

Gallons/1000 SCF C4 +

Heating Value, Inferior,
kcal/m3 (Dry)

10

22

34

Gallons/1000 SCF C5 +

Heating Value, Inferior,
kcal/m3 (Sat.)

11

23

35

Gallons/1000 SCF C6 +

Heating Value, Inferior,
kcal/m3 (Act.)

12

24

36

JULY 2010

Setting Optional Base Results

5-94

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

MON2000

Table 5-16 GC Analysis Variable Number per Optional Pressure (Continued)
GC Analysis Variable
U.S.

Optional Pressure
Metric

1

2

3

Use the above index numbers to assign “Results - Opt. Base Press” to
User_Modbus registers.

5.19

TCP/IP, SUBNET, AND GATEWAY MENU
Use this function to configure the TCP/IP,
Subnet, and Gateway communication
parameters for the 2350A GC Controller.
1. Use the Application > TCP/IP menu to
access this function.
2. The TCP/IP dialog displays.
See Appendix F for detailed instructions for
the Ethernet card installation, TCP/IP,
Subnet, and Gateway settings.

TCP/IP, Subnet, and Gateway Menu

JULY 2010

MON2000

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

5-95

This page is intentionally left blank.

JULY 2010

TCP/IP, Subnet, and Gateway Menu

5-96

APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

TCP/IP, Subnet, and Gateway Menu

MON2000

JULY 2010

CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER

MON2000

6-1

CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER
6

Use the Chromatogram Viewer to display and
print live, archived, or saved chromatograms
(from a .cgm file on disk). The 2350A GC
Controller saves the most recent
chromatograms for each stream running in the
Stream Sequence, as well as the chromatogram
from the most recent calibration run for each
CDT. See the following sections for further
instructions.
6.1

CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER FUNCTION
To access the Chromatogram Viewer,
1. Connect to the GC.
2. Use the Chromatogram > Chromatogram
Viewer menu to access this function.
3. The Chromatogram Viewer dialog appears.

JULY 2010

Chromatogram Viewer Function

6-2

CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER

MON2000

4. Click the
button to exit this dialog.
Any display changes or open data will be
lost. See Section 6.4 to save a chromatogram
to disk.
6.2

VIEWING A LIVE CHROMATOGRAM

6.2.1

From Online GC
To view a live chromatogram trace from the
online GC,
1. Check the View current CGM option.
If a chromatogram contains data for more
than one detector, a Select Detector menu
dialog displays. Double-click either
“Detector 1”, “Detector 2”, or “Both”.
2. MON2000 plots the current, live
chromatogram.
The corresponding data is dynamically
displayed in the provided legends.
Use the Graph and Chromatogram
functions to manipulate the display. To
zoom in on a particular point, click and drag
your mouse over that area; repeat as
necessary. Use the Restore State or Zoom
Out options from the right-click menu (see
Section 6.9) to return to the original display.
You can display up to 8 chromatograms at
one time. Each chromatogram is color-

Viewing a Live Chromatogram

JULY 2010

CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER

MON2000

6-3

coded; use the Chromatogram pull-down
menu to select a specific chromatogram.

6.2.2

From GC Archive
To view the most recent chromatogram trace
from the online GC archive,
1. Click the
button. The Available
Chromatograms dialog appears.
2. Double-click the desired entry.
If a chromatogram contains data for more
than one detector, a Select Detector menu
dialog displays. Double-click either
“Detector 1”, “Detector 2”, or “Both”.
3. MON2000 plots the archived
chromatogram.
The corresponding data is dynamically
displayed in the provided legends.
Use the Graph and Chromatogram
functions to manipulate the display. To

JULY 2010

From GC Archive

6-4

CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER

MON2000

zoom in on a particular point, click and drag
your mouse over that area; repeat as
necessary. Use the Restore State or Zoom
Out options from the right-click menu (see
Section 6.9) to return to the original display.
You can display up to 8 chromatograms at
one time. Each chromatogram is colorcoded; use the Chromatogram pull-down
menu to select a specific chromatogram.

6.2.3

From File on Disk
To view a chromatogram trace from a file
previously saved to disk,
1. Click the
button. The Open
Chromatogram File dialog appears.

2. Use the provided directory tree to locate the
desired CGM file or CGM Comparison file
and click the
button to open.

From File on Disk

JULY 2010

MON2000

CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER

6-5

3. The Chromatogram window displays.

If a chromatogram contains data for more
than one detector, a Select Detector menu
dialog displays. Double-click either
“Detector 1”, “Detector 2”, or “Both”.

JULY 2010

From File on Disk

6-6

CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER

MON2000

4. MON2000 displays the chromatogram file.
The corresponding data is dynamically
displayed in the provided legends.
Use the Graph and Chromatogram
functions to manipulate the display. To
zoom in on a particular point, click and drag
your mouse over that area; repeat as
necessary. Use the Save State, Restore
State, or Zoom In or Out options from the
right-click menu (see Section 6.9) to return
to the original display for both Live and
Archived CGM views. Press the keyboard
HOME key to force the CMG view to the
default state. Also, pressing the keyboard
HOME key sets the CGM view to the default
state if the current application analysis
time is different from the previous
application analysis time.

The Save State function is
available when viewing a
live or archived CGM.

The MON2000 software looks
for and finds the application’s
analysis time. Pressing the
”Home” key returns the user
to the default CGM state.

Right Click Menu

From File on Disk

JULY 2010

CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER

MON2000

6-7

You can display up to 8 chromatograms at
one time. Each chromatogram is colorcoded; use the Chromatogram pull-down
menu to select a specific chromatogram

5. Click the

button to save the

selected comparison file to disk.
The Save Chromatogram Comparison File
dialog appears.

6. Enter the file name to be saved and click the
button to save the file to disk.
Or,
Click the
dialog.

JULY 2010

button to exit this

From File on Disk

6-8

6.3

CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER

MON2000

REMOVING A CHROMATOGRAM FROM VIEW
To remove a chromatogram trace from the
Viewer display (and close the cgm file, if
reading from disk),
1. Use the Chromatogram pull-down menu to
select a specific chromatogram.

2. Click the
button. MON2000
removes the chromatogram from view and,
if applicable, closes the .cgm file.
6.4

SAVING A CHROMATOGRAM TO DISK
To save a currently displayed chromatogram to
disk,
1. Use the Chromatogram pull-down menu to
select a specific chromatogram.

2. Click the

This function will save a
live chromatogram at the
current point, thus
overwriting the “last.cgm”
file.

button.

Removing a Chromatogram from View

JULY 2010

CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER

MON2000

6-9

MON2000 displays the Save Chromatogram
File window.

Use the provided directory tree to select the
desired file location and name, then click
the

button.

3. MON2000 saves the specified
chromatogram along with its corresponding
graph settings.
6.5

GRAPH FUNCTIONS
Use the Graph buttons to access any of the
following graph-related functions.

6.5.1

Editing the Chromatogram Graph
Use the Edit Graph function to change the span
and interval for the x/y axis, as well as other
display parameters.
1. Use the Chromatogram pull-down menu to
select a specific chromatogram.

JULY 2010

Graph Functions

6-10

CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER

2. Click the
dialog appears.

MON2000

button. The Edit Graph

3. Use the provided attributes and options to
change the chromatogram display and
printer speed as desired.
4. Click the
button to accept your
changes and return to the Chromatogram
Viewer dialog.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the Chromatogram Viewer dialog.
5. The chromatogram display changes as
specified.
Additional display options are available by
right-clicking the display area. See Section
6.9 for more information.
6.5.2

Changing Cursor Size
To toggle the cursor size from coarse movement
(less accurate) to fine movement (more
accurate), click the
button.

Changing Cursor Size

JULY 2010

CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER

MON2000

6.5.3

6-11

Printing the Chromatogram
To print a currently displayed area of the
chromatogram,
1. Use the Chromatogram pull-down menu to
select a specific chromatogram.

2. Click the
6.6

button.

CHROMATOGRAM FUNCTIONS
Use the Chromatogram buttons to access any of
the following chromatogram-related functions.

To save the displayed
chromatogram to disk,
see Section 6.4.
To remove a
chromatogram from
view, see Section 6.3.
To toggle the TEV and
CGM Component
spreadsheet display,
see Section 6.6.8.

JULY 2010

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Edit - edit the Chromatogram
Results - view the CGM calculation results
Desc - save a description of the CGM
Save - save the displayed chromatogram to
disk
Remove - removes a chromatogram from
view
Forced Cal - perform a forced calibration
Cur/All - toggle the TEV and CGM
Component spreadsheet display
Save CMP - save multiple CGMs

Printing the Chromatogram

6-12

6.6.1

CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER

MON2000

Editing the Chromatogram
Use the Edit Chromatogram function to change
the x/y offset values and other display
parameters such as color.
1. Use the Chromatogram pull-down menu to
select a specific chromatogram.

2. Click the
button. The Edit
Chromatogram dialog appears.

3. Use the X Offset and Y Offset values to
change the chromatogram display as
desired.
4. Use the Color pull-down menu to assign a
different color to this chromatogram.
5. Click the
button to accept your
changes and return to the Chromatogram
Viewer dialog.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the Chromatogram Viewer dialog.

Editing the Chromatogram

JULY 2010

CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER

MON2000

6.6.2
In the edit mode, initial focus is
applied to the currently selected
event in the table, or to the
event with the closest time.

If more than one CGM is
displayed, only the selected
CGM timed events will be
available to edit.

JULY 2010

6-13

Editing TEVs from CGM Viewer
To edit the Timed Events Table (TEV) from the
Chromatogram Viewer window,
1. Double-click the left mouse button, while
hovering over the TEV legend, to edit the
timed events from the CGM viewer (see the
following figures).
Or,
Right-click and use the drop-down menu to
modify, add, insert, and delete TEV’s via the
normal editing procedures.

Editing TEVs from CGM Viewer

6-14

CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER

MON2000

MON2000 displays the Timed Events Table
dialog.

Editing TEVs from CGM Viewer

JULY 2010

CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER

MON2000

6-15

2. Click the
button to save your
changes, or press the F8 key.
Save changes and discard
changes options are
available from the rightclick menu.

3. Press the ESC key to discard changes.
6.6.3

Editing Retention Times from CGM Viewer
To edit component retention from the
Chromatogram Viewer window,
1. Double-click the left mouse button to edit
the retention times from the CGM viewer

You must access the
Component Data Table to
add, insert, and delete
retention times. Use the
Application> Component
Data menu or press the F6
key.

Or,
Right-click and use the drop-down menu to
modify retention times via the normal
editing procedures.
6.6.4

Editing TEVs from Cursor
To update Timed Events from the
Chromatogram Viewer using the cursor,
1. Right-click the mouse button, with the
mouse pointer hovered over the Event Time
legend.

From the pull-down menu, select Update
Time from Cursor.

JULY 2010

Editing Retention Times from CGM Viewer

6-16

CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER

MON2000

Or,
Press the F9 key. MON2000 displays the
message, “Reading GC Data” in the status
bar, then actives the TEV Table.

2. Click the
button to save your
changes, or press the F8 key.
Press the ESC key to discard changes.
6.6.5

Viewing the Chromatogram Results

Save changes and discard
changes options are
available from the rightclick menu.

To read a table of calculation results for a
selected chromatogram,
1. Use the Chromatogram pull-down menu to
select a specific chromatogram.

2. Click the
button. A dialog appears
asking if the results should be displayed
using the calculation control flags.
3. Click the
button to display the
report using the calculations selected in the
Application>Control menu.

Viewing the Chromatogram Results

JULY 2010

MON2000

CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER

6-17

Click the
button to display the report
using ALL calculations.

Click the
button to return to the
Chromatogram Viewer dialog.

JULY 2010

Viewing the Chromatogram Results

6-18

6.6.6

CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER

MON2000

Entering a Description
To enter a description for the selected
chromatogram,
1. Use the Chromatogram pull-down menu to
select a specific chromatogram.

2. Click the
button. The Edit
Description dialog appears.

3. Type the desired statement(s).
4. Press the ENTER key to accept this
description.
Use the
button or press the ESC key to
exit this dialog without accepting your
entry.
5. Click the
button to save this
description with the chromatogram file.

Entering a Description

JULY 2010

CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER

MON2000

6.6.7

6-19

Forcing a Calibration
Use the Forced Cal function to calibrate the
GC, using the raw data and stream number for
the selected GC Archive chromatogram. The
results are stored in the CDT under the
corresponding stream number.

The selected GC Archive
chromatogram must be
from a good calibration
gas run.

To perform a forced calibration,
1. Use the Chromatogram pull-down menu to
select a specific chromatogram.

2. Click the
6.6.8

button.

Toggling TEVs and CGM Components
To toggle the display of the TEV and CGM
Component speadsheets,
1. Use the Chromatogram pull-down menu to
select a specific chromatogram.

2. Click the
button. If multiple
CGMs are displayed in the graph area, the
'CUR/ALL' button toggles between showing
all TEVs and all components for all CGMS
to showing only the TEVs and components
for the currently selected stream.

JULY 2010

Forcing a Calibration

6-20

CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER

MON2000

3. MON2000 toggles the display of the TEVs
and Components spreadsheets and the
CGM view.

Cur/All View 1

6.7

Cur/All View 2

VIEWING BASELINE DATA
Use the Baseline function to display the
retention times and baselines for the selected
chromatogram.
1. Use the Chromatogram pull-down menu to
select a specific chromatogram.

2. Click the
button. This removes the
integration lines from a displayed Archive
CGM.
3. MON2000 displays a plot of the baseline
values, and lists the corresponding
retention times in the legend table.

Viewing Baseline Data

JULY 2010

CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER

MON2000

6.8

6-21

VIEWING RAW DATA
Use the Raw Data function to display the Raw
Data Table for the selected chromatogram.
1. Use the Chromatogram pull-down menu to
select a specific chromatogram.

2. Click the
button. The Raw Data
dialog displays and shows the raw data for
all CGMs in the graph area.

3. Click the
button to return to the
Chromatogram Viewer dialog.
6.9

DISPLAY OPTIONS
Right-click the graph area to access these
options, or use the corresponding keystroke(s).
Options are listed in alphabetical order.
See Table 6-1 for a complete listing of option
names, descriptions, and keystroke sequences.

JULY 2010

Viewing RAW Data

6-22

CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER

MON2000

Table 6-1 Display Options for Chromatogram Viewer
Keystroke

Right-Click Option

Description

CTRL C

Copy to clipboard

allows you to copy this graph to another
application such as MSWord or Excel

F8

Cursor to nearest point

snap cursor to nearest point in both the X and Y
directions

CTRL V

Paste from clipboard

allows you to plot a range of points from another
application such as MSWord or Excel

CTRL P

Print Graph Area

print currently displayed chromatograph area

CTRL S

Print Series All

print all displayed chromatograms

HOME

Restore State

restore last saved display settings for Live or
Archived for the selected chromatogram

CTRL HOME

Save State

save current or archived display settings for the
selected chromatogram

F4

Toggle Coarse/Fine

toggle cursor from coarse (less accurate) to fine
(more accurate)

F9

Toggle Lines/Dots

toggle graph from line(s) to dots

CTRL F4

Toggle Mouse Position Tip

graph cursor follows movement of mouse while
tooltip displays exact coordinates of the current
point

CTRL F9

Toggle Nearest Point Tip

graph cursor follows movement of mouse cursor

NUM +

Zoom In

zoom in on entire graph

NUM –

Zoom Out

zoom out from entire graph

NUM →

Zoom X In

zoom in on X axis

NUM ←

Zoom X Out

zoom out from X axis

NUM ↑

Zoom Y In

zoom in on Y axis

NUM ↓

Zoom Y Out

zoom out from Y axis

Display Options

JULY 2010

REPORTS

MON2000

7-1

REPORTS
7

The options listed in the Reports menu enable
you to display, print, or store various preconfigured GC reports.

You must be currently online
with the desired GC unit to
generate a report from the
controller.

See the following sections for more information
on specific reports and related functions.
7.1

REPORT DISPLAY
This function allows you to immediately
display, print, or store preconfigured reports on
GC analysis data. Data is reported either realtime from the GC unit or from previously
stored files.

7.1.1

View Report from Live Data
To display a report with live data from the GC
unit,
1. Use the Reports > Report Display menu to
access this function.
2. The Report Display dialog appears, per GC
type.

Report Display dialog for

Report Display dialog for Model 700 GC

2350A GC Controllers

JULY 2010

Report Display

7-2

REPORTS

MON2000

3. Select the report type, stream, and update
setting from the lists provided.
Table 7-1 Description of Report Display Settings
Setting

Description

Reports

list of pre-defined reports; Shows report
type (Analysis, Raw Data, Calibration,
etc...)

Select Stream

list of available streams

The contents of the GC analysis
reports are defined by:
• the GC application
• functions such as
Calculations, User Defined,
Limit Alarms, and Streams

For a single detector GC:
0–Current = last stream analyzed
For a dual detector GC:
0–Current Det1 = last stream analyzed,
Detector 1
0–Current Det2 = last stream analyzed,
Detector 2
Update Method

list of update options that determine
when the report display is refreshed
Anly = after each analysis
Cal = after each calibration
Fcal = after each final calibration
None = not updated

4. Click the
button or press the F2
key to generate and display the selected
report.
To close this dialog without generating a
report, click the
to the main window.

View Report from Live Data

button to return

JULY 2010

MON2000

REPORTS

7-3

5. MON2000 generates the report, per your
specifications, and displays the results in
the File Viewer dialog.

MON2000 creates a temporary HTML file to
display the generated report. If you want to
save this report to disk, see Section 7.1.4.

The display refreshes per the update setting configured in the
Report Display dialog (see Section 7.4).
For example, in the Report Display dialog, if Stream is set to “0–
Current” and Update is set to “Anly”, the report display will refres
after the GC analyzes the stream selected via the Report Display
dialog.
The refresh function displays the newly generated report and
deletes the previous report (unless already saved to disk).
Check the GC status bar for the run time and current stream.

Use the scroll bars to see other areas of the
report. Use the
button to
increase or decrease the font size displayed.

JULY 2010

View Report from Live Data

7-4

REPORTS

MON2000

See the following sections for instructions
printing the displayed file or opening other
report files from disk.
6. Click the
button or press the ESC
key to exit this function and return to the
Report Display dialog.
7.1.2

View Report from File

MicroSoft Internet Explorer 5.0 (or later) is
required to view a report file in HTML format.

To open a report file for viewing,
1. Use the Reports > Report Display menu to
access this function.
2. The Report Display dialog appears.
If you are working in off-line mode, the
Report Display dialog will appear blank.

View Report from File

JULY 2010

REPORTS

MON2000

7-5

3. Click the
button or press the
F3 key to access the File Viewer dialog.

4. Click the
dialog appears.

button. The Open

5. Use the provided directory tree to select the
By default, the Open
dialog displays the
c:\GC\Save directory.

desired report file. Click the
button.
6. MON2000 opens the file and displays it in
the File Viewer dialog.
Use the scroll bars to see other areas of the
report. Use the
button to
increase or decrease the font size displayed.

JULY 2010

View Report from File

7-6

REPORTS

MON2000

Use the
and
buttons
to browse through multiple report files.
7. Click the
button or press the ESC
key to return to the Report Display dialog.
7.1.3

Print Report
To print a report,

The refresh function displays a newly
generated report and deletes the currently
displayed report (see Section 7.1.1 for
details).
You should print or save the current report
immediately after it is displayed.

1. Display a live report or open a report file
from disk. See Section 7.1.1 or Section 7.1.2
for details.
2. Click the

button.

3. MON2000 prints the report to your
configured printer (see Section 3.7).
7.1.4

Save Report to Disk
To save a report to disk,
1. Display a live report or open a report file
from disk. See Section 7.1.1 or Section 7.1.2
for details.

Print Report

JULY 2010

REPORTS

MON2000

7-7

2. Click the
button. The Save
HTML Document dialog appears.

MicroSoft Internet Explorer 5.0 (or later) is
required to view a report file in HTML format.

3. Select the directory in which you want to
save this report and type the desired name.

You can save the report in any of these formats:
•
•
•
•
•

.txt, ASCII Tab-delimited
.cvs, Comma-deliminted
.xls, Excel
.htm, HTML
.xml, EXtensible Markup Language

Note that the default location is
c:\GC\Save.
4. Click the

JULY 2010

button.

Save Report to Disk

7-8

7.1.5

REPORTS

MON2000

Report Contents
This section includes examples of the following
reports: Analysis, Raw Data, Calibration,
24-Hour Average, Weekly Average, Hourly
Average, and Variable Average. After each
sample report, a table describes the contents
and identifies which functions affect the data.
Each report contains the header information,
including:
Table 7-2 Contents Guide for Report Headers

Content

Related Function(s)

Menu

Section

Date-Time

standard GC application

n/a

n/a

Analysis Time

Timed Events Table (TEV)

Application > Timed Events
[F5]

5.3

Cycle Time

TEV

Application > Timed Events
[F5]

5.3

Stream

Report Display, Select Stream

Reports > Report Display

7.1

Stream Name

Application > Streams

5.8

Mode

standard GC application

n/a

n/a

Cycle Start Time

standard GC application

n/a

n/a

Analyzer

System, Analyzer Name

Application > System

5.1

Strm Seq

System, Stream Sequence

Application > System

5.1

Report Header
(optional)

User Defined, Text Strings

Application > User Defined
> Text Strings

5.4.3

Report Contents

JULY 2010

REPORTS

MON2000

7-9

Analysis Report

JULY 2010

Report Contents

7-10

REPORTS

MON2000

Table 7-3 Contents Guide for Analysis Report
Content

Related Function(s)

Menu

Section

Component Name

Component Data Table (CDT)

Application > Component
Data [F6]

5.2

GC Analysis Data
variables (std)

Calculations, Control

Application > Calculations
> Control

5.5.1

GC Analysis Data
variables (user)

Calculations, User Defined

Application > Calculations
> User Defined

5.5.3

Alarms

Limit Alarms

Application > Limit Alarms

5.6

Additional Base
Pressures

Compress(ibility) enabled

Application > Calculations
> Control

5.5.1

Streams, Optional Pressure

Application > Streams

5.8

Report Contents

JULY 2010

REPORTS

MON2000

7-11

Raw Data Report

Table 7-4 Contents Guide for Raw Data Report
Content

Related Function(s)

Menu

Section

Retention Time
Peak Area
Peak Height
Det(ector)
Integration Start/End
Peak Width 1/2 Height

standard GC application

n/a

n/a

Mthd (method)

standard GC application, peak
derivation method (non-edit)

Chromatogram
Viewer

6.2.1

JULY 2010

Report Contents

7-12

REPORTS

MON2000

Calibration Report

Table 7-5 Contents Guide for Calibration Report
Content

Related Function(s)

Menu

Section

Component Name
Cal. Conc.

CDT

Application > Component
Data [F6]

5.2

Raw Data
New RF
RF % Dev.
New RT
RT % Dev.

CDT (additional columns)

Application > Component
Data [F6]

5.2

Alarms

Limit Alarms

Application > Limit Alarms

5.6

Streams used for analysis display “0”s in the calibration raw data
columns (see Section 5.8)

Report Contents

JULY 2010

REPORTS

MON2000

7-13

Final Calibration Report

Table 7-6 Contents Guide for Final Calibration Report
Content

Related Function(s)

Menu

Section

Component Name
Cal. Conc.

CDT

Application > Component
Data [F6]

5.2

Old RF
New RF
RF % Dev.
Old RT
New RT
RT % Dev.

standard GC application

Application > Component
Data [F6]

5.2

Application > Limit Alarms

5.6

results of final calibration,
adjustments to response
factors (RFs) and retention
times (RTs)
CDT (additional columns)

Alarms

Limit Alarms

Report items marked with an asterisk (*) were updated during
calibration.

JULY 2010

Report Contents

7-14

REPORTS

MON2000

Average Reports

There are five types of Average Reports:
•
•
•
•
•

Hourly Average Report
24-Hour Average Report
Weekly Average Report
Monthly Average Report
Variable Average Report

Sample 24-Hour Average Report

Report Contents

JULY 2010

REPORTS

MON2000

7-15

Table 7-7 Contents Guide for Average Reports
Content

Related Function(s)

Menu

Section

Item Number
Analysis data/calculation
Stream
Component

Calculations, Averages

Application > Calculations
> Averages

5.5.2

Old RF
New RF
RF % Dev.
Old RT
New RT
RT % Dev.

standard GC application

n/a

n/a

results of ongoing or
completed averages

7.2

GC REPORT REQUEST
This function allows you to send a report to a
printer connected to the GC Controller.
1. Use the Reports > GC Report Request menu
to access this function.
2. The GC Report Request dialog appears.

JULY 2010

GC Report Request

7-16

REPORTS

MON2000

3. Select the report you wish to print.

The GC Config Report is a snapshot of the PC Config
Report. Contents include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

current alarms
streams
control calculations
CDTs
TEVs
GC serial port settings
analog outputs

See Appendix A for a sample PC Config Report.

For reports other than the GC Config, a
Streams list displays.
Double-click the appropriate stream and the
controller sends the report to the printer.
Click the
button. Double-click
the appropriate stream and the print
process begins.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.
7.3

GC PRINTER CONTROL
This function allows you to define schedules for
automatic printing of standard GC reports to a
printer connected to the GC Controller.
1. Use the Reports > GC Printer Control menu
to access this function.

GC Printer Control

JULY 2010

REPORTS

MON2000

7-17

2. The GC Printer Control dialog displays.

3. Use the provided data fields, check and
combo boxes to select the desired settings.
See Table 7-8 for detailed descriptions.
You can, for example, set a
report to print after each
analysis and every 12 hours.

4. Click the
button to accept your
selections and return to the main window.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.

Table 7-8 Description of Settings for GC Printer Control
Setting

Description

Anly

Enables/disables report printing after each analysis run regardless of report type
selected.

Cal

Enables/disables report printing after each calibration run regardless of report type
selected.

FCal

Enable/disable report printing after every final calibration run regardless of report
type selected.

Time

Time at which report should print at 24-hour intervals.
To disable this feature, set Time to 00:00 or 12:00 AM.
The Time setting overrides the Hours setting and only applies to streams that are
enabled (i.e., checked ON) for report printing.

JULY 2010

GC Printer Control

7-18

REPORTS

MON2000

Table 7-8 Description of Settings for GC Printer Control (Continued)
Setting

Description

Hours

hour interval at report should print
Use this setting for intervals less than 24 hours. For example, use this setting if you
wish to print a report every 8 hours. Ensure that the Time value is “00:00” to disable
the 24-hour setting or “12:00 AM” to disable the 12-hour setting.
This setting only applies to streams enabled (i.e., checked ON) for report printing.

Avg

average type to be used in the report calculations; calculations are dependent on
settings in the Averages Calculations dialog (see Section 5.5.2)
No = disabled
Hr = hourly avg
24 = 24-hour avg
Wk = weekly avg
Mn = monthly avg
Var = variable avg



streams to be used for data collection when the report is generated

Form
Feed

enable/disable manual paper feed feature of printer

Alarm
Logging

enable/disable real-time printing of alarms as they occur

Event
Logging

enable/disable real-time printing of events as they occur

7.4

MON2000 PRINTER CONTROL
This function allows you to define schedules for
automatic printing of standard GC reports to a
printer connected to your PC. See Section 3.7 to
configure the printer settings. The user must
be on-line (connected to the controller) using
either a serial port direct connection, modem or
Ethernet card in order to print from the
MON2000 printer.

MON2000 Printer Control

JULY 2010

REPORTS

MON2000

7-19

1. Use the Reports > MON2000 Printer Control
menu to access this function.
2. The Printer Control dialog displays.

Use the provided data fields, check and
combo boxes to select the desired settings.
See Table 7-9 for detailed descriptions.
You can, for example, set a
report to print after each
analysis and every 12 hours.

3. Click the
button to accept your
selections and return to the main window.

Each report generation
interrupts all current functions.

Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.

Table 7-9 Description of Settings for MON2000 Printer Control
Setting

Description

Anly

enable/disable report printing after each analysis run regardless of
report type selected

Cal

enable/disable report printing after each calibration run regardless
of report type selected

FCal

enable/disable report printing after every final calibration run
regardless of report type selected

Time

time at which report should print (every 24 hours)
00:00 = disables 24-hour setting
12:00 AM = disables 12-hour setting
Note that the Time setting will override the Hours setting.

JULY 2010

MON2000 Printer Control

7-20

REPORTS

MON2000

Table 7-9 Description of Settings for MON2000 Printer Control (Continued)
Setting

Description

Hours

hour interval at report should print
Use this setting for intervals less than 24 hours. For example, use
this setting if you wish to print a report every 8 hours. Ensure that
the Time value is “00:00” to disable the 24-hour setting or “12:00
AM” to disable the 12-hour setting.

Avg

average type to be used in the report calculations; calculations are
dependent on settings in the Averages Calculations dialog (see
Section 5.5.2)
No = disabled
Hr = hourly avg
24 = 24-hour avg
Wk = weekly avg
Mn = monthly avg
Var = variable avg



streams to be used for data collection when the report is generated

Form
Feed

enable/disable manual paper feed feature of printer

7.5

ARCHIVE DATA
This function enables you to view, print, or
save various reports and records stored in the
GC memory for the Model 500 and Model 700
analyzers. You can also reset (i.e., delete) the
stored records from the GC memory.

Archive Data

JULY 2010

REPORTS

MON2000

7-21

The standard GC application can store up to
ninety-nine days of analysis runs and
calibration records.

7.5.1

View Data Model 500/Model 700
To view, print, copy or save archived data,
1. Use the Reports > Archive Data > View Data
menu to access this function.
2. MON2000 displays the Date Range
Selection pop-up dialog.

Select All Dates radio button or choose
Selected Dates. Select the Start date and
End Date (date range) for the report to be
archived.

JULY 2010

View Data Model 500/Model 700

7-22

REPORTS

3. Click the
selection.

MON2000

button to apply your

Or,
Click the
button to return to the
View Data window.
MON2000 displays the message “Reading
GC Data” in the status bar.
4. The Select Archive Record dialog appears.

Double-click the desired archived report or
record. (If no records are found, an
information dialog displays.) Select a range
(multiple) of records to archive by leftclicking the mouse at the beginning record
and dragging the pointer to the last record
to be archived. Then, press the ENTER key.
Or,
Left-click the mouse pointer on the
beginning record, then move the mouse
pointer to another location (either further
up or down the list) and while holding down
the Shift key, click the ending record. All
highlighted records will be automatically
selected. Press the Enter key to display all
of the selected records.

View Data Model 500/Model 700

MON2000 limits the
number of viewable
Archived Records to 100.

JULY 2010

MON2000

REPORTS

7-23

5. The Calculation Results from Ext. Modbus
window appears.

Use the
button or press the ESC key to
exit this function and return to the main
window.
As applicable, use the scroll bars to see
other areas of the record.

JULY 2010

View Data Model 500/Model 700

7-24

REPORTS

MON2000

6. To print, copy to the clipboard, or save the
report to disk, right-click the Archive Data
sheet and select the desired option from the
popup menu.
Or, use the

,

or

buttons for these functions.
Use the Save File dialog to choose the
directory location and file name.

You can save the report in any of these
formats:
•
•
•
•
•

.txt, ASCII Tab-delimited
.cvs, Comma-deliminted
.xls, Excel
.htm, HTML
.xml, EXtensible Markup Language

7. Click the
main window.
7.5.2

button to return to the

Archive Export Data
Use this function to export data files for review
at a later time.
From the Reports>Archive Data>Export Data
menu,

Archive Export Data

JULY 2010

REPORTS

MON2000

7-25

1. Click Export Data and the Export Archive
window displays.

2. The exported data file is saved in the
default (GC>Directory). Use the pull-down
menu to save the data file to a different
directory.
3. Click an existing file (to write over an
existing file) or enter a 'new' file name in the
'Data Field'.
4. Save the file as either:
• .csv (spreadsheet application format)
• .txt (Word Pad or Note Pad application
format)

JULY 2010

Archive Export Data

7-26

REPORTS

MON2000

If the GC you are using is a Model 2350A, the
Data Selection Range' dialog appears. Choose
the date range as:
•
•
•
•

All dates (radio button) or,
Selected Dates (radio button)
Start date
End date

Default Settings

Also note that the Date Range dialog only
displays when files are archived for more than
one day.
Date Range Selection

5. Click the

button to apply your

selection. Click the
button to
abort and return to the Trend Data window.
6. The Select Archive Records dialog appears.

Select Archive
Record Default

Select Archive
Record Selection

To Select all records, the operator may drag
the slide bar down to the end of the list,
then while holding down the 'Shift' key click
the last report and MON2000 will
automatically select all records in between.
This also works for any number of records
within the list.

Archive Export Data

JULY 2010

REPORTS

MON2000

7-27

The operator may select several records
individually by holding down the 'Ctrl' key
and clicking the mouse pointer on random
selected reports. Reports that are several
hours apart may be viewed in this manner.
Or, as the example .BMP above shows, the
operator may click a report and drag the
mouse pointer down, highlighting several
reports in sequential order.
7.5.3

Reset
To delete archived data and reset the GC
Controller memory,
1. Use the Reports > Archive Data > Reset
menu to access this function.
2. MON2000 displays a confirmation dialog.

Click the

button to continue.

3. MON2000 clears the GC Controller
memory. New archived records will begin
accumulating again as analysis and
calibration runs occur.

JULY 2010

Reset

7-28

7.6

REPORTS

MON2000

TREND DATA
This function allows you to view, print, or save
graphical representations, or trend lines, of
accumulated analysis data for the 2350A and
the Model 700 GC Controllers.

7.6.1

Trend Data Model 700/2350A GCs
1. Use the Reports > Trend Data menu, then
click the
function.

button to access this

2. The Trend Data dialog appears.

Use the enabled Graph and Trend pushbuttons to access the Trend Data features.
See the following sections for detailed
information.
3. Click the
main window.

Trend Data

button to return to the

JULY 2010

REPORTS

MON2000

7.6.2

7-29

View Live Trend Online Model 700/2350A
To view a live trend from the online Model 700/
2350A GC,

You cannot view a live trend if the corresponding
analysis record does not exist in the GC memory.
An error message will display:

1. Click the

button.

2. The Select menu for variable displays.

Double-click the desired variable. If the
selected variable applies to a single
component (e.g., Gallons/1000 SCF, Liquid
Volume Percent, or Mole Percent), then the
Standard Components menu appears.

JULY 2010

View Live Trend Online Model 700/2350A

7-30

REPORTS

MON2000

3. The Select menu for streams appears.
Double-click the left mouse button on the
desired stream to make your selection.
4. MON2000 displays the Date Range
Selection pop-up dialog.

Select All Dates radio button or choose
Selected Dates. From the pull-down
menu, select the date range for the Trend
report.
Click the
selection.

to apply your

Or,
Click the
trend window.

button to return to the

5. MON2000 reads data from the online GC
unit and plots the current, live trend for the
selected component and stream.

Plotting a trend line interrupts the normal storage
of ongoing Auto Sequence analysis results.
A trend line graph generated from the maximum
1200 archived analysis records can require up to
8 minutes to plot. Any Auto Sequence analysis
that occurs during the plotting will not be
retained for future retrieval nor will be included in
ongoing calculations.

View Live Trend Online Model 700/2350A

JULY 2010

MON2000

REPORTS

7-31

The Trend Data window appears.

JULY 2010

View Live Trend Online Model 700/2350A

7-32

REPORTS

MON2000

The corresponding data is dynamically
displayed in the provided legend.
Use the Graph and Trend Options functions
to manipulate the display. To zoom in on a
particular point, click and drag your mouse
over that area; repeat as necessary. Use the
Restore State or Zoom Out options from the
right-click menu (see Section 7.6.10) to
return to the original display.
7.6.3

View Trend from File on Disk
To view a trend from a file previously saved to
disk, use the Reports > Trend Data menu, then
click the
button to access this function.
1. Click the

button.

2. Use the provided directory tree to locate the
desired TRD file and click the
button to open.

View Trend from File on Disk

JULY 2010

MON2000

REPORTS

7-33

3. MON2000 displays the trend file.

The corresponding data is dynamically
displayed in the provided legend.
Use the Graph and Trend Options functions
to manipulate the display. To zoom in on a
particular point, click and drag your mouse
over that area; repeat as necessary. Use the
Restore State or Zoom Out options from the
right-click menu (see Section 7.6.10) to
return to the original display.

JULY 2010

View Trend from File on Disk

7-34

7.6.4

REPORTS

MON2000

Edit Graph Display
1. Click the
dialog appears.

button. The Edit Graph

2. Use the provided attributes and options to
change the trend display as desired.
3. Click the
button to accept your
changes and return to the Trend Data
dialog.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the Trend Data dialog.
4. The trend display changes as specified.
Additional display options are available by
right-clicking the display area. See Section
7.6.10 for more information.
7.6.5

Changing Cursor Size
To toggle the cursor size from course movement
(less accurate) to fine movement (more
accurate), click the
button.

Edit Graph Display

JULY 2010

REPORTS

MON2000

7.6.6

7-35

Describe Trend
1. Click the
button. The Edit
Description dialog appears.

2. Type the desired statement(s).
3. Press the ENTER key to save this
description.
Use the
button or press the ESC key to
exit this dialog without saving your entry.
7.6.7

Print Trend
To print the displayed trend graph, click the
button.
MON2000 prints the report to your configured
printer (see Section 3.7).

JULY 2010

Describe Trend

7-36

7.6.8

REPORTS

MON2000

Save Trend
To save a currently displayed trend to disk,
1. Click the

button.

The table is saved as a
binary file with a .trd
extension.

2. Use the provided directory tree to select the
desired file location and name, then click
the

button.

3. MON2000 saves the trend along with its
graph settings.
7.6.9

Read Trend Archive
This feature is not available if the
corresponding analysis record does not exist in
the GC memory or if you are viewing this trend
data offline from a file.
To read the Trend Archive,
1. Click the

button.

If you are operating a Model 700 or 2350A
GC, then an Archive Range Selection dialog
displays.
(a) Toggle the appropriate radio button to
select either All Dates or Selected Dates.
To specify a date range, use the Start
Date and End Date pull-down menus.
(b) Click the

Save Trend

button to continue.

JULY 2010

REPORTS

MON2000

7-37

2. The Archive dialog appears.

3. Click the
button to return to the
Trend Data dialog.
7.6.10 Display Options
Right-click the graph area to access these
options, or use the corresponding keystroke(s).
Options are listed in alphabetical order.

JULY 2010

Display Options

7-38

REPORTS

MON2000

Table 7-10 Display Options for Trend Data
Keystroke

Right-Click Option

Description

CTRL C

Copy to clipboard

allows you to copy this graph to another
application such as MS Word or Excel

F8

Cursor to nearest point

snap cursor to nearest point in both the X and Y
directions

CTRL V

Paste from clipboard

allows you to plot a range of points from another
application such as Meshwork or Excel

CTRL P

Print Plot Area

print currently displayed chromatograph area

CTRL S

Print Series All

print all displayed chromatograms

HOME

Restore State

restore last saved display settings for the
selected chromatogram

CTRL HOME

Save State

save current display settings for the selected
chromatogram

F4

Toggle Coarse/Fine

toggle cursor from coarse (less accurate) to fine
(more accurate)

F9

Toggle Lines/Dots

toggle graph from line(s) to dots

CTRL F4

Toggle Mouse Position Tip

graph cursor follows movement of mouse while
tooltip displays exact coordinates of the current
point

CTRL F9

Toggle Nearest Point Tip

graph cursor follows movement of mouse cursor

NUM +

Zoom In

zoom in on entire graph

NUM –

Zoom Out

zoom out from entire graph

NUM →

Zoom X In

zoom in on X axis

NUM ←

Zoom X Out

zoom out from X axis

NUM ↑

Zoom Y In

zoom in on Y axis

NUM ↓

Zoom Y Out

zoom out from Y axis

Display Options

JULY 2010

LOGS

MON2000

8-1

LOGS
8Y

The options in the Logs pull-down menu allows
you to keep a maintenance record, keep a
parameter record, and view the Alarm and
Event Logs.
8.1

MAINTENANCE LOG
Use this function to track maintenance
activities performed on a given GC unit.
To read and edit the Maintenance Log,
1. Use the Logs > Maintenance Log menu to
access this function. MON2000 retrieves the
data from the GC unit.
2. The Maintenance Log dialog appears.

JULY 2010

Maintenance Log

8-2

LOGS

MON2000

3. To add the log entry text,
(a) Click the “Add Message F4” button or
click the last ‘Log Message’ cell and
press the RETURN key. The Maintenance
Log message dialog displays.

(b) Add text in the appropriate Log Message
cell, then click the

button to

apply the changes. Click the
button to discard your changes and
return to the Main window.
4. To change the log entry text,
(a) Click the appropriate Log Message cell.

A Log Message can contain up
to 1000 characters.
However, the entire
Maintenance Log can contain
no more than 1100 characters.

(b) Click the
button. The
Edit Log Message dialog appears.
(c) Type your edits.

Maintenance Log

JULY 2010

LOGS

MON2000

8-3

(d) To accept your edits, press the RETURN
key. To cancel your edits, click the
button or press the ESC key.

5. To delete a log entry, click the desired log
entry and press the DELETE key.
6. Click the
button to write this
data to the GC unit.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.
8.2

PARAMETER LIST
Use this function to keep a record of the
hardware components and associated
parameters for a given GC unit.
To read and edit the Parameter List,
1. Use the Logs > Parameter List menu to
access this function. MON2000 retrieves the
data from the GC unit.

JULY 2010

Parameter List

8-4

LOGS

MON2000

2. The Parameter List dialog appears.

Table 8-1 Items in Parameter List
Type

Parameter

Operational

SO #
PN #
Purchaser
Location
Order #
Date
Model #
Control Serial #
Analyzer Serial #
Approved by
Date
Customer Approved by
Date

Drawings

Analyzer Flow
Sample Conditioning System
Interconnect Wiring
Outline and Dimensional
System Wiring
Other

Parameter List

JULY 2010

LOGS

MON2000

8-5

Table 8-1 Items in Parameter List (Continued)
Type

Parameter

Analysis

Settings
Flows in cc/min
Sample Loop 1
Sample Loop 2
Detector
Valve Part Numbers

Sample System

Sample Valve 1 Flow Rate (cc/min)
Sample 1 Pressure (PSIG)
Sample Valve 2 Flow Rate (cc/min)
Sample 2 Pressure (PSIG)
SCS Oven Temperature (°C)
Solenoid Purge Flow (cc/min/stream)

Column

OD (in.)
ID (in.)
Length
Support
Mesh
Phase
Connected
Function

3. To save this data to disk, click the
button or press the F3 key.
The Save Parameter File dialog appears.

JULY 2010

Parameter List

8-6

LOGS

MON2000

This feature only saves the files in .par
format. Use the Save Parameter File dialog
to choose the directory location and file
name.
4. To open an existing parameter file from
disk, click the
press the F4 key.

button or

Use the Open Parameter File dialog to
choose the desired file.
5. Click the
button to write your
changes to the GC unit.
Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.
8.3

ALARM LOG
Use this function to read and/or clear the
various entries in the Alarm Log. The Alarm
Log is a circular buffer that contains 50 entries.
To clear or acknowledge all active alarms, see
Section 8.4.

Alarm Log

JULY 2010

LOGS

MON2000

8-7

To view the Alarm Log,
1. Use the Logs > Alarm Log menu to access
this function. MON2000 retrieves the last
50 alarms from the GC unit.
2. The Alarm Log dialog appears.

Table 8-2 Alarm Log Attributes
Attribute

Description



indicates whether the alarm has been
acknowledge
U = unacknowledged
? = status unknown

State

indicates whether the alarm is
currently active
SET = currently active
CLEAR = inactive

Date/Time

JULY 2010

date and time the alarm condition
began

Alarm Log

8-8

LOGS

MON2000

Table 8-2 Alarm Log Attributes (Continued)
Attribute

Description

Alarm Message 1

describes the alarm condition

If an alarm message is changed (see Section 5.6 and
Section 5.7) all affected alarm entries, including those
previously recorded, will include that change.

Alarm Message 2

displays the alarm limit and current
condition values, as applicable

3. By default, MON2000 displays all recorded
alarms.
To view only the unacknowledged alarms,
click the Unacknowledged alarms only radio
button.
To view only the active alarms, click the
Active alarms radio button.
4. To acknowledge a single alarm,

An alarm triggered by a user-defined value will continue
to display as an active alarm until that value is no longer
in the alarm state.

(a) Ensure you have selected the correct
display option (see Step 3).
(b) Select the alarm you want to
acknowledge.
(c) Click the
the F2 key.

Alarm Log

button or press

JULY 2010

LOGS

MON2000

8-9

5. To acknowledge all unacknowledged
alarms,
(a) Ensure you have selected the correct
display option (see Step 3).
(b) Click the
the F3 key.

button or press

In the Active Alarm view, click the
button or press the F4 key.
If an alarm is cleared before the
condition has been resolved, MON2000
redisplays the alarm entry as an active
alarm.
6. Click the
button to exit and
return to the main window.
8.4

CLEAR OR ACKNOWLEDGE ACTIVE ALARMS
To clear or acknowledge all alarms, click the
Logs pull-down menu and select the Clear/Ack
All Active Alarms option.

8.5

EVENT LOG
Use this function to track the system and
operator events that have occurred with a
given GC unit.
To view the Event Log,
1. Use the Logs > Event Log menu to access
this function. MON2000 retrieves the last
50 events from the GC unit.

JULY 2010

Clear or Acknowledge Active Alarms

8-10

LOGS

MON2000

2. The Event Log dialog appears, displaying
each system or operator event and the
corresponding data.

Table 8-3 Event Log Attributes
Attribute

Description

User Id

user name

Date

date event occurred

Time

time event occurred

Event Message

indicates event type (i.e., describes event)

Old Value

if applicable, the value before the event

New Value

if applicable, the value after the event

3. Click the
button to exit and
return to the main window.

Event Log

JULY 2010

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

MON2000

9-1

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING
9

The Data Collection feature
is only available with the
MON2000 PLUS program.

9.1

OVERVIEW
The MON2000 PLUS program provides
configurable automatic collection and storage
of analysis and calibration data from the gas
chromatograph controller.
Configuration of the specific chromatographs to
be polled, timing of polling, and specific data to
be collected from each is defined by the user
through the setup of polling control files.
An Auto-Sequencing module interprets the
commands in a polling control file and performs
the collection and storage of data.

The MON2000 PLUS
program is not designed to
provide database capability
for the data collected.

JULY 2010

Data collected is stored in text files (*.txt) or
comma delimited files (*.csv). The emphasis is
on the data being in a form suitable for import
by standard spreadsheet and/or database
programs.
Reports collected are stored in text files (.txt)
formatted as ready-to-print or in commadelimited files (.csv) that reduce white space
and the output file size.

Overview

9-2

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

MON2000

All Model 500 and 1000 GC’s with 2350A and
older 2350/2360 GC Controllers and Model 700
GC Controllers are supported in the acquisition
of the following types of data:
• Alarms - Selection of Alarm Log, Active
Alarms, or Unacknowledged Alarms.
• Averages - Direct Access to single averages
and/or blocks of averages to include support
for acquiring results from most recent
averaging period as well as those for
previous averaging periods (number limited
by number supported by specific model and
application). Access to average value,
maximum value, minimum value, and
number of samples for the period to be
supported.
• CGM Archive - Selection of Last Analysis or
Last Calibration and Stream number.
• CGM on Alarm - Poll the CGM when an
alarm condition is set or cleared.
• Event Log - Selection of Start/End time,
Most Recent n Days, Since Last Collected,
or Entire Log.
• Maintenance Log - Selection of Start/End
Time, Most Recent n Days, Since Last
Collected, or Entire Log
• Registers - Both User Modbus and
SIM_2251 single and multiple register
queries are supported.
• Reports - Archive data accessible via
Reports>Archive Data>View Data menu are
available (selection based on most recent
number of days, date range, single stream
or all streams). Selections are based on the
various GC model and are consistent with
the capabilities of those models and specific
applications.

Overview

JULY 2010

MON2000

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

9-3

• Condition Start - Start of conditional polls.
The poll commands following the Condition
Start are run only when the condition is
met. The condition is defined through the
status change of a Modbus register
(SIM_2251 or User_Modbus).
• Condition End - End of conditional polls.
The poll commands following the Condition
End are run normally.
Use these Data Collection functions to
configure a polling control file and start the
Auto-Sequencing module:
• Configuration Open File - Open or edit an
existing Polling Control file.
• Configuration New File - Create a new
Polling Control file and use the Commands
to configure the polling settings.
• Start Auto - Initiate the Auto-Sequencing
module. During Auto-Sequencing a Status
display is maintained on the screen.
9.2

DATA COLLECTION CONFIGURATION
Use the Data Collection>Configuration>New
File or Data Collection>Configuration>Open
File menu to access the Configuration for Data
Collection window and the commands to
configure the Polling Control file. This function
is performed in the Online or Offline mode.
A Polling Control file contains commands to be
executed in order to acquire desired sets of data
from one or more gas chromatographs.

JULY 2010

Data Collection Configuration

9-4

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

MON2000

Select a desired command from the list of
available commands and input the necessary
data to complete the command (see Table 9-1
for a list of commands). The completed
command is added to the Polling Control file.
Continue with the next desired command. This
process is continued until all commands are
selected and configured for the file. Edit the
polling control file by adding, deleting, and
inserting commands.

Data Collection Configuration

JULY 2010

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

MON2000

9-5

Table 9-1 List of Commands
Command

Description

Await

This command instructs the Auto-Sequencing module to await a specific time of day prior to continuing processing the commands in this file. The user enters the desired time of day in hours and
minutes.

Connect/
Logon

The Connect/Logon command instructs the Auto-Sequencing module to establish communications
with the indicated GC controller using the communication method and parameters as indicated in
the GC directory entry and logon to the GC Controller. After selection of the Connect command
the user selects the desired GC controller from a list of the GC directory entries.

Connect/No
Logon

Another Poll Command is Connect/No Logon which allows the Auto-Sequencing module to execute
without logging on to a GC Controller.

Delay
(Seconds)

The Delay (Seconds) command instructs the Auto-Sequencing module to Delay for a specified
interval of time prior to proceeding. The user enters the time in seconds.

Delay
(Hours)

The Delay (Hours) command instructs the Auto-Sequencing module to Delay for a specified
interval of time prior to proceeding. The user enters the time in hours.

Disconnect

This command instructs the Auto-Sequencing module to terminate communications with the controller to which it is currently connected. No additional user provided information is necessary for
this command. If this command is executed and no GC Controller is connected, then the command
is ignored.

End

This command marks the end of the polling control file and signals the Auto-Sequencing module to
stop processing.

Poll

The poll command instructs the Auto-Sequencing module to acquire a set of data of a single type
from the GC Controller to which it is currently connected. The user first selects the data type to be
acquired.

Poll Data Types
• Alarms
• Averages
• CGM Archive
• CGM on Alarm
• Event Log
• Maintenance Log
• Registers
• Reports
• Condition Start
• Condition End
Repeat

The repeat command instructs the Auto-Sequencing module to restart processing of the
commands in the polling control file at the beginning of the file. The repeat command can be
specified with a count that specifies the number of times to execute the sequence of commands in
the file. Without the count (or with a count of zero) the sequence of commands will be re-executed
indefinitely until terminated manually by the user.

Run

The run command instructs the Auto-Sequencing module to start execution of a user program.
The user specifies whether the Auto-Sequencing module waits for completion of the user program
before processing the poll control file commands, or continues immediately thus executing in
parallel with the user program. This feature allows you to further process the collected data. As an
example, the user program might perform some validity checking on the data, reformat it, and
then and store it in an Access database on the MON2000 PLUS PC.

JULY 2010

Data Collection Configuration

9-6

9.2.1

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

MON2000

Create a New Polling Control File
To create and configure a new polling control
file,
1. Use the Data Collection > Configuration>New File menu to access this function.
2. MON2000 PLUS displays the Configuration
for Data Collection window.
3. From the Polling Output File(s) table select
Report and/or Data type by clicking the
appropriate check box. Enter the Default
Filename field for the chosen selections.

4. From the Commands pull-down list, select a
command.

5. Enter the necessary data and a description
for the command.
6. Use the add, Insert, Delete, and Poll
Command buttons to add/edit/modify the
configuration.
7. When you have finished adding/editing/
modifying the commands, click the Save
button.

Create a New Polling Control File

JULY 2010

MON2000

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

9-7

8. The Save Polling Control File dialog
appears. Enter a filename and click the
Save button to save the *.apc file.

9.2.2

Open an Existing Polling Control File
To edit or modify the configuration of an
existing file,
1. From the MON2000 PLUS main window,
use the Data Collection>Configuration>
Open File menu.
2. Click the
button and the Open
Polling Control File window displays.

3. Select the desired polling control file, then
click the

JULY 2010

button.

Open an Existing Polling Control File

9-8

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

MON2000

4. The Configuration for Data Collection
window displays.

5. Use the
buttons to modify the Data Collection
configuration or Polling Control file.
6. When you have finished modifying the file,
click the
button to apply the
changes.
7. The Save Polling Control File dialog
appears.

Open an Existing Polling Control File

JULY 2010

MON2000

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

9-9

8. A Save Polling Control message prompts
you to replace the exiting file or rename the
Polling Control file (*.apc) file. Click the
button to replace the existing
file.
Or,
9. Click the
changes.
9.2.3

button to discard your

Await Command
This command instructs the auto-sequencing
module to wait for a specific time of day prior to
processing the commands in the file. The user
enters the desired time of day in hours and
minutes.
To configure the Await Command,
1. From the General Configuration Commands
pull-down list select the Await command.

2. Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard or LEFT-CLICK the mouse in the
Time field and enter the time.
3. Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard or LEFT-CLICK the mouse in the
Command Description field. Enter a
description for the Await command in the
Command Description field.

JULY 2010

Await Command

9-10

9.2.4

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

MON2000

Connect/Logon Command
The Connect/Logon command instructs the
Auto-Sequencing module to establish
communications with the indicated GC
controller, using the communication method
and parameters as indicated in the GC
directory entry and logon to the GC Controller.
After selection of the Connect command the
user selects the desired GC controller from a
list of the GC directory entries.

Use the communication
method and parameters as
configured in the File>GC
Directory entry.

To configure the Connect/Logon Command,
1. Select Connect/Logon from the General
Configuration Commands pull-down list.

2. From the GC Entry list that is configured in
the File>GC Directory menu, select the
desired GC Controller.
3. Enter a description for the Connect/Logon
command in the Command Description
field.

Connect/Logon Command

JULY 2010

MON2000

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

9.2.5

9-11

Connect/No Logon Command
The Poll Command Connect/No Logon allows
the Auto-Sequencing function to execute
without logging on to a GC Controller.
To configure the Connect/No Logon Command,
1. Select Connect/No Logon from the
General Configuration Command pull-down
list.

2. From the GC Entry list that is configured in
the File>GC Directory menu, select the
desired GC Controller.
3. Enter a description for the Connect/No
Logon command in the Command
Description field.
9.2.6

Delay (Seconds) Command
Prior to executing the auto-polling function, the
Delay (Seconds)Command instructs the
Auto-Sequencing module to delay for a
specified interval of time. The user enters the
time delay in one second increments.

JULY 2010

Connect/No Logon Command

9-12

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

MON2000

To configure the Delay (Seconds) Command,
1. From the General Configuration List of
Commands pull-down list, select Delay
(Seconds).

2. Enter the time delay, in one second
increments, in the Delay field.
3. Enter a description for the Delay (Seconds)
command in the Command Description
field.
9.2.7

Delay (Hours) Command
Prior to executing the auto-polling function, the
Delay(Hours)Command instructs the AutoSequencing module to delay for a specified
interval of time. The user enters the time delay
in one hour increments.
To configure the Delay (Hours) Command,
1. From the General Configuration List of
Commands pull-down list, select Delay
(Hours).

2. Enter the time delay, in one hour
increments, in the Delay field.
3. Enter a description for the Delay (Hours)
command in the Command Description
field.

Delay (Hours) Command

JULY 2010

MON2000

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

9.2.8

9-13

Disconnect Command
Use the Disconnect Command to terminate
communications with a currently connected GC
Controller.
To configure the Disconnect command,
1. From the General Configuration: List of
Commands, use the Commands pull-down
list and select Disconnect.

2. Enter a description for the Disconnect
Command in the Command Description
field.
No additional input parameters are required
for this command. Also note, if you are not
connected to a GC Controller, this command is
ignored.
9.2.9

End Command
The End Command marks the end of the polling
control file and signals the Auto-Sequencing
module to stop processing.
1. From the Configuration for Data Collection
window, click the
button to select
another command.
2. Use the Command pull-down list, and select
End.

3. Enter a description for the End Command
in the Command Description field.
JULY 2010

Disconnect Command

9-14

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

MON2000

9.2.10 Poll Command: Alarms
To configure the Alarms Command, from the
Configuration for Data Collection window,
1. Select POLL from the General Configuration
Commands pull-down list.

Each Poll Command includes
the criteria to define
acquisition and storage of a
single type of data.

2. Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard or LEFT-CLICK the mouse in the
Type field and select Alarms from the pulldown list.
3. In the Command Description field, enter a
description for the Alarms command.
4. Click the
button. The Poll
Command: Alarms dialog box displays.

5. To select Alarm Log, click the Alarm Log
check box. RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard or LEFT-CLICK the mouse in the
Time Selection field.

Poll Command: Alarms

JULY 2010

MON2000

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

9-15

6. Use the Time Selection pull-down list and
choose one of the following:
• Start/End Time
• Most Recent
• Since Last Collected

Use the Up and Down arrows and enter
the starting date, starting time, ending
date and ending time in the appropriate
data fields.
7. If Active Alarms or Unacknowledged
Alarms is selected, no additional
information is necessary and all of the
entries of the selected type are returned.
8. From the Output File table, enter/edit a
filename and file format for the Alarms
Output file.

9. Click the
selections.

button to apply the

MON2000 PLUS displays the Save Changes
dialog.

JULY 2010

Poll Command: Alarms

9-16

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

MON2000

10. Click the
button to save the
changes and return to the Configuration for
Data Collection window.
Or,
Click the
changes.

button to discard your

9.2.11 Poll Command: Averages
To configure the Averages Command, to
acquire sets of one or more averages for the
most recent averaging period and/or the
previous averaging period (any available in the
GC Controller),

MON2000 PLUS reads all the Averages
configuration (set up from the
Applications>Calculatioins>Averages menu) if
connected to GC controller.
If you are using a Direct Connection (rather than
an Ethernet Connection), the reading process
could take a long time.

1. From the Configuration for Data Collection
window, select the Poll command.

2. Press the RIGHT ARROW key or click in the
Type field, then select Averages from the
pull-down list.
3. Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard, or left-click the mouse in the
Command Description field. Enter a
description for the Averages command.

Poll Command: Averages

JULY 2010

MON2000

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

9-17

4. Click the
button and the
Poll Command: Averages dialog box
displays.

5. From the Averages Configuration dialog, for
a single record, select Average - Single
Record. If the Average - Single Record is
selected, only the average values are
included in the output file.

Or,

JULY 2010

Poll Command: Averages

9-18

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

If Complete Output Complete Output is
selected, click the check boxes to select
Average, Min, Max, or Samples values.

MON2000

All averages referenced by
a single Poll command must
be for the same averaging
interval (e.g. hourly, daily,
weekly, monthly, variable).

Use the Result Grouping pull-down list and
select By Period or By Average.
If the number of averages is greater than
one, then select whether the results are to
be grouped by average, or grouped by
period.
(a) When grouped by Average, the data from
all of the periods of a given average are
stored in a single record in the output
file with the appropriate time-stamp
included with the data for each period.
(b) When grouped by Period, a record for
each period contains the values from
each of the averages for that period and
a single time stamp value is included in
the record.

Poll Command: Averages

JULY 2010

MON2000

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

9-19

6. From the Output File table, enter/edit the
filename and file format (*.txt or *.csv) for
the Averages Output file.
7. Click the
button to apply the
configuration changes.
8. MON2000 PLUS displays the Save Changes
dialog.
9. Click the
button to write the
changes and return to the Configuration for
Data Collection window.
Or,
Click the
changes.

button to discard your

9.2.12 Poll Command: CGM Archive
Use the CGM Archive command to poll either
the Last Analysis or Last Calibration CGM
Archive for a specific stream. The output file is
in *.cgm format and the file name is based on
the Analyzer Name, Stream, and Date/Time.
The CGM file is stored in the
"\GC\SAVE\CGM Archive" folder.
To configure the CGM Archive Command,
1. From the Configuration for Data Collection
window, click the ADD button to select
another command.
2. Next, select the Poll command.

3. Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard, or LEFT-CLICK the mouse in the
Type field, then select CGM Archive.

JULY 2010

Poll Command: CGM Archive

9-20

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

MON2000

4. Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard, or LEFT-CLICK the mouse in the
Command Description field. Enter a
description for the CGM Archive command.
5. Click the
button and the
Poll Command: CGM Archive dialog box
appears.

6. Enter the Stream number for data
collection.
7. Use the Analysis/Calibration pull-down list
and select the CGM Archive for the Last
Analysis or Last Calibration.
8. Click the
button to apply the
configuration changes. MON2000 PLUS
returns you to the Configuration for Data
Collection window.
Or,
9. Click the
changes.

Poll Command: CGM Archive

button to discard your

JULY 2010

MON2000

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

9-21

9.2.13 Poll Command: CGM on Alarm
Use the CGM on Alarm command to poll the
CGM when an alarm condition is set or cleared.
Setup continuous polls so that MON2000 PLUS
can determine and retrieve the CGM with the
alarm condition. The data is saved to an output
file in CGM format and is stored in the
"\GC\SAVE\ERRORS" folder. The file name
is based on the Date/Time and ends with an 'a'.
To configure the CGM on Alarm Command,
1. From the Configuration for Data Collection
window, click the
another command.

button to select

2. Next, select the Poll command.
3. Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard, or LEFT-CLICK the mouse in the
Type field, then select CGM on Alarm.
4. Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard, or LEFT-CLICK the mouse in the
Command Description field. Enter a
description for the CGM on Alarm
command. No further details are needed.
9.2.14 Poll Command: Condition Start
Use the Condition Start command to start
conditional polling.
To configure the Condition Start command,
1. From the General Configuration (List of
Commands) table, select Poll from the
Command column.
JULY 2010

Poll Command: CGM on Alarm

9-22

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

MON2000

2. Select Condition Start from the pull-down
list in the Type column.
3. Enter a description in the Command
Description column.
4. Select a default output file format by
clicking either the Report or Data
checkbox on the Polling Output File(s)
table.
5. Enter a default output file name.
6. Click the Poll Command Details button
located at the bottom of the Configuration
for Data Collection window. The Poll
Command: Condition Start window
appears.

7. Select Register/SIM_2251 or Register/
User_Modbus from the Condition Data
Type column.
8. Enter the register number in the Condition
Data Value column.
9. Select Change from the Condition Status
column.

Poll Command: Condition Start

JULY 2010

MON2000

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

9-23

10. To apply the configuration changes, click
OK. To discard your changes and return to
the Configuration for Data Collection
window, click Cancel.
9.2.15 Poll Command: Condition End
Use the Condition End command to stop
conditional polling.
To configure the Condition End command,
1. From the General Configuration (List of
Commands) table, select Poll from the
Command column.

2. Select Condition End from the pull-down
list in the Type column.
3. Enter a description in the Command
Description column.

JULY 2010

Poll Command: Condition End

9-24

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

MON2000

9.2.16 Poll Command: Event Log
1. From the General Configuration: List of
Commands, use the Commands pull-down
list and select the POLL command.

2. Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard, or LEFT-CLICK the mouse Type
field and select Event LOG from the pulldown list.
3. Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard, or LEFT-CLICK the mouse in the
Command Description field. Enter a
description for the Event Log command.
4. Click the
button and the
Poll Command: Event Log dialog box
displays.

5. From the Event Log Selection pull-down
list, choose one of the following:
Event Log
Selection

Additional Selections

Start/End Time

Start Date
Start Time

Poll Command: Event Log

JULY 2010

MON2000

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

Event Log
Selection

9-25

Additional Selections
Ending Date
Ending Time

Most Recent n Days

Enter number of n Days

Since Last Collected

No further information
is needed

Entire Log

No further information
is needed

6. For each entry in the Event Log which
satisfies the selection criteria, a record
containing the following information is
stored:
-

User ID of user initiating the change (or
SYSTEM)
Date/time of occurrence
Description of the event
Parameter value prior to the event (old
value)
Parameter value after the event (new
value)

7. From the Output File table, enter/edit the
filename and file format (*.txt or *.csv) for
the Event Log Output file.
8. Click the
button to apply the
configuration changes.
9. MON2000 PLUS displays the Save Changes
dialog.
10. Click the
button to write the
changes and return to the Configuration for
Data Collection window.
Or,

JULY 2010

Poll Command: Event Log

9-26

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

MON2000

Click the
button to discard your
changes and return to the Configuration for
Data Collection window.
9.2.17 Poll Command: Maintenance Log
To configure the Maintenance Log command,
1. From the General Configuration: List of
Commands, use the Commands pull-down
list and select the POLL command.

2. Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard, or LEFT-CLICK the mouse Type
field and select Maintenance Log from the
pull-down list.
3. Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard, or LEFT-CLICK the mouse in the
Command Description field. Enter a
description for the Maintenance Log
command.

Poll Command: Maintenance Log

JULY 2010

MON2000

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

9-27

4. Click the
button and the
Poll Command: Maintenance Log dialog box
displays.

5. From the Maintenance Log Configuration
Selection table, choose one of the following:
Maintenance Log Selection

Additional Selections

Start/End Time

•
•
•
•

Most Recent n Days

• Enter number of n Days

Since Last Collected

• No further information
is needed

Entire Log

• No further information
is needed

Start Date
Start Time
End Date
End Time

6. From the Output File table, enter/edit the
filename and file format (*.txt or *.csv) for
the Maintenance Log Output file.
7. Click the
button to apply the
configuration changes.
Or,

JULY 2010

Poll Command: Maintenance Log

9-28

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

MON2000

8. Click the
button to discard your
changes and return to the Configuration for
Data Collection window.
9.2.18 Poll Command: Registers
Blocks of Modbus Register data can be specified
for collection.
To configure the Registers Command,
1. From the General Configuration: List of
Commands, use the Commands pull-down
list and select the POLL command.

2. Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard, or LEFT-CLICK the mouse Type
field and select Registers from the pulldown list.
3. Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard, or LEFT-CLICK the mouse in the
Command Description field. Enter a
description for the Registers command.

MON2000 PLUS reads all the
configured Registers
associated with the Modbus
Type (Sim_2251 or
User_Modbus) if you are
connected to a GC
Controller.
If you are using a direct
connection (rather than an
Ethernet connection), the
reading process could take a
long time.
When initially building a
“polling control” file, you
may want to use the
MON2000 PLUS “Offline
Edit” function with an “as
configured” version of the
application open to avoid
these delays.

Poll Command: Registers

JULY 2010

MON2000

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

4. Click the

9-29

button and the

Poll Command: Registers dialog appears.

The basic configuration includes the
following:
• Modbus Type - SIM_2251 or USER
MODBUS
• Data Type Register or Coil
• Starting Register/Coil
• Number of Registers/ Coils

JULY 2010

Poll Command: Registers

9-30

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

MON2000

(a) If SIM_2251 is selected and the Starting
Register is in the range 701 - 999, then
Record Selection includes the following:
Record Selection

Additional Selections

Starting Record + n

Starting Record
number
Number of Records (n)
Total Number of
Records

Most Recent n Records

Number of Records (n)
Total Number of
Records
Location of Last Written
Record

Since Last Collection

Total Number of
Records
Location of Last Written
Record
Date/Time Format

(b) If USER MODBUS is selected, and Data
Type is Register, then the user must
enter a Data Format string to define for
each parameter being requested (an
integer 16-bit or floating-point 32-bit
value). Floating-point values use two
consecutive registers for storage.

Poll Command: Registers

JULY 2010

MON2000

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

9-31

(c) For the standard registers, the values
returned are stored in a single record in
the output file, following the Date and
Time when the registers are polled, the
Starting Register, and Number of
Registers.
(d) For SIM_2251 registers 701-999, one
record is stored in the output file for each
record retrieved with fields within the
record, starting the date and time when
the record is polled, starting Register
(701-999), Record Number, and the data
for the record.
5. From the Output File table, enter/edit the
filename and file format (*.txt, *.dat or
*.csv) for the Registers Output file. The
DAT file format is for customized chroma
data.
6. Click the
button to apply the
configuration changes.
7. MON2000 PLUS displays the Save Changes
dialog.
8. Click the
button to write the
changes and return to the Configuration for
Data Collection window.
Or,
9. Click the
button to discard your
changes and return to the Configuration for
Data Collection window.

JULY 2010

Poll Command: Registers

9-32

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

MON2000

9.2.19 Poll Command: Reports
The archived analysis reports (as viewable
under MON2000 when connected to a
controller, from the Reports>Archived
Data>View Data menu) can be retrieved and
stored.
To configure the Reports Command,
1. From the Configuration for Data Collection
window, click the ADD button to select
another command.

2. Next, select the Poll command.
3. Press the RIGHT ARROW on your keyboard,
or LEFT-CLICK the mouse in the Type field,
then select Reports from the pull-down list.
4. Press the right arrow on your keyboard, or
left-click the mouse in the Command
Description field. Enter a description for the
Reports command.

Poll Command: Reports

JULY 2010

MON2000

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

9-33

5. Click the
button and the
Poll Command: Reports dialog box appears.

6. Use the following selection criteria and then
enter appropriate data:
Reports Selection

Additional Selections

Start/End Time

• Stream Number
(0 - indicate all streams)
• Start Date
• Start Time
• End Date
• End Time

Most Recent n Days

• Stream Number
(0 - indicate all streams)
• Enter number of n Days

Runs Since Last Collection

• Stream Number
(0 - indicate all streams)

7. Regardless of the selection criteria method
used above, choose the order of returned
reports in the Output Order (with Most
Recent First or with Oldest First).
8. Next, select the Output Type, as a Complete
Report or an Analysis - Single Record.

JULY 2010

Poll Command: Reports

9-34

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

MON2000

9. From the Output File table, enter/edit the
filename and file format (*.txt or *.csv) for
the Reports Output file.
10. Click the
button to apply the
configuration changes.
Or,
11. Click the
button to discard your
changes and return to the Configuration for
Data Collection window.
9.2.20 Repeat Command
Use the Repeat command to instruct the AutoSequencing module to restart processing of the
commands in the polling control file (from the
beginning of the file). Specify a count for the
number of times to execute the sequence of
commands in the file. Without a specified count
(or with a count of zero) the sequence of
commands will be re-executed indefinitely until
terminated manually by the user.
To configure the Repeat command,
1. From the General Configuration List of
Commands pull-down list, select Repeat.

2. Enter the number of times to repeat the
Auto-Sequencing process, in the Repeat
Count field.
3. Enter a description for the Repeat
Command in the Command Description
field.

Repeat Command

JULY 2010

MON2000

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

9-35

9.2.21 Run Command
The run command (future release) instructs the
Auto-Sequencing module to start execution of a
user program. The user specifies whether the
Auto-Sequencing module waits for completion
of the user program before processing the poll
control file commands, or continues
immediately thus executing in parallel with the
user program. This feature allows you to
further process the collected data. As an
example, the user program might perform some
validity checking on the data, reformat it, and
then and store it in an Access database on the
MON2000 PLUS PC.
9.3

DATA COLLECTION
The Data Collection Start Auto function allows
you to open an existing polling control file,
select to append or overwrite the existing
output files, select whether to enable
Transaction Logging, and start the automatic
data collection.

JULY 2010

Run Command

9-36

9.3.1

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

MON2000

Start Auto-Sequencing
To initiate Auto-Sequencing, use the Data Collection>Start Auto menu,
1. Click START AUTO and the Start AutoSequencing dialog appears.

2. Click the
button and the Open
Polling Control File dialog appears.

3. Select the desired polling control file, and
then click the

button.

4. From the Output Files selection, click the
desired radio button:
• Append to the existing file
• Overwrite the existing file
5. In the check box, select Enable Transaction
Logging (if desired).

Start Auto-Sequencing

JULY 2010

MON2000

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

9-37

6. Click the
button to confirm the
start of automatic operation. MON2000
PLUS begins the Auto-Sequencing process
and displays the Auto-Sequencing Status
window.
7. The Auto-Sequencing module begins with
the first command in the selected polling
control file and performs the requested
operation. Processing continues
sequentially through the file performing the
operations requested by each command.
(a) If a Repeat command is encountered,
then the processing is restarted at the
beginning of the file.
(b) If an End command (or the end-of-file) is
encountered, the module ends the
command processing.

JULY 2010

Start Auto-Sequencing

9-38

9.3.2

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

MON2000

Transaction Log
To enable the Transaction Logging functions,
select the check box on the Start AutoSequencing dialog. If this option is chosen, one
or more entries are made to the
AutoPollCommsLog.txt file each time a
command is executed.
Transaction Log entries include a time stamp
and a description of the command being
executed. If the command results in Modbus
messages being exchanged between the PC and
the controller, the poll message from the PC
and the response from the controller are
recorded.

9.3.3

Auto-Sequencing Status
During Auto-Sequencing a status display is
maintained on the screen.

Transaction Log

JULY 2010

MON2000

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

9-39

As each command is processed the following
general information is displayed (depending on
the command being processed, the details of
the exact data included will vary:
• Polling Control file in use
• Start time of operation
• Command being processed
• Description of command being processed
• Status of completion of the command (level
detail appropriate to the individual
command)
• Next Command to be processed
• Status Log
Auto-Sequencing must be stopped before other
MON2000 PLUS menu selections can be
chosen.
Terminate Auto-Sequencing at any time by
clicking the Abort button on the AutoSequencing status display screen. If this
occurs, the Auto-Sequencing module will close
all open output files and return to normal
operation of the MON2000 PLUS program.
9.3.4

Status Log
When MON2000 PLUS detects connection or
polling errors, the error condition is logged and
a Status Log file is saved as:
AutoPollStatusLog.txt.
The Status Log field on the Auto-Sequencing
Status dialog indicates the error condition.

JULY 2010

Status Log

9-40

MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING

MON2000

This page is intentionally left blank.

Status Log

JULY 2010

MODBUS TEST

MON2000

10-1

MODBUS TEST
10

The Modbus Test Program (WinMB) enables
you to test the operation of the serial port communications, and determine Modbus register
and log contents. Use this program as an aid to
software debugging or for special installations.
Via WinMB, you can troubleshoot with any
device including the GC Controller, an
ultrasonic meter, or a flow computer.

FUNCTION NOT REQIURED FOR NORMAL GC OPERATION
The Modbus test is reserved for advanced functions
The Modbus Test function is not required for normal GC
operation. Skip this section unless you are developing
software, engaging in a software debugging process, or
designing a custom installation that directly accesses the
GC Controller Modbus registers.

Traditionally, Modbus registers are polled by
using a data collection system (DCS). To
facilitate installation and debugging, the
WinMB program emulates a DCS.
This section provides detailed instructions for
using the WinMB program. Use this program
only if you are familiar with Modbus
communication protocol and the operation of
the MON2000 software.
10.1

STARTING WINMB
To start WinMB from MON2000, pull down the
File menu and click the Modbus Test option.

JULY 2010

Starting WinMB

10-2

MODBUS TEST

MON2000

If MON2000 displays an error, verify the
installation directory via the Program Settings
function (see Section 2.16.2).
The Modbus Test Program main window
appears.

10.2

ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATIONS
Use the following instructions to configure the
desired communications settings.
If you are accessing WinMB via MON2000,
WinMB defaults to the same communications
and serial port settings as those set for
MON2000. To set up a WinMB-specific
configuration, see Section 10.2.3.

Establishing Communications

JULY 2010

MODBUS TEST

MON2000

10-3

10.2.1 Comparison of Modbus Protocols
MON2000 software and the WinMB program
accommodate two different Modbus protocols:
SIM_2251 and User_Modbus. For each protocol,
separate Modbus registers are reserved.
Thus some settings for MON2000 and WinMB
depend on which Modbus protocol is used.
The protocol you need depends, ultimately, on
the hardware used for data acquisition from the
GC Controller Modbus register contents.
The following comparison should help clarify
the differences between these protocols as well
as the utility of each.
Table 10-1 Comparison of SIM_2251 and User_Modbus Protocols
SIM_2251

User_Modbus

serial slave port

serial slave port

modified protocol that allows floating point
numbers to be transmitted over Modbus via
2251 emulation slave type

standard Gould protocol that accommodates
PLC Emulation LO-HI (PLC-LH)

most register contents are predefined; some
registers can be user-defined

predefined Boolean (coils)
user-defined Numeric (registers)

data types are predefined for registers 1000 to
9000

data types are user-defined

variables assigned to registers can be listed in
the PC Config Report (for instructions, see
Section 2.16.3; for an example report, see
Appendix A). See Appendix F for more detail
about individual registers.

variables assigned to registers can be listed in
the PC Config Report (for instructions, see
Section 2.16.3; for example report, see
Appendix A)

When using WinMB, set Register Mode to
“DANIEL” to view register contents.

When using WinMB, set Register Mode to
“PLC- LH” or “PLC-HL” to view register
contents.

It is not necessary to assign scales to registers.

It may be necessary to assign scales to registers, to convert floating point values to whole
integer representations.

JULY 2010

Comparison of Modbus Protocols

10-4

MODBUS TEST

MON2000

10.2.2 Set GC Com Parameters via MON2000
Set the communication parameters for the GC
Controller serial port to which your PC, or
other device, is connected.
To determine or reset the communications
parameters at the GC Controller,
1. Use the Application > Serial Ports menu to
access the Serial Ports function. The Serial
Ports dialog appears.

2. Verify the MON2000 serial port Usage
setting.
(a) Determine the GC Controller serial port
to which you are directly connected.
(b) In the Serial Ports dialog, ensure that
the Usage setting for the port is either
“SIM-2251” or “User_Modbus”.
If the setting is incorrect, change it by
using the provided combo box.

Consult accurate
documentation of the GC
installation or visually
inspect the serial line
connection at the GC
Controller Terminal Board.

3. Verify the Baud Rate setting.
WinMB accepts the following baud rates:
300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,
38400, 57600, 115200.
4. Ensure the remaining serial port
parameters are correct. Revise as required
and record for future reference.

Set GC Com Parameters via MON2000

JULY 2010

MODBUS TEST

MON2000

10-5

Typical settings are:
Table 10-2 Typical GC Communications Parameters

RTS On/Off settings are
required only when line
settling is needed before
data transmission begins.

Parameter

RTU Setting

ASCII Setting

Data Bits

8

7

Stop Bits

1

1

Parity

None

Even

Handshake

None

None

RTS On

0

0

RTS Off

0

0

Ptrcl

RTU

ASCII

Note that the RTU protocol permits a more
efficient data transmission for it uses
significantly less bits than ASCII.
5. Check the Com ID setting. The Com ID is
the slave address defined by MON2000.

Record the true Device ID
number for future use.

6. Verify that the RW setting is either “R” or
“RW”.
7. Click the
button to accept your
input and return to the main screen.
10.2.3 Set Up Port via WinMB
To determine or reset the communications
parameters used by WinMB,

JULY 2010

Set Up Port via WinMB

10-6

MODBUS TEST

MON2000

1. Click the
button to access the
Port Setup function. The Port Setup dialog
appears.

2. Define the WinMB serial port setup options.
Table 10-3 Typical WinMB Port Parameters
Parameter

Typical Setting

Port

COM1 or COM2

Baud Rate

9600

Data Bits

7 or 8

Parity

Even or None

Stop Bits

1

Flow Control

None

Control Options

Read Timeout, 500 ms
Try, 2

Register Mode

Daniel (for SIM_2251):
PLC-LH (for User_Modbus)
PLC-LH

Protocol

ASCII Modbus
RTU Modbus

The serial port settings
displayed are for the serial
communication parameters
at the PC. These settings
must match the GC
Controller settings (to verify,
see Section 10.2.2).
For direct connection to the
GC Controller, ensure that
the Port setting is the same
as the Com ID number of the
serial port used.

3. Click the
button to accept your
input and return to the main screen.

Set Up Port via WinMB

JULY 2010

MODBUS TEST

MON2000

10.3

To access previous
settings, use the spin
arrows to view and select.

10-7

GETTING MODBUS DATA
Use the following steps to read or write register
contents to the GC Controller (or any other
device). See the following subsections for
additional details.
Before retrieving data, print a PC Config
Report (see Section 2.16.3) and check the
Communication data for variable names
assigned to the Modbus registers.

1. In the Slave Addr data field, type the Comm
ID of the GC unit (or other device). WinMB
will accept a slave address of 1 to 247.

Any change is applied to the
corresponding register value at
each device. Table 10-4
shows which function codes
support the broadcast mode.

JULY 2010

Enter “0” to use the broadcast mode. In the
broadcast mode, WinMB polls all known
devices. Each device interprets this message
as an instruction to read and take action;
however, a response message may not be
received by WinMB.

Getting Modbus Data

10-8

MODBUS TEST

MON2000

2. Use the Function pull-down menu to select
the desired read or write option.
Table 10-4 Available Modbus Function Codes
Function Code

Description

Broadcast

1 (Read Coil)

read one or more coil values

3 (Read Reg)

read one or more register values

5 (Set Single Coil)

set (write) one coil value

5 (Set Single Reg)

set (write) one register value

15 (Set Multiple Coils)

set (write) multiple coil values

16 (Set Multiple Regs)

set (write) multiple register values

3. In the Data Addr data field, type the
starting register.
Note that the data type is set automatically
by WinMB, per the specified data address.
Use the Data Type pull-down menu to select
a different data type for these registers.
Table 10-5 Default Data Type per Register Range for SIM_2251
Register Range

Default Type

1000 – 2999

Boolean

3000 – 4999

Integer

5000 – 6900

Long

7000 – 8999

Float

To ensure best data type
assignments, review a PC
Config Report (see
Section 2.16.3 to view a
live report; see Section 7.1
to view a report file; see
Appendix A for a sample
report).

To select data types for SIM_2251 registers
1000 to 9000, see Section 10.3.2.
4. In the Quantity data field, type the number
of registers to be retrieved (range from 1 to
2016).

Getting Modbus Data

JULY 2010

MODBUS TEST

MON2000

Boolean registers are not
user-defined (for either
SIM_2251 or User_Modbus)
and primarily contain alarm
flags useful for debugging.
To view the contents of
Boolean registers, select the
“1 (Read Coil)” function
code.
Numeric registers for
User_Modbus can be userdefined (see
Section 5.18.4). To view
the contents of Numeric
registers, select the “3
(Read Regs)” function code.

10-9

Note that the requested number of registers
cannot exceed the amount contained by the
selected message block but you can retrieve
a partial block. You cannot cross a message
block boundary.
Also note that in Standard Modbus mode
each register is 16 bits. Therefore, integers
(SHORT) consist of 1 register while floats
(FLOAT) and long integers (LONG) consist of
2 registers.
5. Type the desired repeat count (how many
times WinMB will read or set the specified
registers before ceasing transmission) in the
Repeat data box.
You can repeat the poll from 1 to 9999
times. A Repeat value of “–1” produces an
infinite polling loop that can be terminated
by clicking the

button.

10.3.1 Use Single Data Type
Use this function to assign a data type to a
group of registers you will read or edit.
To poll a group of registers with the same userdefined data type,
1. Follow Steps 1 through 5 in Section 10.3.
2. Click the Use  to decode registers
radio button to choose this option.

3. Use the Data Type pull-down menu to
assign a data type to the selected registers
(see Section 10.3, Steps 3 and 4).

JULY 2010

Use Single Data Type

10-10

MODBUS TEST

MON2000

4. Click the
button to retrieve the
selected registers (i.e., the specified data
addresses) from the GC Controller (or other
device).
Click the
button to cease
transmission and return to the Modbus
Function Selection options.
Note that the transmitted/received packet
displays in the Packet Input-Output
window.
10.3.2 Use Template (Mixed Data Types)
Use this function to create a new template or
use an existing template file to directly decode
Modbus register data retrieved from the GC
Controller (or other device). Via the
configuration of a given template, WinMB
imposes the specified data types, etc., onto the
incoming registers. The Template function is
best used when decoding mixed data types.
To create a new template or use an existing
template,
1. Follow Steps 1 through 5 in Section 10.3.
2. Use the Data Type radio buttons to select
the desired template option, to decode
registers or decode logs.

3. Note that the Record No. setting is now
available. Enter the desired record by
typing in the provided data field or using
the scroll arrows.

Use Template (Mixed Data Types)

JULY 2010

MODBUS TEST

MON2000

10-11

Table 10-6 Using Record Numbers with Templates
Data Type Setting

Other Setting(s)

Result

register template

• Enter Data Addr value.
• Enter Record No. value.
• Enter Quantity value.

Read Quantity fields (i.e., the number of
fields specified by the Quantity setting)
from the specified Record No. of the
register (Data Addr).

log template

• Enter Record No. value.

Read all fields associated with the
Record No.

• Enter Data Addr value.
• Enter “0” for the Record
No. value.

Read all fields in all records for the
specified log register (Data Addr).

To verify which record number should be
entered, consult the Modbus specifications
for your device. For more information on GC
Modbus registers, see Appendix F.
4. Click the
button. The
Template File dialog appears with a new
template displayed.

JULY 2010

Use Template (Mixed Data Types)

10-12

MODBUS TEST

MON2000

5. To open an existing template file, click the
button. The Select Template
Configuration File dialog appears.

Use the directory tree to locate the desired
file (e.g., temp1.cfg), highlight it, and then
click the

button.

6. To edit the displayed file,
• Use the provided combo boxes to select a
different data type. The Offset and Size
values change to accommodate the data
type.
• Click the
button to change all
template data types to the type last
selected.
7. To save the displayed file to disk, click the
button. The Select Template
Configuration File dialog appears.

Use Template (Mixed Data Types)

JULY 2010

MODBUS TEST

MON2000

10-13

Use the directory tree to specify the desired
location. Either select an existing file or
type the new file name (e.g., temp2.cfg) in
the File name data field. Then click the
button.
8. Click the
button to apply your
selections and return to the main window.
Click the
button to return to the
main window without applying your
selections.
10.4

USING MODBUS DATA
Use WinMB to poll the GC Controller Modbus
registers (or, registers from another device),
confirming that data is being accurately
relayed from the GC Controller to the PC.
Then, as necessary, assign data types to the
returned data (see Section 10.4.3). You can
save all settings to file for future reference.
To launch the WinMB program from
MON2000, use the File > Modbus Test menu
(see Section 10.1 for additional options).

JULY 2010

Using Modbus Data

10-14

MODBUS TEST

MON2000

10.4.1 Set Log Parameters
The Log Data function allows you to log the
polled data to a specified file.
To set the log parameters for WinMB,

The Log Data function is not
required for transmission of
Modbus data.

1. Click the
button to access the
To disable this function,
Log Data function. The Log Data List dialog deselect the Enable Logging
check box.
appears.
2. Click the Enable Logging check box to turn
this function ON and to access the Log Data
Parameters.

Set Log Parameters

JULY 2010

MON2000

MODBUS TEST

10-15

3. Use the Logging Mode pull-down menu to
select either a Sampling or Continuous
mode.

Continuous mode records the polled data
continuously until the connection is
terminated or the Log Data function is
disabled (see Step 2).
Sampling mode records the polled data per
the user-defined Time Interval (e.g., every 2
minutes).
4. Select the desired logging type.
Append adds this log to the file specified,
preserving previously logged data.
Reset deletes the previously logged data and
saves only this new log.
5. Click the
button to apply your
selections and return to the main window.
Go to Step 6.
Click the
button to return to the
main window without applying your
selections.

JULY 2010

Set Log Parameters

10-16

MODBUS TEST

MON2000

6. The Save As dialog appears.

Use the directory tree to specify the desired
location and choose a format type. Either
select an existing file or type the new file
You can save log data
name in the File name data field.
in any of these
formats:

7. Click the
button to create this
• .txt, ASCII tablog file, apply your selections, and return to
deliminated
the main window.
• .xls, Excel
Click the
button to abort and
return to the main window.

• .htm, HTML

10.4.2 Save Modbus Data
To save the data table in a separate file,
1. Click the
button to access the
Save Data function. The Save Data
Displayed dialog appears.

Save Modbus Data

JULY 2010

MODBUS TEST

MON2000

You can save log data
in any of these formats:
• .txt, ASCII tabdeliminated
• .xls, Excel
• .htm, HTML

10-17

2. Use the directory tree to specify the desired
location and either select an existing file or
type the new file name in the File name
data field.
3. Click the
button to save this data
and return to the main window.
Click the
button to return to the
main window without saving this data.
10.4.3 Assign Scale Ranges for User_Modbus
This is an optional task that applies to
applications using the User_Modbus protocol.
By assigning scale ranges, floating point data
can be converted to integer values.
Use the Serial Ports, Edit Register List
function to assign scale ranges. See Section
5.18.4 for detailed instructions. See Appendix F
for more information regarding GC Modbus
registers.
10.4.4 Print Modbus Data
To print the transmitted data, click the
button. The standard Windows®
print dialog appears.
MON2000 prints the report to your configured
printer (see Section 3.7).

JULY 2010

Assign Scale Ranges for User_Modbus

10-18

10.5

MODBUS TEST

MON2000

TROUBLESHOOTING COMMUNICATION
ERRORS
The WinMB Communication Error Log is
maintained in a circular buffer that holds up to
512 entries.
WinMB tracks the errors for a given session
but does not store them. When you exit
WinMB, all errors are cleared.
To view any communication errors that
occurred during the data transfer, from the
File>Modbus Test menu,
1. Click the
button to access the
Communication Error Log function. The
Error dialog appears.

Double-click a Description
cell to “scroll through” the
displayed text.

2. To view all errors that have occurred in this
session, click the

button.

To delete all entries to date, click the
button.
3. Click the
main window.

button to return to the

Troubleshooting Communication Errors

JULY 2010

MODBUS TEST

MON2000

10.6

10-19

USING MODBUS TEST ONLINE HELP
Use the WinMB online help file to quickly
access reference terminology, function
descriptions, and other related information.
See the following sections for more information.

10.6.1 How to Access
To access online help, use the File>Modbus
Test menu to display the Modbus Help test
dialog, then,
• Press F1 on your PC keyboard
Or,
• Click the
toolbar.

button located on the

The Modbus Test Program Help Index displays.

JULY 2010

Using Modbus Test Online Help

10-20

MODBUS TEST

MON2000

10.6.2 How to Navigate
To navigate within this help file,
• Click the
button to display an index,
a topic-tree contents menu, and a search
function.
• Click the
button to display an index
where you can select a specific term.
• Click the
topic viewed.

button to return to the last

• Click the
topic.

button to print the current

Use the scroll bars and arrows to display more
of a topic. You can also resize and/or move the
topic window for better viewing convenience.
When applicable, a topic will contain links to
other related topics. Use these links as you
need.

How to Navigate

JULY 2010

PC CONFIG REPORT

MON2000

A-1

APPENDIX A, PC CONFIG REPORT
AA

This appendix explains how to print a PC
Config Report and provides an example for
reference.
A.1
Output data for the PC
Config Report depends on
the GC Controller and its
application.

HOW TO PRINT
Use the following instructions to print the
current application settings for the online GC.
To view a PC Config Report already saved to
disk, see Section 7.1.2.
1. Use the File > PC Config Report menu to
access this function. The PC Config Report
window appears.
2. Click the check boxes (see Select column) to
choose the option you want included in the
configuration report.

Click the
button or press the F2
key to select all options.
Click the
button or press F3 to
deselect (i.e., clear) all checked options.

JULY 2010

How to Print

A-2

PC CONFIG REPORT

MON2000

3. Use the Output radio buttons to either save
the report to disk, print the report with or
without form feeds, or display on screen.
If you want to use the standard Windows®
Print dialog to select a printer, uncheck the
Use default printer option.
4. Click
the button or press the F4
key to generate your customized PC Config
Report and print or save this file.
By default, if a print option is selected,
MON2000 will print the report to your
configured printer (see Section 3.7).
A.2

If you are online with the
GC Controller, a PC Config
Report that includes all
options can require up to
20 minutes to generate
and save. Printing a full
report can take longer.
If you press the ESC key,
MON2000 will stop after
the current option is
completed.

EXAMPLE REPORT
This example PC Config Report, on the
following pages, represents a typical report
that includes all sections. It is provided for
reference only.

Example Report

JULY 2010

System Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
Description

Value

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Stream Sequence

1

Aux. Stream Sequence
Analyzer Name

2350_001

Unit Type

2350

System Description

2350 Standard 1 - 64 avgs

Chromatogram Buffers Size 21000
Max Peaks
Number of Valves
Daylight Saving Time
CGM Analog Output Config
Baseline Offset
CFG Baseline Number
Metric Base Conditions

64
5
Normal
0
12
1
Off

Max. Archive Averages

64

Max. Archive Avg. Records

64

CFG Revision Level

150

CFG Base Name

USASTD1

********************************************************************************

Component Data Table Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49

Component Data Table #1
No.

Component

U/S DetID RetTime

Resp Factor F/V

CalConc AnalMthd

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 C6+ 47/35/17

STD

1

30.2

2013490 VAR

0.0289 %

AREA

2 PROPANE

STD

1

50.2

1316330 VAR

1.0 %

AREA

3 i-BUTANE

STD

1

65.7

1520820 VAR

0.3 %

AREA

4 n-BUTANE

STD

1

73.6

1545350 VAR

0.3 %

AREA

5 NEOPENTANE

STD

1

86.3

1651260 VAR

0.1 %

AREA

6 i-PENTANE

STD

1

109.4

1715050 VAR

0.0993 %

AREA

7 n-PENTANE

STD

1

121.6

1793230 VAR

0.0999 %

AREA

8 NITROGEN

STD

1

149.5

782820 VAR

2.5 %

AREA

9 METHANE

STD

1

153.1

637330 VAR

89.5719 %

AREA

10 CARBON DIOXIDE

STD

1

179.2

953088 VAR

1.0 %

AREA

11 ETHANE

STD

1

200.6

1060440 VAR

5.0 %

AREA

No.

Component

RTDev

SecDev Updt

RFDev

GRSBTU

NETBTU MolWgt

AGA8

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 C6+ 47/35/17

3

2 CAL

10

5288.7

4900.5

95.96 C6mix1

2 PROPANE

3

2 CAL

10

2521.9

2320.3

44.1 PROPANE

3 i-BUTANE

3

2 CAL

10

3259.4

3007.3

58.12 i-BUTANE

4 n-BUTANE

3

2 CAL

10

3269.8

3017.4

58.12 n-BUTANE

5 NEOPENTANE

3

3 CAL

10

3993.9

3691.4

72.15 i-PENTANE

6 i-PENTANE

3

4 CAL

10

4010.2

3707.6

72.15 i-PENTANE

7 n-PENTANE

3

4 CAL

10

4018.2

3715.5

72.15 n-PENTANE

8 NITROGEN

3

2 CAL

10

0

0

9 METHANE

3

3 CAL

10

1012.3

911.5

10 CARBON DIOXIDE

3

4 CAL

10

0

0

11 ETHANE

3

5 CAL

10

1773.7

1622.4

28.01 NITROGEN
16.04 METHANE
44.01 CO2
30.07 ETHANE

No.

Component

Lb/Gal

GPMFactor Reid Vapor

RelDenGas

RelDenLqd

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 C6+ 47/35/17

5.6681

0.4462

3.0194

3.3132

0.68

2 PROPANE

4.227

0.2756

188.64

1.5226

0.507

3 i-BUTANE

4.693

0.3271

72.591

2.0068

0.5629

4 n-BUTANE

4.869

0.3153

51.709

2.0068

0.584

5 NEOPENTANE

4.975

0.383

35.9

2.4911

0.5967

6 i-PENTANE

5.206

0.3661

20.445

2.4912

0.6244

7 n-PENTANE

5.261

0.3622

15.574

2.4912

0.6311

8 NITROGEN

6.748

0.1096

0

0.9672

0.8094

2.5

0.1695

5000

0.5539

0.3

10 CARBON DIOXIDE

6.82

0.1704

0

1.5196

0.818

11 ETHANE

2.97

0.2675

800

1.0382

0.3562

9 METHANE

No. Component

HVSupMJ/m3 HVInfMJ/m3 HVSupMJ/kg HVInfMJ/kg

M_RelDens

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 C6+ 47/35/17

196.98

182.52

48.557

44.99

0.6803

2 PROPANE

93.936

86.42

50.368

46.34

0.5078

3 i-BUTANE

121.41

112.01

49.388

45.57

0.5635

4 n-BUTANE

121.79

112.4

49.546

45.72

0.5846

5 NEOPENTANE

148.76

137.49

48.75

45.06

0

6 i-PENTANE

149.36

138.09

48.949

45.25

0.6249

7 n-PENTANE

149.66

138.38

49.045

45.35

0.6316

0

0

0

0

0.8093

37.708

33.948

55.575

50.034

0.3

0

0

0

0

0.8227

66.065

60.43

51.95

47.52

0.3581

8 NITROGEN
9 METHANE
10 CARBON DIOXIDE
11 ETHANE

********************************************************************************

Timed Event Table Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49

Timed Event Table #1
Analysis Time 225

Cycle Time

240

Sample Valve Y N N N N

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Valve #

2

ON

Inhibit
Valve #

0.0

@

0.0

@

2.0

8 1

@

3.0

6

@

4.0

@

5.0

@

7.0

@

8.0

ON
3

Detector

1

ON

Slope Sens

Valve #

@

1
1

ON

Strm Switch
Peak Width

4 1

Valve #

1

OFF

@

10.0

Valve #

2

OFF

@

23.0

Inhibit

OFF 1

@

26.0

Inhibit

ON

@

36.0

OFF

@

42.0

Inhibit

OFF 1

@

46.0

Inhibit

ON

1

@

97.0

8 1

@

100.0

Inhibit

OFF 1

@

101.0

Inhibit

ON

1

@

139.0

1

@

140.0

@

142.0

3 1

@

143.0

OFF 1

@

146.0

5

@

169.0

1

@

170.0

8 1

@

173.0

Inhibit

OFF 1

@

174.0

Inhibit

ON

@

223.0

Valve #

3

Peak Width

Detector
Valve #

1
3

ON

Peak Width
Inhibit
Detector
Inhibit

1

1
ON

Peak Width

1

********************************************************************************

User-Defined Numeric Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No. Name

Type

Value

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------No entries found.
********************************************************************************

User-Defined Selection Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No.

Name

Options

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1

EnableCalMan

2

2

EnableComAlm

2

4

Maint_mode

1

5

Run_Aux_Seq

1

Options for EnableCalMan
--------------------------No. Name
---------------------1

DISABLE

2

ENABLE

Options for EnableComAlm
--------------------------No. Name
---------------------1

DISABLE

2

ENABLE_NC

3

ENABLE_NO

Options for Maint_mode
--------------------------No. Name
---------------------1

OFF

2

ON

Options for Run_Aux_Seq
--------------------------No. Name
---------------------1

OFF

2

ON

********************************************************************************

User-Defined Text Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No. Name

Size Text

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 rpt_header1

50 Company: Daniel Industries

2 rpt_header2

50

********************************************************************************

Calculation Control Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
Description

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Avg Limit Alarm Test

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Mole Percent

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Liquid Volume

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Weight Percent

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Normalize Results

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Gas Density

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Liquid Density

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Relative Density Gas

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Relative Density Lqd

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Compressibility

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Dry Gross Heating BTU

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Sat Gross Heating BTU

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Actual Gross Heating BTU

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Dry Net Heating BTU

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Sat Net Heating BTU

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Actual Net Heating BTU

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Wobbe Index

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Reid Vapor Pressure

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Gallons/1000 SCF C2+

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Gallons/1000 SCF C3+

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Gallons/1000 SCF C4+

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Gallons/1000 SCF C5+

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Gallons/1000 SCF C6+

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

User Flag 1

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Average Molecular Wgt

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

HeatVal Sup Dry MJ/m3

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

HeatVal Sup Sat MJ/m3

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

HeatVal Sup Act MJ/m3

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

HeatVal Inf Dry MJ/m3

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

HeatVal Inf Sat MJ/m3

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

HeatVal Inf Act MJ/m3

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

HeatVal Sup Dry MJ/kg

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

HeatVal Inf Dry MJ/kg

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

HeatVal Sup Dry Kc/m3

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

HeatVal Sup Sat Kc/m3

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

HeatVal Sup Act Kc/m3

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

HeatVal Inf Dry Kc/m3

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

HeatVal Inf Sat Kc/m3

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

HeatVal Inf Act Kc/m3

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

HeatVal Sup Dry Kc/kg

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

HeatVal Inf Dry Kc/kg

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Metric Rel Dens Lqd

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Metric Gas Density

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Metric Lqd Density

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

********************************************************************************
Calculation Average Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
Resets
Time: 00:00
Weekday: Sun
Day of Month: 1
No. Variable Name

S

C

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Hourly
No entries found.
24 Hour
No entries found.
Weekly
No entries found.
Monthly
No entries found.
Variable
No entries found.
********************************************************************************

Calculation User-Defined Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No.

Variable

S

C

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 label 1
Avg. Molecular Weight

1

1

+ Gallons/1000 SCF

1

1

* Gas Density lbm/1000 ft3

1

1

/ Heating Value Gross BTU Dry

1

1

- Mole Percent

1

1

Gallons/1000 SCF

1

2

+ Gallons/1000 SCF

1

3

+ User Calc Result

1

1

+ Value

1

1

2 label 2

1: 16.2

********************************************************************************
Limit Alarms Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No. Variable

S

C

DO

Type

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------No entries found.
********************************************************************************
Discrete Alarms Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
Alarm
No.

Discrete

Discrete

Input

Alarm Message

Output

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1

0

0

2

0

0

3

0

0

4

0

0

5

0

0

********************************************************************************

Streams Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
Cal Data
No.

Name

Use Det

CD TE Tot Avg Start

Base Condition
Int Auto

PSIA

°F

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 Stream 1

ANL Det1

1

1

5

3 07:00

24 Y

Y

14.73

60

2 Stream 2

ANL Det1

1

1

5

3 07:00

24 Y

Y

14.73

60

3 Stream 3

ANL Det1

1

1

5

3 07:00

24 Y

Y

14.73

60

4 Stream 4

ANL Det1

1

1

5

3 07:00

24 Y

Y

14.73

60

5 Stream 5

ANL Det1

1

1

5

3 07:00

24 Y

Y

14.73

60

6 Stream 6

ANL Det1

1

1

5

3 07:00

24 Y

Y

14.73

60

7 Stream 7

ANL Det1

1

1

5

3 07:00

24 Y

Y

14.73

60

8 Stream 8

ANL Det1

1

1

5

3 07:00

24 Y

Y

14.73

60

No calibration streams defined
Optional Base Pressures
No. Name

Op Base Pres 1

Op Base Pres 2

Op Base Pres 3

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1

Stream 1

0

0

0

2

Stream 2

0

0

0

3

Stream 3

0

0

0

4

Stream 4

0

0

0

5

Stream 5

0

0

0

6

Stream 6

0

0

0

7

Stream 7

0

0

0

8

Stream 8

0

0

0

********************************************************************************

Analog Input Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No. Label

Zero Scale

Full Scale F/V

Fixed Value

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1

AI 1

0

100 VAR

0

********************************************************************************

Analog Output Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No.

Variable

S

C

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1

No.

Mole Percent

Zero Scale

1

Full Scale F/V

1

Fixed Value

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1

0

100

VAR

0

Bargraph
No. Variable

Streams

Component

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1

Mole Percent

1

1

2

Not Used

1

3

Not Used

1

4

Not Used

1

5

Not Used

1

6

Not Used

1

7

Not Used

1

8

Not Used

1

9

Not Used

1

10

Not Used

1

11

Not Used

1

12

Not Used

1

13

Not Used

1

14

Not Used

1

15

Not Used

1

16

Not Used

1

Scaling Values
No.

Zero Scale

Full Scale

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1

0

100

2

0

100

3

0

100

4

0

100

5

0

100

6

0

100

7

0

100

8

0

100

9

0

100

10

0

100

11

0

0

12

0

0

13

0

0

14

0

0

15

0

0

16

0

0

********************************************************************************

Discrete Input Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No.

Label

Switch

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1

DI 1

AUTO

2

DI 2

AUTO

3

DI 3

AUTO

4

DI 4

AUTO

5

AUX_STRM_SEQ

AUTO

********************************************************************************

Discrete Output Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No.

Label

Switch

On-Time

Off-Time

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1

DO 1

AUTO

00:00

00:00

2

DO 2

AUTO

00:00

00:00

3

DO 3

AUTO

00:00

00:00

4

Common_Alarm

AUTO

00:00

00:00

5

Calib-Maint

AUTO

00:00

00:00

********************************************************************************

Valve Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No.

Label

Switch

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1

Valve 1

AUTO

2

Valve 2

AUTO

3

Valve 3

AUTO

4

Valve 4

AUTO

5

Valve 5

AUTO

********************************************************************************

Serial Port Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
Baud Data Stop
Port Usage

Hand-

Rate Bits Bits Parity shaking

RTS
ON

RTS
OFF Protocol

Comm Read
ID

Write

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1

USER_MODBUS

9600

8

1

None

None

0

0 RTU

0

RW

2

SIM_2251

9600

8

1

None

None

0

0 RTU

3

RW

3

PC

9600

8

1

None

None

0

0 RTU

0

RW

4

PC

9600

8

1

None

None

0

0 RTU

0

RW

********************************************************************************

Global Data Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No.

Variable name

Indices
S

Type

No. of Chars.

C

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1

cal_run_num

1

1

Integer

2

sim_abtu

1

1

Float

3

sim_alarm

16

1

Integer

4

sim_anlytime

1

1

Integer

5

sim_cal

1

1

Integer

6

sim_cal_abtu

1

1

Float

7

sim_cal_comp

1

1

Float

8

sim_cal_dbtu

1

1

Float

9

sim_cal_gpm

1

1

Float

10

sim_cal_rden

1

1

Float

11

sim_cal_sbtu

1

1

Float

12

sim_cal_unno

1

1

Float

13

sim_cal_wobb

1

1

Float

14

sim_calcycle

1

1

Long

15

sim_char

1

1

Char

16

sim_compno

16

4

Integer

17

sim_compress

1

1

Float

18

sim_cycday

1

1

Integer

19

sim_cychour

1

1

Integer

20

sim_cycmin

1

1

Integer

21

sim_cycmonth

1

1

Integer

22

sim_cyctime

1

1

Long

23

sim_cycyear

1

1

Integer

24

sim_day

1

1

Integer

1

25

sim_dbtu

1

1

Float

26

sim_dummy

4

1

Float

27

sim_gpmwt

16

4

Float

28

sim_hour

1

1

Integer

29

sim_min

1

1

Integer

30

sim_molpct

16

4

Float

31

sim_month

1

1

Integer

32

sim_newdata

1

1

Integer

33

sim_rden_gas

1

1

Float

34

sim_rf

16

4

Float

35

sim_sbtu

1

1

Float

36

sim_smask

1

1

Integer

37

sim_stream

1

1

Integer

38

sim_totgpm

1

1

Float

39

sim_unnormal

1

1

Float

40

sim_wobbe

1

1

Float

41

sim_year

1

1

Integer

********************************************************************************

Streams Data Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No. Structure Name No. of Streams
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------No entries found.
********************************************************************************

Component Data Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No. Structure Name No. of Streams No. of Components
per Stream
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------No entries found.
********************************************************************************

Data Files Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No.

File Name

No. of Records

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1

Event_Log

240

File Name Event_Log
--------------------------No.

Field Name

Type

No. of Chars.

-------------------------------------------------1

date

Float

2

time

Float

3

operator_id

Char

4

event_id

Float

5

ASCII_text

Char

6

prev_value

Float

7

curr_value

Float

4

60

********************************************************************************

Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No.

Name

Page
Width

Page

Left

Length

Margin

Right
Margin

Top
Margin

Bottom
Margin

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1

Analysis

150

55

0

0

0

0

2

Raw Data

80

55

1

0

0

0

3

Calibration

80

55

1

0

0

0

4

Final Calib

80

55

1

0

0

0

5

Hourly Avg

80

55

0

0

0

0

6

24 Hour Avg

80

55

0

0

0

0

7

Weekly Avg

80

55

0

0

0

0

8

Monthly Avg

80

55

0

0

0

0

9

Variable Avg

80

55

0

0

0

0

Field List used in Analysis
--------------------------------Type

Variable SubField Name

Indices

CP Flag

------------------------------------------------------------------------STRING

0

STRING

0

DATE
DATE
STRING
VARIABLE stream_data

0
anly_time

STREAM_NO

1

STRING
VARIABLE stream_data

0
0

cycl_time

STREAM_NO

1

STRING

0
0

VARIABLE stream_data

stream_num

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE strms

name

STREAM_NO

1

0

STRING
VARIABLE stream_data

0
run_mode

STREAM_NO

1

0

STRING

0

TIME VAR stream_data

cycl_strt_tm

STREAM_NO

1

STRING

0
0

VARIABLE anlyzr_name

1

1

STRING

0
0

VARIABLE seqtxt

DET NO

1

0

VARIABLE rpt_header1

1

1

0

VARIABLE rpt_header2

1

1

0

TABLE

2

TVAR

cdt

stdusr

CDT_TBL_NO

1*

0

TVAR

cdt

compnam

CDT_TBL_NO

1*

0

TVAR

analysis

molpct

STREAM_NO

1*

25

TVAR

analysis

wtpct

STREAM_NO

1*

26

TVAR

analysis

liqvolpct

STREAM_NO

1*

27

TVAR

analysis

gpm

STREAM_NO

1*

28

TVAR

analysis

btu_gross

STREAM_NO

1*

29

TVAR

analysis

btu_net

STREAM_NO

1*

30

TVAR

analysis

rel_den_gas

STREAM_NO

1*

31

TVAR

analysis

superior_m3

STREAM_NO

1*

54

TVAR

analysis

inferior_m3

STREAM_NO

1*

55

TVAR

analysis

superior_kg

STREAM_NO

1*

56

TVAR

analysis

inferior_kg

STREAM_NO

1*

57

STRING

0

VARIABLE stream_data

totl_mole

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE stream_data

totl_molwgt

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE stream_data

totl_liqvol

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE stream_data

totl_gpmc2

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE stream_data

totl_btugros

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE stream_data

totl_btu_net

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE stream_data

totl_rd_gas

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE stream_data

totl_sm3_dry

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE stream_data

totl_im3_dry

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE stream_data

totl_skg_dry

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE stream_data

totl_ikg_dry

STREAM_NO

1

0

STRING

0

STRING

32

VARIABLE strms

base_pres

STREAM_NO

1

0

STRING

250

STRING

251

VARIABLE strms

base_temp

STREAM_NO

1

0

STRING

32

STRING

250

STRING

251

STRING

32

VARIABLE stream_data

z_factor

STREAM_NO

1

STRING
VARIABLE strms

0
0

base_pres

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE op_pressures

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE op_pressures

STREAM_NO

2

0

VARIABLE op_pressures

STREAM_NO

3

0

STRING

0

STRING

81

STRING

82

STRING

83

STRING

29

STRING

29

VARIABLE stream_data

btudry_gross

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

13

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

25

0

STRING

43

STRING

39

STRING

39

VARIABLE stream_data

btusat_gross

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

2

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

14

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

26

0

STRING

44

STRING

40

STRING

40

VARIABLE stream_data

btuact_gross

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

3

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

15

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

27

0

STRING

52

STRING

30

STRING

30

VARIABLE stream_data

btu_dry_net

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

4

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

16

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

28

0

STRING

45

STRING

41

STRING

41

VARIABLE stream_data

btu_sat_net

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

5

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

17

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

29

0

STRING

46

STRING

42

STRING

42

VARIABLE stream_data

btu_act_net

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

6

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

18

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

30

0

STRING

53

STRING

47

VARIABLE stream_data
VARIABLE op_pres_calc

totl_gpmc2

STREAM_NO

1

0

STREAM_NO

8

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

20

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

32

0

STRING
VARIABLE stream_data

48
totl_gpmc3

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

9

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

21

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

33

0

STRING
VARIABLE stream_data

49
totl_gpmc4

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

10

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

22

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

34

0

STRING
VARIABLE stream_data

50
totl_gpmc5

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

11

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

23

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

35

0

STRING
VARIABLE stream_data

51
totl_gpmc6

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

12

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

24

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

36

0

STRING
VARIABLE stream_data

59
sup_m3_dry

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

13

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

25

0

STRING

156

STRING

60

VARIABLE stream_data

sup_m3_sat

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

2

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

14

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

26

0

STRING

157

STRING

61

VARIABLE stream_data

sup_m3_act

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

3

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

15

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

28

0

STRING

158

STRING

62

VARIABLE stream_data

inf_m3_dry

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

4

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

16

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

28

0

STRING

159

STRING

63

VARIABLE stream_data

inf_m3_sat

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

5

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

17

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

29

0

STRING

181

STRING

64

VARIABLE stream_data

inf_m3_act

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

6

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

18

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

30

0

STRING

182

STRING

65

VARIABLE stream_data

sup_kg_dry

STREAM_NO

1

0

STRING

182

STRING

66

VARIABLE stream_data

inf_kg_dry

STREAM_NO

1

0

STRING

184

STRING

67

VARIABLE stream_data

sdry_kcal_m3

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

9

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

21

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

33

0

STRING

185

STRING

68

VARIABLE stream_data

ssat_kcal_m3

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

7

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

19

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

31

0

STRING

186

STRING

69

VARIABLE stream_data

sact_kcal_m3

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

8

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

20

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

32

0

STRING

187

STRING

70

VARIABLE stream_data

idry_kcal_m3

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

10

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

22

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

34

0

STRING

188

STRING

71

VARIABLE stream_data

isat_kcal_m3

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

11

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

23

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

35

0

STRING

189

STRING

72

VARIABLE stream_data

iact_kcal_m3

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

12

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

24

0

VARIABLE op_pres_calc

STREAM_NO

36

0

STRING

190

STRING

73

VARIABLE stream_data

sdry_kcal_kg

STREAM_NO

1

0

STRING

191

STRING

74

VARIABLE stream_data

idry_kcal_kg

STREAM_NO

1

0

STRING

192

STRING

31

VARIABLE stream_data

real_rd_gas

STREAM_NO

1

STRING
VARIABLE stream_data

34
real_rd_lqd

STREAM_NO

1

STRING
VARIABLE stream_data

0

0
58

rden_lqd_15

STREAM_NO

1

0

STRING

58

STRING

33

VARIABLE stream_data

totl_unrml

STREAM_NO

1

STRING
VARIABLE stream_data

0
77

avg_molwgt

STREAM_NO

1

0

STRING

35

STRING

35

VARIABLE stream_data

wobbe

STREAM_NO

1

0

STRING

36

STRING

36

VARIABLE stream_data

gas_density

STREAM_NO

1

0

STRING

36

STRING

75

VARIABLE stream_data

gas_dens_m3

STREAM_NO

1

0

STRING

75

STRING

37

VARIABLE stream_data

lqd_density

STREAM_NO

1

0

STRING

37

STRING

76

VARIABLE stream_data

lqd_dens_m3

STREAM_NO

1

0

STRING

76

STRING

38

VARIABLE stream_data

reid_vapor

STREAM_NO

1

STRING

0
38

TABLE

200

TVAR

anlin

TVAR

aincur

label

1*

1

0

1*

1

0

STRING

160

TABLE

160

TVAR

calcs

TVAR

calcval

label

1*

1

0

1*

1

0

* indicates index is incremented.
Field List used in Raw Data
--------------------------------Type

Variable SubField Name

Indices

CP Flag

------------------------------------------------------------------------STRING

0

STRING

0

DATE
DATE
STRING
VARIABLE stream_data

0
anly_time

STREAM_NO

1

STRING
VARIABLE stream_data

0
0

cycl_time

STREAM_NO

1

STRING

0
0

VARIABLE stream_data

stream_num

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE strms

name

STREAM_NO

1

0

STRING
VARIABLE stream_data

0
run_mode

STREAM_NO

1

STRING
TIME VAR stream_data
STRING

0
0

cycl_strt_tm

STREAM_NO

1

0
0

VARIABLE anlyzr_name

1

1

STRING

0
0

VARIABLE seqtxt

DET NO

1

0

VARIABLE rpt_header1

1

1

0

VARIABLE rpt_header2

1

1

0

TABLE

50

TVAR

raw_data

peak_num

STREAM_NO

1*

21

TVAR

raw_data

rt

STREAM_NO

1*

21

TVAR

raw_data

area

STREAM_NO

1*

21

TVAR

raw_data

height

STREAM_NO

1*

21

TVAR

raw_data

detector

STREAM_NO

1*

21

TVAR

raw_data2

method

STREAM_NO

1*

21

TVAR

raw_data3

startint

STREAM_NO

1*

21

TVAR

raw_data3

endint

STREAM_NO

1*

21

TVAR

raw_data3

half_height

STREAM_NO

1*

21

* indicates index is incremented.
Field List used in Calibration
--------------------------------Type

Variable SubField Name

Indices

CP Flag

------------------------------------------------------------------------STRING

0

STRING

0

VARIABLE cal_run_num

1

1

STRING
VARIABLE strms

0
0

nrun

STREAM_NO

1

STRING

0
0

DATE
DATE
STRING
VARIABLE stream_data

0
anly_time

STREAM_NO

1

STRING
VARIABLE stream_data

0
0

cycl_time

STREAM_NO

1

0

STRING

0

VARIABLE stream_data

stream_num

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE strms

name

STREAM_NO

1

0

STRING

0

VARIABLE stream_data

run_mode

STREAM_NO

1

STRING

0
0

TIME VAR stream_data

cycl_strt_tm

STREAM_NO

1

STRING

0
0

VARIABLE anlyzr_name

1

1

STRING

0
0

VARIABLE seqtxt

DET NO

1

0

VARIABLE rpt_header1

1

1

0

VARIABLE rpt_header2

1

1

0

TABLE

2

TVAR

cdt

compnam

CDT_TBL_NO

1*

0

TVAR

cdt

cal_conc

CDT_TBL_NO

1*

0

TVAR

cal_avgs

raw

STREAM_NO

1*

0

TVAR

cal_avgs

rf

STREAM_NO

1*

0

TVAR

cal_avgs

rfdev

STREAM_NO

1*

0

TVAR

cal_avgs

rt

STREAM_NO

1*

0

TVAR

cal_avgs

rtdev

STREAM_NO

1*

0

ALARMS

0

* indicates index is incremented.
Field List used in Final Calib
--------------------------------Type

Variable SubField Name

Indices

CP Flag

------------------------------------------------------------------------STRING

0

STRING

0

DATE
DATE
STRING

0

VARIABLE stream_data

anly_time

STREAM_NO

1

STRING

0
0

VARIABLE stream_data

cycl_time

STREAM_NO

1

STRING

0
0

VARIABLE stream_data

stream_num

STREAM_NO

1

0

VARIABLE strms

name

STREAM_NO

1

0

STRING

0

VARIABLE stream_data

run_mode

STREAM_NO

1

STRING

0
0

TIME VAR stream_data

cycl_strt_tm

STREAM_NO

1

STRING

0
0

VARIABLE anlyzr_name

1

1

STRING

0
0

VARIABLE seqtxt

DET NO

1

0

VARIABLE rpt_header1

1

1

0

VARIABLE rpt_header2

1

1

0

TABLE

2

TVAR

cdt

compnam

CDT_TBL_NO

1*

0

TVAR

cdt

cal_conc

CDT_TBL_NO

1*

0

TVAR

cal_results

oldrf

STREAM_NO

1*

0

TVAR

cal_results

newrf

STREAM_NO

1*

0

TVAR

cal_results

updated

STREAM_NO

1*

0

TVAR

cal_results

rfdev

STREAM_NO

1*

0

TVAR

cal_results

oldrt

STREAM_NO

1*

0

TVAR

cal_results

newrt

STREAM_NO

1*

0

TVAR

cal_results

updated

STREAM_NO

1*

0

TVAR

cal_results

rtdev

STREAM_NO

1*

0

ALARMS

0

* indicates index is incremented.
Field List used in Hourly Avg
--------------------------------Type

Variable SubField Name

Indices

CP Flag

------------------------------------------------------------------------STRING

0

STRING

0

VARIABLE anlyzr_name

1

1

0

VARIABLE rpt_header1

1

1

0

VARIABLE rpt_header2

1

1

0

VARIABLE avg_data

number

1*

1

0

VARIABLE avg_data

label

1*

1

0

STRING
VARIABLE avg_data

0
s

1*

1

STRING
VARIABLE avg_data

0
129

c

1*

1

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

avg

1*

1

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

minimum

1*

1

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

maximum

1*

1

0

VARIABLE avg_archive2

1*

1

STRING

0
0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

avg

1*

2

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

minimum

1*

2

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

maximum

1*

2

0

1*

2

0

VARIABLE avg_archive2
STRING

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

avg

1*

3

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

minimum

1*

3

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

maximum

1*

3

0

1*

3

0

VARIABLE avg_archive2
* indicates index is incremented.
Field List used in 24 Hour Avg
--------------------------------Type

Variable SubField Name

Indices

CP Flag

------------------------------------------------------------------------STRING

0

STRING

0

VARIABLE anlyzr_name

1

1

0

VARIABLE rpt_header1

1

1

0

VARIABLE rpt_header2

1

1

0

VARIABLE avg_data

number

1*

1

0

VARIABLE avg_data

label

1*

1

0

STRING
VARIABLE avg_data

0
s

1*

1

STRING
VARIABLE avg_data

0
129

c

1*

1

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

avg

1*

1

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

minimum

1*

1

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

maximum

1*

1

0

1*

1

0

VARIABLE avg_archive2
STRING

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

avg

1*

2

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

minimum

1*

2

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

maximum

1*

2

0

1*

2

0

VARIABLE avg_archive2
STRING

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

avg

1*

3

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

minimum

1*

3

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

maximum

1*

3

0

1*

3

0

VARIABLE avg_archive2
* indicates index is incremented.
Field List used in Weekly Avg
---------------------------------

Type

Variable SubField Name

Indices

CP Flag

------------------------------------------------------------------------STRING

0

STRING

0

VARIABLE anlyzr_name

1

1

0

VARIABLE rpt_header1

1

1

0

VARIABLE rpt_header2

1

1

0

VARIABLE avg_data

number

1*

1

0

VARIABLE avg_data

label

1*

1

0

STRING
VARIABLE avg_data
STRING

0
s

1*

1

0
129

VARIABLE avg_data

c

1*

1

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

avg

1*

1

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

minimum

1*

1

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

maximum

1*

1

0

1*

1

0

VARIABLE avg_archive2
STRING

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

avg

1*

2

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

minimum

1*

2

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

maximum

1*

2

0

1*

2

0

VARIABLE avg_archive2
STRING

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

avg

1*

3

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

minimum

1*

3

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

maximum

1*

3

0

1*

3

0

VARIABLE avg_archive2
* indicates index is incremented.
Field List used in Monthly Avg
--------------------------------Type

Variable SubField Name

Indices

CP Flag

------------------------------------------------------------------------STRING

0

STRING

0

VARIABLE anlyzr_name

1

1

0

VARIABLE rpt_header1

1

1

0

VARIABLE rpt_header2

1

1

0

VARIABLE avg_data

number

1*

1

0

VARIABLE avg_data

label

1*

1

0

STRING
VARIABLE avg_data

0
s

1*

1

STRING
VARIABLE avg_data

0
129

c

1*

1

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

avg

1*

1

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

minimum

1*

1

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

maximum

1*

1

0

1*

1

0

VARIABLE avg_archive2
STRING

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

avg

1*

2

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

minimum

1*

2

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

maximum

1*

2

0

1*

2

0

VARIABLE avg_archive2
STRING

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

avg

1*

3

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

minimum

1*

3

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

maximum

1*

3

0

1*

3

0

VARIABLE avg_archive2
* indicates index is incremented.
Field List used in Variable Avg
---------------------------------

Type

Variable SubField Name

Indices

CP Flag

------------------------------------------------------------------------STRING

0

STRING

0

VARIABLE anlyzr_name

1

1

0

VARIABLE rpt_header1

1

1

0

VARIABLE rpt_header2

1

1

0

VARIABLE avg_data

number

1*

1

0

VARIABLE avg_data

label

1*

1

0

STRING
VARIABLE avg_data

0
s

1*

1

STRING
VARIABLE avg_data

0
129

c

1*

1

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

STRING

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

avg

1*

1

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

minimum

1*

1

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

maximum

1*

1

0

1*

1

0

VARIABLE avg_archive2
STRING

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

avg

1*

2

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

minimum

1*

2

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

maximum

1*

2

0

1*

2

0

VARIABLE avg_archive2
STRING

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

avg

1*

3

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

minimum

1*

3

0

VARIABLE avg_archive1

maximum

1*

3

0

1*

3

0

VARIABLE avg_archive2
* indicates index is incremented.

********************************************************************************

Communication Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
Slave Name

Slave ID

Slave Type

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------USER_MODBUS

0

PLC Emulation - Low-Hi

SIM_2251

3

Daniel 2500 Emulation

USER_MODBUS
------------Modbus

Variable

Field

Reg.

Name

Name

Indices
S

C

Data

String

Type

Length

Override
Keylock?

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------Boolean(Coils)
0

sysalarm_set

1

1

Application Checksum Failure

No

1

sysalarm_set

2

1

ROM Checksum Failure

No

2

sysalarm_set

3

1

RAM Diagnostics Failure

No

3

sysalarm_set

4

1

A/D Converter Failure

No

4

sysalarm_set

5

1

Detector Oven Failure

No

5

sysalarm_set

6

1

Liquid Sample Valve Heater Failure

No

6

sysalarm_set

7

1

Sample System Oven Failure

No

7

sysalarm_set

8

1

Catalytic Converter Failure

No

8

sysalarm_set

9

1

Heater 5 Failure

No

9

sysalarm_set

10

1

Heater 6 Failure

No

10

sysalarm_set

11

1

Heater 1 Controller Failure

No

11

sysalarm_set

12

1

Heater 2 Controller Failure

No

12

sysalarm_set

13

1

Heater 3 Controller Failure

No

13

sysalarm_set

14

1

Heater 4 Controller Failure

No

14

sysalarm_set

15

1

Heater 5 Controller Failure

No

15

sysalarm_set

16

1

Heater 6 Controller Failure

No

16

sysalarm_set

17

1

FID Flame out

No

17

sysalarm_set

18

1

Warmstart Calibration Failure

No

18

sysalarm_set

19

1

Valve Timing Failure

No

19

sysalarm_set

20

1

Excess Response Factor Deviation

No

20

sysalarm_set

21

1

M200 Invalid Non-Volatile Data

No

21

sysalarm_set

22

1

M200 Invalid A Module Data

No

22

sysalarm_set

23

1

M200 Invalid B Module Data

No

23

sysalarm_set

24

1

M200 Bad Options

No

24

sysalarm_set

25

1

M200 Stack Overflow

No

25

sysalarm_set

26

1

M200 Hardware Shutdown

No

26

sysalarm_set

27

1

M200 Synchronization Failure

No

27

sysalarm_set

28

1

Preamp Input 1 Out of Range - DET1

No

28

sysalarm_set

29

1

Preamp Input 2 Out of Range - DET1

No

29

sysalarm_set

30

1

Preamp Input 3 Out of Range - DET1

No

30

sysalarm_set

31

1

Preamp Input 4 Out of Range - DET1

No

31

sysalarm_set

32

1

Preamp Failure - DET1

No

32

sysalarm_set

33

1

Analog Output 1 HIGH

No

33

sysalarm_set

34

1

Analog Output 2 HIGH

No

34

sysalarm_set

35

1

Analog Output 3 HIGH

No

35

sysalarm_set

36

1

Analog Output 4 HIGH

No

36

sysalarm_set

37

1

Analog Output 5 HIGH

No

37

sysalarm_set

38

1

Analog Output 6 HIGH

No

38

sysalarm_set

39

1

Analog Output 7 HIGH

No

39

sysalarm_set

40

1

Analog Output 8 HIGH

No

40

sysalarm_set

41

1

Analog Output 9 HIGH

No

41

sysalarm_set

42

1

Analog Output 10 HIGH

No

42

sysalarm_set

43

1

Analog Output 11 HIGH

No

43

sysalarm_set

44

1

Analog Output 12 HIGH

No

44

sysalarm_set

45

1

Analog Output 13 HIGH

No

45

sysalarm_set

46

1

Analog Output 14 HIGH

No

46

sysalarm_set

47

1

Analog Output 15 HIGH

No

47

sysalarm_set

48

1

Analog Output 16 HIGH

No

48

sysalarm_set

49

1

Analog Output 1 LOW

No

49

sysalarm_set

50

1

Analog Output 2 LOW

No

50

sysalarm_set

51

1

Analog Output 3 LOW

No

51

sysalarm_set

52

1

Analog Output 4 LOW

No

52

sysalarm_set

53

1

Analog Output 5 LOW

No

53

sysalarm_set

54

1

Analog Output 6 LOW

No

54

sysalarm_set

55

1

Analog Output 7 LOW

No

55

sysalarm_set

56

1

Analog Output 8 LOW

No

56

sysalarm_set

57

1

Analog Output 9 LOW

No

57

sysalarm_set

58

1

Analog Output 10 LOW

No

58

sysalarm_set

59

1

Analog Output 11 LOW

No

59

sysalarm_set

60

1

Analog Output 12 LOW

No

60

sysalarm_set

61

1

Analog Output 13 LOW

No

61

sysalarm_set

62

1

Analog Output 14 LOW

No

62

sysalarm_set

63

1

Analog Output 15 LOW

No

63

sysalarm_set

64

1

Analog Output 16 LOW

No

64

sysalarm_set

65

1

Analyzer Failure

No

65

sysalarm_set

66

1

Power Failure

No

66

sysalarm_set

67

sysalarm_set

68

1

CPU Battery Low

No

68

sysalarm_set

69

1

GC Idle

No

69

sysalarm_set

70

1

Real-Time Clock Failure

No

70

sysalarm_set

71

1

Analog Input 1 HIGH

No

71

sysalarm_set

72

1

Analog Input 2 HIGH

No

72

sysalarm_set

73

1

Analog Input 3 HIGH

No

73

sysalarm_set

74

1

Analog Input 4 HIGH

No

74

sysalarm_set

75

1

Analog Input 1 LOW

No

75

sysalarm_set

76

1

Analog Input 2 LOW

No

76

sysalarm_set

77

1

Analog Input 3 LOW

No

77

sysalarm_set

78

1

Analog Input 4 LOW

No

78

sysalarm_set

79

1

Preamp Input 1 Out of Range - DET2

No

79

sysalarm_set

80

1

Preamp Input 2 Out of Range - DET2

No

80

sysalarm_set

81

1

Preamp Input 3 Out of Range - DET2

No

81

sysalarm_set

82

1

Preamp Input 4 Out of Range - DET2

No

82

sysalarm_set

83

1

Preamp Failure - DET2

No

83

sysalarm_set

84

1

NA

No

67

1

Fused Peak Overflow - Noisy Baseline

No

84

sysalarm_set

85

1

NA

No

85

lmtalarm_set

1

1

No

86

lmtalarm_set

2

1

No

87

lmtalarm_set

3

1

No

88

lmtalarm_set

4

1

No

89

lmtalarm_set

5

1

No

90

lmtalarm_set

6

1

No

91

lmtalarm_set

7

1

No

92

lmtalarm_set

8

1

No

93

lmtalarm_set

9

1

No

94

lmtalarm_set

10

1

No

95

lmtalarm_set

11

1

No

96

lmtalarm_set

12

1

No

97

lmtalarm_set

13

1

No

98

lmtalarm_set

14

1

No

99

lmtalarm_set

15

1

No

100

lmtalarm_set

16

1

No

101

lmtalarm_set

17

1

No

102

lmtalarm_set

18

1

No

103

lmtalarm_set

19

1

No

104

lmtalarm_set

20

1

No

105

stream_data

stream_togg

1

1

Stream 1

No

106

stream_data

stream_togg

2

1

Stream 2

No

107

stream_data

stream_togg

3

1

Stream 3

No

108

stream_data

stream_togg

4

1

Stream 4

No

109

stream_data

stream_togg

5

1

Stream 5

No

110

stream_data

stream_togg

6

1

Stream 6

No

111

stream_data

stream_togg

7

1

Stream 7

No

112

stream_data

stream_togg

8

1

Stream 8

No

113

doutcur

1

1

No

114

doutcur

2

1

No

115

doutcur

3

1

No

116

doutcur

4

1

No

117

doutcur

5

1

No

Numeric(Registers)
0

stream_data

avg_molwgt

1

1

Char

4

Stream 1

No

2

analysis

molpct

1

1

Char

4

C6+ 47/35/17

0 - 1

No

3

analysis

molpct

1

2 Integer

PROPANE

0 - 1

No

4

analysis

molpct

1

3 Integer

i-BUTANE

0 - 1

No

5

analysis

molpct

1

4 Integer

n-BUTANE

0 - 1

No

6

analysis

molpct

1

5

Float

NEOPENTANE

No

8

analysis

molpct

1

6

Float

i-PENTANE

No

10

analysis

molpct

1

7

Float

n-PENTANE

No

12

analysis

molpct

1

8

Float

NITROGEN

No

14

analysis

molpct

1

9

Float

METHANE

No

16

analysis

molpct

2

9

Float

METHANE

No

18

analysis

molpct

3

9

Float

METHANE

No

20

analysis

molpct

4

9

Float

METHANE

No

22

analysis

molpct

5

9

Float

METHANE

No

24

analysis

molpct

5

10

Float

CARBON DIOXIDE

No

26

analysis

molpct

5

11

Float

ETHANE

No

28

analysis

molpct

6

11

Float

ETHANE

No

30

analysis

molpct

7

11

Float

ETHANE

No

32

analysis

molpct

8

11

Float

ETHANE

No

SIM_2251
------------Modbus

Variable

Reg.

Name

Field
Name

Indices

Override

S

Keylock?

C

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Boolean(Coils)
16-Bit Integer
3001

sim_compno

1

1

No

3002

sim_compno

2

1

No

3003

sim_compno

3

1

No

3004

sim_compno

4

1

No

3005

sim_compno

5

1

No

3006

sim_compno

6

1

No

3007

sim_compno

7

1

No

3008

sim_compno

8

1

No

3009

sim_compno

9

1

No

3010

sim_compno

10

1

No

3011

sim_compno

11

1

No

3012

sim_compno

12

1

No

3013

sim_compno

13

1

No

3014

sim_compno

14

1

No

3015

sim_compno

15

1

No

3016

sim_compno

16

1

No

3017

sim_compno

1

1

No

3018

sim_compno

2

1

No

3019

sim_compno

3

1

No

3020

sim_compno

4

1

No

3021

sim_compno

5

1

No

3022

sim_compno

6

1

No

3023

sim_compno

7

1

No

3024

sim_compno

8

1

No

3025

sim_compno

9

1

No

3026

sim_compno

10

1

No

3027

sim_compno

11

1

No

3028

sim_compno

12

1

No

3029

sim_compno

13

1

No

3030

sim_compno

14

1

No

3031

sim_compno

15

1

No

3032

sim_compno

16

1

No

3033

sim_anlytime

1

1

No

3034

sim_stream

1

1

No

3035

sim_smask

1

1

No

3036

sim_month

1

1

No

3037

sim_day

1

1

No

3038

sim_year

1

1

No

3039

sim_hour

1

1

No

3040

sim_min

1

1

No

3041

sim_cycmonth

1

1

No

3042

sim_cycday

1

1

No

3043

sim_cycyear

1

1

No

3044

sim_cychour

1

1

No

3045

sim_cycmin

1

1

No

3046

sim_alarm

1

1

No

3047

sim_alarm

2

1

No

3048

sim_alarm

3

1

No

3049

sim_alarm

4

1

No

3050

sim_alarm

5

1

No

3051

sim_alarm

6

1

No

3052

sim_alarm

7

1

No

3053

sim_alarm

8

1

No

3054

sim_alarm

9

1

No

3055

sim_alarm

10

1

No

3056

sim_alarm

11

1

No

3057

sim_alarm

12

1

No

3058

sim_newdata

1

1

No

3059

sim_cal

1

1

No

32-Bit Integer
5001

sim_cyctime

1

1

No

5002

sim_calcycle

1

1

No

Floating-Point
7001

sim_molpct

1

1

No

7002

sim_molpct

2

1

No

7003

sim_molpct

3

1

No

7004

sim_molpct

4

1

No

7005

sim_molpct

5

1

No

7006

sim_molpct

6

1

No

7007

sim_molpct

7

1

No

7008

sim_molpct

8

1

No

7009

sim_molpct

9

1

No

7010

sim_molpct

10

1

No

7011

sim_molpct

11

1

No

7012

sim_molpct

12

1

No

7013

sim_molpct

13

1

No

7014

sim_molpct

14

1

No

7015

sim_molpct

15

1

No

7016

sim_molpct

16

1

No

7017

sim_gpmwt

1

1

No

7018

sim_gpmwt

2

1

No

7019

sim_gpmwt

3

1

No

7020

sim_gpmwt

4

1

No

7021

sim_gpmwt

5

1

No

7022

sim_gpmwt

6

1

No

7023

sim_gpmwt

7

1

No

7024

sim_gpmwt

8

1

No

7025

sim_gpmwt

9

1

No

7026

sim_gpmwt

10

1

No

7027

sim_gpmwt

11

1

No

7028

sim_gpmwt

12

1

No

7029

sim_gpmwt

13

1

No

7030

sim_gpmwt

14

1

No

7031

sim_gpmwt

15

1

No

7032

sim_gpmwt

16

1

No

7033

sim_dbtu

1

1

No

7034

sim_sbtu

1

1

No

7035

sim_rden_gas

1

1

No

7036

sim_compress

1

1

No

7037

sim_wobbe

1

1

No

7038

sim_unnormal

1

1

No

7039

sim_totgpm

1

1

No

7040

calcval

1

1

label 1

No

7041

calcval

2

1

label 2

No

7042

calcval

3

1

No

7043

calcval

4

1

No

7044

calcval

5

1

No

7045

sim_dummy

1

1

No

7046

sim_dummy

1

1

No

7047

sim_dummy

1

1

No

7048

sim_dummy

1

1

No

7049

sim_dummy

1

1

No

7050

sim_dummy

1

1

No

7051

sim_dummy

1

1

No

7052

sim_dummy

1

1

No

7053

sim_dummy

1

1

No

7054

sim_abtu

1

1

No

7055

avgs

avg

1

1

Not Used

No

7056

avgs

avg

2

1

Not Used

No

7057

avgs

avg

3

1

Not Used

No

7058

avgs

avg

4

1

Not Used

No

7059

avgs

avg

5

1

Not Used

No

7060

avgs

avg

6

1

Not Used

No

7061

avgs

avg

7

1

Not Used

No

7062

avgs

avg

8

1

Not Used

No

7063

avgs

avg

9

1

Not Used

No

7064

avgs

avg

10

1

Not Used

No

7065

avgs

avg

11

1

Not Used

No

7066

avgs

avg

12

1

Not Used

No

7067

avgs

avg

13

1

Not Used

No

7068

avgs

avg

14

1

Not Used

No

7069

avgs

avg

15

1

Not Used

No

7070

avg_archive1 avg

1

1

Not Used

No

7071

avg_archive1 avg

2

1

Not Used

No

7072

avg_archive1 avg

3

1

Not Used

No

7073

avg_archive1 avg

4

1

Not Used

No

7074

avg_archive1 avg

5

1

Not Used

No

7075

avg_archive1 avg

6

1

Not Used

No

7076

avg_archive1 avg

7

1

Not Used

No

7077

avg_archive1 avg

8

1

Not Used

No

7078

avg_archive1 avg

9

1

Not Used

No

7079

avg_archive1 avg

10

1

Not Used

No

7080

avg_archive1 avg

11

1

Not Used

No

7081

avg_archive1 avg

12

1

Not Used

No

7082

avg_archive1 avg

13

1

Not Used

No

7083

avg_archive1 avg

14

1

Not Used

No

7084

avg_archive1 avg

15

1

Not Used

No

7085

aincur

1

1

AI 1

No

7086

aincur

2

1

No

7087

sim_cal_abtu

1

1

No

7088

sim_cal_dbtu

1

1

No

7089

sim_cal_sbtu

1

1

No

7090

sim_cal_wobb

1

1

No

7091

sim_cal_rden

1

1

No

7092

sim_cal_comp

1

1

No

7093

sim_cal_gpm

1

1

No

7094

sim_cal_unno

1

1

No

7095

sim_rf

1

1

No

7096

sim_rf

2

1

No

7097

sim_rf

3

1

No

7098

sim_rf

4

1

No

7099

sim_rf

5

1

No

7100

sim_rf

6

1

No

7101

sim_rf

7

1

No

7102

sim_rf

8

1

No

7103

sim_rf

9

1

No

7104

sim_rf

10

1

No

7105

sim_rf

11

1

No

7106

sim_rf

12

1

No

7107

sim_rf

13

1

No

7108

sim_rf

14

1

No

7109

sim_rf

15

1

No

7110

sim_rf

16

1

No

7111

sim_rf

1

1

No

7112

sim_rf

2

1

No

7113

sim_rf

3

1

No

7114

sim_rf

4

1

No

7115

sim_rf

5

1

No

7116

sim_rf

6

1

No

7117

sim_rf

7

1

No

7118

sim_rf

8

1

No

7119

sim_rf

9

1

No

7120

sim_rf

10

1

No

7121

sim_rf

11

1

No

7122

sim_rf

12

1

No

7123

sim_rf

13

1

No

7124

sim_rf

14

1

No

7125

sim_rf

15

1

No

7126

sim_rf

16

1

No

7127

avgs

avg

1

1

Not Used

No

7128

avgs

avg

2

1

Not Used

No

7129

avgs

avg

3

1

Not Used

No

7130

avgs

avg

4

1

Not Used

No

7131

avgs

avg

5

1

Not Used

No

7132

avgs

avg

6

1

Not Used

No

7133

avgs

avg

7

1

Not Used

No

7134

avgs

avg

8

1

Not Used

No

7135

avgs

avg

9

1

Not Used

No

7136

avgs

avg

10

1

Not Used

No

7137

avgs

avg

11

1

Not Used

No

7138

avgs

avg

12

1

Not Used

No

7139

avgs

avg

13

1

Not Used

No

7140

avgs

avg

14

1

Not Used

No

7141

avgs

avg

15

1

Not Used

No

7142

avgs

avg

16

1

Not Used

No

7143

avgs

avg

17

1

Not Used

No

7144

avgs

avg

18

1

Not Used

No

7145

avgs

avg

19

1

Not Used

No

7146

avgs

avg

20

1

Not Used

No

7147

avgs

avg

21

1

Not Used

No

7148

avgs

avg

22

1

Not Used

No

7149

avgs

avg

23

1

Not Used

No

7150

avgs

avg

24

1

Not Used

No

7151

avgs

avg

25

1

Not Used

No

7152

avgs

avg

26

1

Not Used

No

7153

avgs

avg

27

1

Not Used

No

7154

avgs

avg

28

1

Not Used

No

7155

avgs

avg

29

1

Not Used

No

7156

avgs

avg

30

1

Not Used

No

7157

avgs

avg

31

1

Not Used

No

7158

avgs

avg

32

1

Not Used

No

7159

avgs

avg

33

1

Not Used

No

7160

avgs

avg

34

1

Not Used

No

7161

avgs

avg

35

1

Not Used

No

7162

avgs

avg

36

1

Not Used

No

7163

avgs

maximum

1

1

Not Used

No

7164

avgs

maximum

2

1

Not Used

No

7165

avgs

maximum

3

1

Not Used

No

7166

avgs

maximum

4

1

Not Used

No

7167

avgs

maximum

5

1

Not Used

No

7168

avgs

maximum

6

1

Not Used

No

7169

avgs

maximum

7

1

Not Used

No

7170

avgs

maximum

8

1

Not Used

No

7171

avgs

maximum

9

1

Not Used

No

7172

avgs

maximum

10

1

Not Used

No

7173

avgs

maximum

11

1

Not Used

No

7174

avgs

maximum

12

1

Not Used

No

7175

avgs

maximum

13

1

Not Used

No

7176

avgs

maximum

14

1

Not Used

No

7177

avgs

maximum

15

1

Not Used

No

7178

avgs

maximum

16

1

Not Used

No

7179

avgs

maximum

17

1

Not Used

No

7180

avgs

maximum

18

1

Not Used

No

7181

avgs

maximum

19

1

Not Used

No

7182

avgs

maximum

20

1

Not Used

No

7183

avgs

maximum

21

1

Not Used

No

7184

avgs

maximum

22

1

Not Used

No

7185

avgs

maximum

23

1

Not Used

No

7186

avgs

maximum

24

1

Not Used

No

7187

avgs

maximum

25

1

Not Used

No

7188

avgs

maximum

26

1

Not Used

No

7189

avgs

maximum

27

1

Not Used

No

7190

avgs

maximum

28

1

Not Used

No

7191

avgs

maximum

29

1

Not Used

No

7192

avgs

maximum

30

1

Not Used

No

7193

avgs

maximum

31

1

Not Used

No

7194

avgs

maximum

32

1

Not Used

No

7195

avgs

maximum

33

1

Not Used

No

7196

avgs

maximum

34

1

Not Used

No

7197

avgs

maximum

35

1

Not Used

No

7198

avgs

maximum

36

1

Not Used

No

7199

avgs

minimum

1

1

Not Used

No

7200

avgs

minimum

2

1

Not Used

No

7201

avgs

minimum

3

1

Not Used

No

7202

avgs

minimum

4

1

Not Used

No

7203

avgs

minimum

5

1

Not Used

No

7204

avgs

minimum

6

1

Not Used

No

7205

avgs

minimum

7

1

Not Used

No

7206

avgs

minimum

8

1

Not Used

No

7207

avgs

minimum

9

1

Not Used

No

7208

avgs

minimum

10

1

Not Used

No

7209

avgs

minimum

11

1

Not Used

No

7210

avgs

minimum

12

1

Not Used

No

7211

avgs

minimum

13

1

Not Used

No

7212

avgs

minimum

14

1

Not Used

No

7213

avgs

minimum

15

1

Not Used

No

7214

avgs

minimum

16

1

Not Used

No

7215

avgs

minimum

17

1

Not Used

No

7216

avgs

minimum

18

1

Not Used

No

7217

avgs

minimum

19

1

Not Used

No

7218

avgs

minimum

20

1

Not Used

No

7219

avgs

minimum

21

1

Not Used

No

7220

avgs

minimum

22

1

Not Used

No

7221

avgs

minimum

23

1

Not Used

No

7222

avgs

minimum

24

1

Not Used

No

7223

avgs

minimum

25

1

Not Used

No

7224

avgs

minimum

26

1

Not Used

No

7225

avgs

minimum

27

1

Not Used

No

7226

avgs

minimum

28

1

Not Used

No

7227

avgs

minimum

29

1

Not Used

No

7228

avgs

minimum

30

1

Not Used

No

7229

avgs

minimum

31

1

Not Used

No

7230

avgs

minimum

32

1

Not Used

No

7231

avgs

minimum

33

1

Not Used

No

7232

avgs

minimum

34

1

Not Used

No

7233

avgs

minimum

35

1

Not Used

No

7234

avgs

minimum

36

1

Not Used

No

7235

avg_archive1 avg

1

1

Not Used

No

7236

avg_archive1 avg

2

1

Not Used

No

7237

avg_archive1 avg

3

1

Not Used

No

7238

avg_archive1 avg

4

1

Not Used

No

7239

avg_archive1 avg

5

1

Not Used

No

7240

avg_archive1 avg

6

1

Not Used

No

7241

avg_archive1 avg

7

1

Not Used

No

7242

avg_archive1 avg

8

1

Not Used

No

7243

avg_archive1 avg

9

1

Not Used

No

7244

avg_archive1 avg

10

1

Not Used

No

7245

avg_archive1 avg

11

1

Not Used

No

7246

avg_archive1 avg

12

1

Not Used

No

7247

avg_archive1 avg

13

1

Not Used

No

7248

avg_archive1 avg

14

1

Not Used

No

7249

avg_archive1 avg

15

1

Not Used

No

7250

avg_archive1 avg

16

1

Not Used

No

7251

avg_archive1 avg

17

1

Not Used

No

7252

avg_archive1 avg

18

1

Not Used

No

7253

avg_archive1 avg

19

1

Not Used

No

7254

avg_archive1 avg

20

1

Not Used

No

7255

avg_archive1 avg

21

1

Not Used

No

7256

avg_archive1 avg

22

1

Not Used

No

7257

avg_archive1 avg

23

1

Not Used

No

7258

avg_archive1 avg

24

1

Not Used

No

7259

avg_archive1 avg

25

1

Not Used

No

7260

avg_archive1 avg

26

1

Not Used

No

7261

avg_archive1 avg

27

1

Not Used

No

7262

avg_archive1 avg

28

1

Not Used

No

7263

avg_archive1 avg

29

1

Not Used

No

7264

avg_archive1 avg

30

1

Not Used

No

7265

avg_archive1 avg

31

1

Not Used

No

7266

avg_archive1 avg

32

1

Not Used

No

7267

avg_archive1 avg

33

1

Not Used

No

7268

avg_archive1 avg

34

1

Not Used

No

7269

avg_archive1 avg

35

1

Not Used

No

7270

avg_archive1 avg

36

1

Not Used

No

7271

avg_archive1 maximum

1

1

Not Used

No

7272

avg_archive1 maximum

2

1

Not Used

No

7273

avg_archive1 maximum

3

1

Not Used

No

7274

avg_archive1 maximum

4

1

Not Used

No

7275

avg_archive1 maximum

5

1

Not Used

No

7276

avg_archive1 maximum

6

1

Not Used

No

7277

avg_archive1 maximum

7

1

Not Used

No

7278

avg_archive1 maximum

8

1

Not Used

No

7279

avg_archive1 maximum

9

1

Not Used

No

7280

avg_archive1 maximum

10

1

Not Used

No

7281

avg_archive1 maximum

11

1

Not Used

No

7282

avg_archive1 maximum

12

1

Not Used

No

7283

avg_archive1 maximum

13

1

Not Used

No

7284

avg_archive1 maximum

14

1

Not Used

No

7285

avg_archive1 maximum

15

1

Not Used

No

7286

avg_archive1 maximum

16

1

Not Used

No

7287

avg_archive1 maximum

17

1

Not Used

No

7288

avg_archive1 maximum

18

1

Not Used

No

7289

avg_archive1 maximum

19

1

Not Used

No

7290

avg_archive1 maximum

20

1

Not Used

No

7291

avg_archive1 maximum

21

1

Not Used

No

7292

avg_archive1 maximum

22

1

Not Used

No

7293

avg_archive1 maximum

23

1

Not Used

No

7294

avg_archive1 maximum

24

1

Not Used

No

7295

avg_archive1 maximum

25

1

Not Used

No

7296

avg_archive1 maximum

26

1

Not Used

No

7297

avg_archive1 maximum

27

1

Not Used

No

7298

avg_archive1 maximum

28

1

Not Used

No

7299

avg_archive1 maximum

29

1

Not Used

No

7300

avg_archive1 maximum

30

1

Not Used

No

7301

avg_archive1 maximum

31

1

Not Used

No

7302

avg_archive1 maximum

32

1

Not Used

No

7303

avg_archive1 maximum

33

1

Not Used

No

7304

avg_archive1 maximum

34

1

Not Used

No

7305

avg_archive1 maximum

35

1

Not Used

No

7306

avg_archive1 maximum

36

1

Not Used

No

7307

avg_archive1 minimum

1

1

Not Used

No

7308

avg_archive1 minimum

2

1

Not Used

No

7309

avg_archive1 minimum

3

1

Not Used

No

7310

avg_archive1 minimum

4

1

Not Used

No

7311

avg_archive1 minimum

5

1

Not Used

No

7312

avg_archive1 minimum

6

1

Not Used

No

7313

avg_archive1 minimum

7

1

Not Used

No

7314

avg_archive1 minimum

8

1

Not Used

No

7315

avg_archive1 minimum

9

1

Not Used

No

7316

avg_archive1 minimum

10

1

Not Used

No

7317

avg_archive1 minimum

11

1

Not Used

No

7318

avg_archive1 minimum

12

1

Not Used

No

7319

avg_archive1 minimum

13

1

Not Used

No

7320

avg_archive1 minimum

14

1

Not Used

No

7321

avg_archive1 minimum

15

1

Not Used

No

7322

avg_archive1 minimum

16

1

Not Used

No

7323

avg_archive1 minimum

17

1

Not Used

No

7324

avg_archive1 minimum

18

1

Not Used

No

7325

avg_archive1 minimum

19

1

Not Used

No

7326

avg_archive1 minimum

20

1

Not Used

No

7327

avg_archive1 minimum

21

1

Not Used

No

7328

avg_archive1 minimum

22

1

Not Used

No

7329

avg_archive1 minimum

23

1

Not Used

No

7330

avg_archive1 minimum

24

1

Not Used

No

7331

avg_archive1 minimum

25

1

Not Used

No

7332

avg_archive1 minimum

26

1

Not Used

No

7333

avg_archive1 minimum

27

1

Not Used

No

7334

avg_archive1 minimum

28

1

Not Used

No

7335

avg_archive1 minimum

29

1

Not Used

No

7336

avg_archive1 minimum

30

1

Not Used

No

7337

avg_archive1 minimum

31

1

Not Used

No

7338

avg_archive1 minimum

32

1

Not Used

No

7339

avg_archive1 minimum

33

1

Not Used

No

7340

avg_archive1 minimum

34

1

Not Used

No

7341

avg_archive1 minimum

35

1

Not Used

No

7342

avg_archive1 minimum

36

1

Not Used

No

7343

avg_archive1 avg

1

2

Not Used

No

7344

avg_archive1 avg

2

2

Not Used

No

7345

avg_archive1 avg

3

2

Not Used

No

7346

avg_archive1 avg

4

2

Not Used

No

7347

avg_archive1 avg

5

2

Not Used

No

7348

avg_archive1 avg

6

2

Not Used

No

7349

avg_archive1 avg

7

2

Not Used

No

7350

avg_archive1 avg

8

2

Not Used

No

7351

avg_archive1 avg

9

2

Not Used

No

7352

avg_archive1 avg

10

2

Not Used

No

7353

avg_archive1 avg

11

2

Not Used

No

7354

avg_archive1 avg

12

2

Not Used

No

7355

avg_archive1 avg

13

2

Not Used

No

7356

avg_archive1 avg

14

2

Not Used

No

7357

avg_archive1 avg

15

2

Not Used

No

7358

avg_archive1 avg

16

2

Not Used

No

7359

avg_archive1 avg

17

2

Not Used

No

7360

avg_archive1 avg

18

2

Not Used

No

7361

avg_archive1 avg

19

2

Not Used

No

7362

avg_archive1 avg

20

2

Not Used

No

7363

avg_archive1 avg

21

2

Not Used

No

7364

avg_archive1 avg

22

2

Not Used

No

7365

avg_archive1 avg

23

2

Not Used

No

7366

avg_archive1 avg

24

2

Not Used

No

7367

avg_archive1 avg

25

2

Not Used

No

7368

avg_archive1 avg

26

2

Not Used

No

7369

avg_archive1 avg

27

2

Not Used

No

7370

avg_archive1 avg

28

2

Not Used

No

7371

avg_archive1 avg

29

2

Not Used

No

7372

avg_archive1 avg

30

2

Not Used

No

7373

avg_archive1 avg

31

2

Not Used

No

7374

avg_archive1 avg

32

2

Not Used

No

7375

avg_archive1 avg

33

2

Not Used

No

7376

avg_archive1 avg

34

2

Not Used

No

7377

avg_archive1 avg

35

2

Not Used

No

7378

avg_archive1 avg

36

2

Not Used

No

7379

avg_archive1 maximum

1

2

Not Used

No

7380

avg_archive1 maximum

2

2

Not Used

No

7381

avg_archive1 maximum

3

2

Not Used

No

7382

avg_archive1 maximum

4

2

Not Used

No

7383

avg_archive1 maximum

5

2

Not Used

No

7384

avg_archive1 maximum

6

2

Not Used

No

7385

avg_archive1 maximum

7

2

Not Used

No

7386

avg_archive1 maximum

8

2

Not Used

No

7387

avg_archive1 maximum

9

2

Not Used

No

7388

avg_archive1 maximum

10

2

Not Used

No

7389

avg_archive1 maximum

11

2

Not Used

No

7390

avg_archive1 maximum

12

2

Not Used

No

7391

avg_archive1 maximum

13

2

Not Used

No

7392

avg_archive1 maximum

14

2

Not Used

No

7393

avg_archive1 maximum

15

2

Not Used

No

7394

avg_archive1 maximum

16

2

Not Used

No

7395

avg_archive1 maximum

17

2

Not Used

No

7396

avg_archive1 maximum

18

2

Not Used

No

7397

avg_archive1 maximum

19

2

Not Used

No

7398

avg_archive1 maximum

20

2

Not Used

No

7399

avg_archive1 maximum

21

2

Not Used

No

7400

avg_archive1 maximum

22

2

Not Used

No

7401

avg_archive1 maximum

23

2

Not Used

No

7402

avg_archive1 maximum

24

2

Not Used

No

7403

avg_archive1 maximum

25

2

Not Used

No

7404

avg_archive1 maximum

26

2

Not Used

No

7405

avg_archive1 maximum

27

2

Not Used

No

7406

avg_archive1 maximum

28

2

Not Used

No

7407

avg_archive1 maximum

29

2

Not Used

No

7408

avg_archive1 maximum

30

2

Not Used

No

7409

avg_archive1 maximum

31

2

Not Used

No

7410

avg_archive1 maximum

32

2

Not Used

No

7411

avg_archive1 maximum

33

2

Not Used

No

7412

avg_archive1 maximum

34

2

Not Used

No

7413

avg_archive1 maximum

35

2

Not Used

No

7414

avg_archive1 maximum

36

2

Not Used

No

7415

avg_archive1 minimum

1

2

Not Used

No

7416

avg_archive1 minimum

2

2

Not Used

No

7417

avg_archive1 minimum

3

2

Not Used

No

7418

avg_archive1 minimum

4

2

Not Used

No

7419

avg_archive1 minimum

5

2

Not Used

No

7420

avg_archive1 minimum

6

2

Not Used

No

7421

avg_archive1 minimum

7

2

Not Used

No

7422

avg_archive1 minimum

8

2

Not Used

No

7423

avg_archive1 minimum

9

2

Not Used

No

7424

avg_archive1 minimum

10

2

Not Used

No

7425

avg_archive1 minimum

11

2

Not Used

No

7426

avg_archive1 minimum

12

2

Not Used

No

7427

avg_archive1 minimum

13

2

Not Used

No

7428

avg_archive1 minimum

14

2

Not Used

No

7429

avg_archive1 minimum

15

2

Not Used

No

7430

avg_archive1 minimum

16

2

Not Used

No

7431

avg_archive1 minimum

17

2

Not Used

No

7432

avg_archive1 minimum

18

2

Not Used

No

7433

avg_archive1 minimum

19

2

Not Used

No

7434

avg_archive1 minimum

20

2

Not Used

No

7435

avg_archive1 minimum

21

2

Not Used

No

7436

avg_archive1 minimum

22

2

Not Used

No

7437

avg_archive1 minimum

23

2

Not Used

No

7438

avg_archive1 minimum

24

2

Not Used

No

7439

avg_archive1 minimum

25

2

Not Used

No

7440

avg_archive1 minimum

26

2

Not Used

No

7441

avg_archive1 minimum

27

2

Not Used

No

7442

avg_archive1 minimum

28

2

Not Used

No

7443

avg_archive1 minimum

29

2

Not Used

No

7444

avg_archive1 minimum

30

2

Not Used

No

7445

avg_archive1 minimum

31

2

Not Used

No

7446

avg_archive1 minimum

32

2

Not Used

No

7447

avg_archive1 minimum

33

2

Not Used

No

7448

avg_archive1 minimum

34

2

Not Used

No

7449

avg_archive1 minimum

35

2

Not Used

No

7450

avg_archive1 minimum

36

2

Not Used

No

7451

avg_archive1 avg

1

3

Not Used

No

7452

avg_archive1 avg

2

3

Not Used

No

7453

avg_archive1 avg

3

3

Not Used

No

7454

avg_archive1 avg

4

3

Not Used

No

7455

avg_archive1 avg

5

3

Not Used

No

7456

avg_archive1 avg

6

3

Not Used

No

7457

avg_archive1 avg

7

3

Not Used

No

7458

avg_archive1 avg

8

3

Not Used

No

7459

avg_archive1 avg

9

3

Not Used

No

7460

avg_archive1 avg

10

3

Not Used

No

7461

avg_archive1 avg

11

3

Not Used

No

7462

avg_archive1 avg

12

3

Not Used

No

7463

avg_archive1 avg

13

3

Not Used

No

7464

avg_archive1 avg

14

3

Not Used

No

7465

avg_archive1 avg

15

3

Not Used

No

7466

avg_archive1 avg

16

3

Not Used

No

7467

avg_archive1 avg

17

3

Not Used

No

7468

avg_archive1 avg

18

3

Not Used

No

7469

avg_archive1 avg

19

3

Not Used

No

7470

avg_archive1 avg

20

3

Not Used

No

7471

avg_archive1 avg

21

3

Not Used

No

7472

avg_archive1 avg

22

3

Not Used

No

7473

avg_archive1 avg

23

3

Not Used

No

7474

avg_archive1 avg

24

3

Not Used

No

7475

avg_archive1 avg

25

3

Not Used

No

7476

avg_archive1 avg

26

3

Not Used

No

7477

avg_archive1 avg

27

3

Not Used

No

7478

avg_archive1 avg

28

3

Not Used

No

7479

avg_archive1 avg

29

3

Not Used

No

7480

avg_archive1 avg

30

3

Not Used

No

7481

avg_archive1 avg

31

3

Not Used

No

7482

avg_archive1 avg

32

3

Not Used

No

7483

avg_archive1 avg

33

3

Not Used

No

7484

avg_archive1 avg

34

3

Not Used

No

7485

avg_archive1 avg

35

3

Not Used

No

7486

avg_archive1 avg

36

3

Not Used

No

7487

avg_archive1 maximum

1

3

Not Used

No

7488

avg_archive1 maximum

2

3

Not Used

No

7489

avg_archive1 maximum

3

3

Not Used

No

7490

avg_archive1 maximum

4

3

Not Used

No

7491

avg_archive1 maximum

5

3

Not Used

No

7492

avg_archive1 maximum

6

3

Not Used

No

7493

avg_archive1 maximum

7

3

Not Used

No

7494

avg_archive1 maximum

8

3

Not Used

No

7495

avg_archive1 maximum

9

3

Not Used

No

7496

avg_archive1 maximum

10

3

Not Used

No

7497

avg_archive1 maximum

11

3

Not Used

No

7498

avg_archive1 maximum

12

3

Not Used

No

7499

avg_archive1 maximum

13

3

Not Used

No

7500

avg_archive1 maximum

14

3

Not Used

No

7501

avg_archive1 maximum

15

3

Not Used

No

7502

avg_archive1 maximum

16

3

Not Used

No

7503

avg_archive1 maximum

17

3

Not Used

No

7504

avg_archive1 maximum

18

3

Not Used

No

7505

avg_archive1 maximum

19

3

Not Used

No

7506

avg_archive1 maximum

20

3

Not Used

No

7507

avg_archive1 maximum

21

3

Not Used

No

7508

avg_archive1 maximum

22

3

Not Used

No

7509

avg_archive1 maximum

23

3

Not Used

No

7510

avg_archive1 maximum

24

3

Not Used

No

7511

avg_archive1 maximum

25

3

Not Used

No

7512

avg_archive1 maximum

26

3

Not Used

No

7513

avg_archive1 maximum

27

3

Not Used

No

7514

avg_archive1 maximum

28

3

Not Used

No

7515

avg_archive1 maximum

29

3

Not Used

No

7516

avg_archive1 maximum

30

3

Not Used

No

7517

avg_archive1 maximum

31

3

Not Used

No

7518

avg_archive1 maximum

32

3

Not Used

No

7519

avg_archive1 maximum

33

3

Not Used

No

7520

avg_archive1 maximum

34

3

Not Used

No

7521

avg_archive1 maximum

35

3

Not Used

No

7522

avg_archive1 maximum

36

3

Not Used

No

7523

avg_archive1 minimum

1

3

Not Used

No

7524

avg_archive1 minimum

2

3

Not Used

No

7525

avg_archive1 minimum

3

3

Not Used

No

7526

avg_archive1 minimum

4

3

Not Used

No

7527

avg_archive1 minimum

5

3

Not Used

No

7528

avg_archive1 minimum

6

3

Not Used

No

7529

avg_archive1 minimum

7

3

Not Used

No

7530

avg_archive1 minimum

8

3

Not Used

No

7531

avg_archive1 minimum

9

3

Not Used

No

7532

avg_archive1 minimum

10

3

Not Used

No

7533

avg_archive1 minimum

11

3

Not Used

No

7534

avg_archive1 minimum

12

3

Not Used

No

7535

avg_archive1 minimum

13

3

Not Used

No

7536

avg_archive1 minimum

14

3

Not Used

No

7537

avg_archive1 minimum

15

3

Not Used

No

7538

avg_archive1 minimum

16

3

Not Used

No

7539

avg_archive1 minimum

17

3

Not Used

No

7540

avg_archive1 minimum

18

3

Not Used

No

7541

avg_archive1 minimum

19

3

Not Used

No

7542

avg_archive1 minimum

20

3

Not Used

No

7543

avg_archive1 minimum

21

3

Not Used

No

7544

avg_archive1 minimum

22

3

Not Used

No

7545

avg_archive1 minimum

23

3

Not Used

No

7546

avg_archive1 minimum

24

3

Not Used

No

7547

avg_archive1 minimum

25

3

Not Used

No

7548

avg_archive1 minimum

26

3

Not Used

No

7549

avg_archive1 minimum

27

3

Not Used

No

7550

avg_archive1 minimum

28

3

Not Used

No

7551

avg_archive1 minimum

29

3

Not Used

No

7552

avg_archive1 minimum

30

3

Not Used

No

7553

avg_archive1 minimum

31

3

Not Used

No

7554

avg_archive1 minimum

32

3

Not Used

No

7555

avg_archive1 minimum

33

3

Not Used

No

7556

avg_archive1 minimum

34

3

Not Used

No

7557

avg_archive1 minimum

35

3

Not Used

No

PC CONFIG REPORT

MON2000

7558 avg_archive1 minimum
No

36

3

A-61

Not Used

***************************************************************************
*******
***************************************************************************
*****
TCP/IP Report from Model 2350A
4/28/2005 2:00:51 PM
------------------------------------------------------------------------------Usage
PC
Comm ID
0
Host Name
DANIELGC
Use DHCP/Specify an IP address
Specify an IP Address
IP Address
172.16.23.128
Subnet Mask
255.255.240.0
Gateway
172.16.16.2
Read/Write
RW
***************************************************************************
*****

Temperature Control Report from Model 2350A
4/28/2005 2:00:52 PM
Loop
1
2
3
4
------------------------------------------------------------------------------Mode
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Prop Gain
60
60
60
60
Reset
600
600
600
600
Rate
1
1
1
1
D Filter
5
5
5
5
Setpoint
82
84
40
350
***************************************************************************
*****
End of Report

JULY 2010

Example Report

A-62

PC CONFIG REPORT

MON2000

This page is intentionally left blank.

Example Report

JULY 2010

APPENDIX B: COMPONENT DATA TABLE
A

This appendix provides a sample standard component data table as well
as a table of the ISO-related components.
• Table B-1, Example Standard Component Data Table
• Table B-2, ISO Component Data Table
All values depend on a base pressure of 14.73 PSIA and a base
temperature of 60 oF (15.56 oC).
BTU components that are listed in Table B-1 reference GPA Standard
2145-09. The ISO component data table references ISO Standard 6976:
1995(E).
NOTE: An asterisk (*) denotes components that are assigned
temporary I.D. codes, starting with 150, as they are used.

JULY 2010

B-1

B-2

Component Data Table

Table B-1 Example Standard Component Data Table
Mol
Wt

Reid
Vapor

Acetylene

26.04

0

0.899

0.615

0

0

1476.9

1426.5

Ethane

22

Air

28.9625

0

1

0.87586

7.3022

0.104759

0

0

Airmix1

26

Argon

39.95

0

1.3792

0

0

0

0

0

Argon

46

Ammonia

17.03

212

0.588

0.6173

5.15

0.0874

435.4

359.8

None

*

Benzene

78.11

3.224

2.6969

0.8844

7.373

0.2798

3750.5

3599.2

n-Hexane

*

0.32117

3264.64

3012.45

n-Butane

33

Butanes

58.1222 62.1055

Rel Dens Rel Dens
Gas
Liquid Lb/Gal

2.0068

0.573515 4.78155

GPM
Factor

Daniel
Gross Dry Net Dry
AGA 8
Sim 2251
BTU
BTU Component I.D. No.

Component
Name

56.11

63.05

1.9372

0.6013

5.013

0.2956

3087

2885.4

n-Butane

28

Butenes

56.11

55.448

1.9372

0.6097

5.0833

0.2916

3077.4

2875.73

n-Butane

32

1,2-Butadiene

54.09

20

1.8676

0.658

5.486

0.2604

2946.7

2795.5

n-Butane

35

1,3-Butadiene

54.09

60

1.8676

0.6272

5.229

0.2732

2886.6

2735.3

n-Butane

34

C3+

44.0956

188.62

1.5225

0.50719

4.2285

0.275429

2521.92

2320.36

Propane

47

C4+

58.1222

51.567

2.0068

0.5842

4.8706

0.315183

3269.85

3017.97

n-Butane

48

C4=1

56.11

63.05

1.9372

0.6013

5.013

0.2956

3087

2885.4

n-Butane

29

C5+

72.1488

15.576

2.4911

0.63071

5.2584

0.362396

4017.97

3715.58

n-Pentane

49

C6+ 47/35/17

95.9558 3.01891

3.31309

0.679907 5.66853 0.446214

5288.71

4900.62

C6mix1

08

C6+ 50/50/00

93.1887

3.21755

0.676145 5.63715

0.43619

5141.12

4762.99

C6mix2

09

3.21755

0.67556

5.63228 0.436267

5141.09

4762.99

C6mix3

10

3.29

C6+ Gpa 2261-99 93.1887 3.51579

MON 2000 Software for Gas Chromatographs

JULY 2010

Butene-1

Component
Name
C6+ 57/28/14

Mol
Wt

Reid
Vapor

94.1904 3.37386

Rel Dens Rel Dens
Gas
Liquid Lb/Gal
3.25214

GPM
Factor

0.677036 5.64458 0.439881

Daniel
Gross Dry Net Dry
AGA 8
Sim 2251
BTU
BTU Component I.D. No.
5194.53

4812.82

C6mix4

11

28.01

0

0.9671

0.801

6.68

0

321.2

321.2

CO

15

Carbon Dioxide

44.0095

0

1.5195

0.81716

6.8129

0.170618

0

0

CO2

17

Cis-2-Butene

56.11

45.54

1.9372

0.6271

5.228

0.2835

3079.3

2877.6

n-Butane

31

COS

60.08

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

None

42

CS2

76.14

0

2.6298

0

0

0

1267

1267

None

41

Cyclohexane

84.16

3.264

2.9057

0.7834

6.531

0.3403

4492.1

4189.4

n-Hexane

*

Cyclopentane

70.14

9.914

2.4215

0.7504

6.256

0.2961

3772.4

3520.2

n-Pentane

*

Diisobutyl

114.23

1.101

3.9439

0.6979

5.819

0.5185

6247.9

5793.9

n-Octane

*

2,3-Dimethbutan

86.18

7.404

2.9753

0.6664

5.556

0.4096

4756

4403.1

n-Hexane

*

2,2-Dimethpenta

100.21

3.492

3.4596

0.6782

5.654

0.4682

5494.6

5091.4

n-Heptane

*

2,4-Dimethpenta

100.21

3.292

3.4596

0.6773

5.647

0.4686

5499.4

5096

n-Heptane

*

3,3-Dimethpenta

100.2

2.773

3.4596

0.6976

5.816

0.455

5501.5

5098.2

n-Heptane

*

Ethane

30.069

800

1.0382

0.35628

2.9704

0.267369

1773.79

1622.75

Ethane

01

Ethyl Alcohol

46.07

2.3

1.5906

0.794

6.62

0.1839

1602.8

1451.5

None

*

Ethylbenzene

106.17

0.371

3.6655

0.8718

7.268

0.3858

5234.3

4982

n-Octane

*

Ethylene

28.0532

0

0.9686

0

0

0

1603.4

1502.47

Ethane

21

Ethylene Oxide

44.05

0

1.49

0

0

0

1459.4

1410.2

None

36

3-Ethylpentane

100.21

2.012

3.4596

0.7028

5.859

0.4517

5513.4

5110.1

n-Heptane

*

B-3

Component Data Table

Carbon Monoxide

MON 2000 Software for Gas Chromatographs

JULY 2010

Table B-1 Example Standard Component Data Table (Continued)

Reid
Vapor

GPM
Factor

H2S

34.0809

395

1.1767

0.79886

6.6602

0.135156

638.57

588.15

H2S

40

HCL

36.46

925

1.2588

0.8558

7.135

0.1349

0

0

None

*

Helium

4.0026

0

0.1382

0.12486

1.041

0.101559

0

0

Helium

13

Hydrogen

2.02

0

0.0696

0.07

0

0

325

274.4

Hydrogen

12

i-Butane

58.1222

72.644

2.0068

0.56283

4.6925

0.327158

3259.42

3006.94

i-Butane

03

i-Butene

56.11

63.4

1.9372

0.6004

5.006

0.296

3068.2

2866.5

n-Butane

27

i-Pentane

72.1488

20.474

2.4911

0.62514

5.212

0.365621

4010.16

3707.56

i-Pentane

05

i-Propylbenzene

120.19

0.188

4.1498

0.8663

7.223

0.4396

5976.6

5674

n-Nonane

*

i-Octane

114.23

1.708

3.9439

0.6962

5.804

0.5199

6246.1

5792.2

n-Octane

*

Methane

16.0425

5000

0.5539

0.3

2.5

0.169487

1012.34

911.5

Methane

00

Methyl Alcohol

32.04

4.63

1.1063

0.796

6.64

0.1275

868.7

767.9

None

*

Methylcyclo C5

84.16

4.503

2.9057

0.7536

6.283

0.3538

4511.6

4209.1

n-Hexane

*

Methylcyclo C6

98.19

1.609

3.39

0.774

6.453

0.4019

5228

4874.9

n-Heptane

*

2-Methylhexane

100.21

2.271

3.4596

0.683

5.694

0.4647

5507.3

5104

n-Heptane

*

3-Methylhexane

100.21

2.13

3.4596

0.6917

5.767

0.4589

5511.3

5107.8

n-Heptane

*

m-Xylene

106.17

0.326

3.6655

0.8687

7.243

0.3871

5219.9

4967.8

n-Octane

*

n-Butane

58.1222

51.567

2.0068

0.5842

4.8706

0.315183

3269.85

3017.97

n-Butane

04

n-Decane

142.2817 0.06148

4.9126

0.73458

6.1244

0.613636

7760.81

7206.63

n-Decane

*

n-Heptane

100.2019

3.4597

0.68823

5.7379

0.461258

5515.33

5111.8

n-Heptane

45

MON 2000 Software for Gas Chromatographs

JULY 2010

Mol
Wt

1.619

Rel Dens Rel Dens
Gas
Liquid Lb/Gal

Daniel
Gross Dry Net Dry
AGA 8
Sim 2251
BTU
BTU Component I.D. No.

Component
Name

B-4

Component Data Table

Table B-1 Example Standard Component Data Table (Continued)

Rel Dens Rel Dens
Gas
Liquid Lb/Gal

GPM
Factor

Daniel
Gross Dry Net Dry
AGA 8
Sim 2251
BTU
BTU Component I.D. No.

Mol
Wt

Reid
Vapor

n-Hexane

86.1754

4.961

2.9754

0.66406

5.5364

0.411121

4766.9

4414.19

n-Hexane

39

n-Nonane

128.2551 0.1809

4.4283

0.72224

6.0215

0.562592

7012.49

6508.02

n-Nonane

38

n-Octane

114.2285 0.5349

3.944

0.70655

5.8907

0.512168

6263.46

5809.41

n-Octane

20

n-Pentane

72.1488

15.576

2.4911

0.63071

5.2584

0.362396

4017.97

3715.58

n-Pentane

06

Neohexane

86.18

9.856

2.9753

0.654

5.453

0.4175

4747.2

4394.1

n-Hexane

*

Neopentane

72.15

35.9

2.4911

0.5967

4.975

0.383

3993.9

3691.4

i-Pentane

07

Nitrogen

28.0134

0

0.9672

0.80687

6.7271

0.10999

0

0

Nitrogen

14

NO2

46

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

None

19

NO

30.01

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

None

*

N2O

44.02

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

None

18

o-Xylene

106.2

0.264

3.6655

0.8848

7.377

0.3801

5222

4969.7

n-Octane

*

Oxygen

31.9988

0

1.1048

1.1423

9.5238

0.088739

0

0

Oxygen

16

1-Pentene

70.14

19.115

2.4215

0.6457

5.383

0.3441

3835.4

3583.3

n-Pentane

37

Propane

44.0956

188.62

1.5225

0.50719

4.2285

0.275429

2521.92

2320.36

Propane

02

Propadiene

40.07

0

1.411

0

0

0

2254.2

2254.2

Propane

24

Propylene

42.0797

227.3

1.4529

0.5226

4.3571

0.255087

2338.4

2187.05

Propane

23

Propyne

40.07

0

1.411

0

0

0

2246.2

2246.2

Propane

25

p-Xylene

106.17

0.342

3.6655

0.8657

7.218

0.3885

5220.8

4968.6

n-Octane

*

Sulfur Dioxide

64.06

88

2.2117

1.397

11.65

0.1453

0

0

CO2

43

B-5

Component Data Table

Component
Name

MON 2000 Software for Gas Chromatographs

JULY 2010

Table B-1 Example Standard Component Data Table (Continued)

Rel Dens Rel Dens
Gas
Liquid Lb/Gal

GPM
Factor

Daniel
Gross Dry Net Dry
AGA 8
Sim 2251
BTU
BTU Component I.D. No.

Component
Name

Mol
Wt

Reid
Vapor

Styrene

104.15

0.24

3.5959

0.911

7.595

0.3622

5042.7

4841

n-Octane

*

Toluene

92.14

1.032

3.1812

0.8718

7.268

0.3348

4485.4

4283.5

n-Heptane

*

Trans-2-Butene

56.11

49.8

1.9372

0.61

5.086

0.2914

3075.1

2873.4

n-Butane

30

Triptane

100.21

3.374

3.4596

0.6946

5.791

0.4571

5496.2

5093

n-Heptane

*

Water

18.0153

0.9505

0.62202

1

8.3372

0.057072

50.43

0

Water

44

B-6

Component Data Table

Table B-1 Example Standard Component Data Table (Continued)

MON 2000 Software for Gas Chromatographs

JULY 2010

Molar
Mass

Sum
Factor
(0°C)

Sum
Factor
(15°C)

Sum
Factor
(20°C)

CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(0°C)

CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(15°C)

CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(20°C)

CV
Sup
kJ/Mol
(25°C)

CV Inf
kJ/Mol
(0°C)

CV Inf
kJ/Mol
(15°C)

CV Inf
kJ/
Mol
(20°C)

CV Inf
kJ/
Mol
(25°C)

Acetylene

26.038

0.0949

0.0837

0.0837

1301.86

1301.37

1301.21

1301.05

1256.79

1256.94

1256.98

1257.03

Air

28.9625

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Argon

39.948

0.0316

0.0283

0.0265

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Ammonia

17.0306

0.1225

0.1095

0.1049

384.57

383.51

383.16

382.81

316.96

316.86

316.82

316.79

Benzene

78.114

0.3017

0.272

0.253

3305.03

3302.86

3302.15

3301.43

3169.81

3169.56

3169.48

3169.38

Butanes

58.1222

0.2059

0.183

0.1743

2879.01

2875.17

2873.98

2872.8

2653.64

2653.01

2652.86

2652.72

Butene-1

56.108

0.1871

0.1732

0.1673

2721.55

2718.7

2717.75

2716.82

2541.25

2540.97

2540.86

2540.76

Butenes

56.108

0.1923

0.176

0.1717

2713.09

2710.23

2709.31

2708.36

2532.79

2532.49

2532.42

2532.27

1,2-Butadiene

54.092

0.2121

0.1924

0.1871

2597.13

2595.12

2594.45

2593.79

2461.91

2461.82

2461.78

2461.74

1,3-Butadiene

54.092

0.1844

0.1703

0.1643

2544.13

2542.1

2541.43

2540.77

2408.91

2408.8

2408.76

2408.72

C3+

44.0956

0.1682

0.1534

0.147

2461.51

2458.25

2457.23

2456.16

2264.71

2264.52

2264.38

2264.25

C4+

58.1222

0.2281

0.2049

0.1947

3081.63

3077.47

3076.32

3074.97

2841.63

2841.98

2841.83

2841.68

C4=1

56.108

0.1871

0.1732

0.1673

2721.55

2718.7

2717.75

2716.82

2541.25

2540.97

2540.86

2540.76

C5+

72.1488

0.2999

0.2651

0.2505

3754.2

3749.68

3748.71

3746.71

3464.63

3468.87

3468.75

3468.52

C6+ 47/35/17

95.9558

0.389

0.3459

0.3331

4663.16

4657.69

4655.86

4654.08

4316.22

4315.67

4315.46

4315.27

C6+ 50/50/00

93.1887

0.3704

0.3305

0.3183

4533.05

4527.71

4525.93

4524.19

4194.99

4194.46

4194.25

4194.07

C6+ GPA 2261-99

93.1887

0.3943

0.3503

0.3373

4697.93

4692.42

4690.58

4688.78

4348.61

4348.06

4347.84

4347.66

B-7

Component Data Table

Component
Name

MON 2000 Software for Gas Chromatographs

JULY 2010

Table B-2 ISO Component Data Table

Molar
Mass

Sum
Factor
(0°C)

Sum
Factor
(15°C)

Sum
Factor
(20°C)

CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(0°C)

CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(15°C)

CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(20°C)

CV
Sup
kJ/Mol
(25°C)

CV Inf
kJ/Mol
(0°C)

CV Inf
kJ/Mol
(15°C)

CV Inf
kJ/
Mol
(20°C)

CV Inf
kJ/
Mol
(25°C)

C6+ 57/28/14

94.1904

0.3781

0.3367

0.3243

4580.15

4574.76

4572.96

4571.2

4238.87

4238.34

4238.12

4237.94

Carbon Monoxide

28.01

0.0265

0.0224

0.02

282.8

282.91

282.95

282.98

282.8

282.91

282.95

282.98

Carbon Dioxide

44.0095

0.0819

0.0748

0.0728

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Cis-2-Butene

56.108

0.1975

0.1817

0.1761

2714.9

2711.9

2711

2710

2534.6

2534.2

2534.1

2533.9

COS

60.076

0.1225

0.114

0.1095

548.01

548.15

548.19

548.23

548.01

548.15

548.19

548.23

CS2

76.143

0.2145

0.1949

0.1871

1104.06

1104.32

1104.41

1104.49

1104.06

1104.32

1104.41

1104.49

Cyclohexane

84.161

0.3209

0.2864

0.2757

3960.67

3956.02

3954.47

3952.96

3690.23

3689.42

3689.13

3688.86

Cyclopentane

70.14

0.255

0.2302

0.2236

3326.14

3322.19

3320.88

3319.59

3100.77

3100.03

3099.76

3099.51

Diisobutyl

114.23

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

2,3-Dimethbutan

86.177

0.3

0.2739

0.2569

4193.63

4188.6

4186.93

4185.28

3878.11

3877.57

3877.36

3877.17

2,2-Dimethpenta

100.21

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

2,4-Dimethpenta

100.21

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

3,3-Dimethpenta

100.2

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Ethane

30.069

0.1

0.0922

0.0894

1564.34

1562.14

1561.41

1560.69

1429.12

1428.84

1428.74

1428.64

Ethyl Alcohol

46.07

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Ethylbenzene

106.167

0.4858

0.4207

0.4037

4613.14

4609.53

4608.32

4607.15

4387.77

4387.37

4387.2

4387.07

Ethylene

28.0532

0.0866

0.08

0.0775

1413.51

1412.11

1411.65

1411.18

1323.36

1323.24

1323.2

1323.15

Ethylene Oxide

44.05

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

MON 2000 Software for Gas Chromatographs

JULY 2010

Component
Name

B-8

Component Data Table

Table B-2 ISO Component Data Table

Molar
Mass

Sum
Factor
(0°C)

Sum
Factor
(15°C)

Sum
Factor
(20°C)

CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(0°C)

CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(15°C)

CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(20°C)

CV
Sup
kJ/Mol
(25°C)

CV Inf
kJ/Mol
(0°C)

CV Inf
kJ/Mol
(15°C)

CV Inf
kJ/
Mol
(20°C)

CV Inf
kJ/
Mol
(25°C)

3-Ethylpentane

100.21

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

H2S

34.0809

0.1

0.1

0.1

562.94

562.38

562.19

562.01

517.87

517.95

517.97

517.99

HCL

36.46

925

1.2588

0.8558

7.135

0.1349

0

0

0

0

0

0

Helium

4.0026

0.0006

0.0002

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Hydrogen

2.0159

-0.004

-0.0048

-0.0051

286.63

286.15

285.99

285.83

241.56

241.72

241.76

241.81

i-Butane

58.1222

0.2049

0.1789

0.1703

2874.2

2870.58

2869.38

2868.2

2648.83

2648.42

2648.26

2648.12

i-Butene

56.108

0.1871

0.1703

0.1673

2704.8

2702

2701.1

2700.2

2524.5

2524.3

2524.2

2524.1

i-Pentane

72.1488

0.251

0.228

0.2168

3535.98

3531.68

3530.24

3528.83

3265.54

3265.08

3264.89

3264.73

i-Propylbenzene

120.19

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

i-Octane

114.23

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Methane

16.0425

0.049

0.0447

0.0436

892.97

891.56

891.09

890.63

802.82

802.69

802.65

802.6

Methyl Alcohol

32.042

0.4764

0.3578

0.3286

766.59

765.09

764.59

764.09

676.44

676.22

676.14

676.06

Methylcyclo C5

84.161

0.313

0.2811

0.2702

3977.04

3972.46

3970.93

3969.44

3705.34

3705.59

3705.86

3706.6

Methylcyclo C6

98.188

0.3808

0.3376

0.3256

4600.64

4602.35

4604.09

4609.34

4292.53

4292.78

4293.06

4293.82

2-Methylhexane

100.21

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

3-Methylhexane

100.21

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

m-Xylene

106.167

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

n-Butane

58.1222

0.2069

0.1871

0.1783

2883.82

2879.76

2878.57

2877.4

2658.45

2657.6

2657.45

2657.32

B-9

Component Data Table

Component
Name

MON 2000 Software for Gas Chromatographs

JULY 2010

Table B-2 ISO Component Data Table

Molar
Mass

Sum
Factor
(0°C)

Sum
Factor
(15°C)

Sum
Factor
(20°C)

CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(0°C)

CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(15°C)

CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(20°C)

CV
Sup
kJ/Mol
(25°C)

CV Inf
kJ/Mol
(0°C)

CV Inf
kJ/Mol
(15°C)

CV Inf
kJ/
Mol
(20°C)

CV Inf
kJ/
Mol
(25°C)

n-Decane

142.2817

0.7523

0.645

0.614

6842.69

6834.9

6832.31

6829.77

6346.88

6346.14

6345.85

6345.59

n-Heptane

100.2019

0.4123

0.3661

0.3521

4862.87

4857.18

4855.29

4853.43

4502.28

4501.72

4501.49

4501.3

n-Hexane

86.1754

0.3286

0.295

0.2846

4203.23

4198.24

4196.58

4194.95

3887.71

3887.21

3887.01

3886.84

n-Nonane

128.2551

0.6221

0.5385

0.5148

6182.91

6175.82

6173.46

6171.15

5732.17

5731.49

5731.22

5730.99

n-Octane

114.2285

0.5079

0.445

0.4278

5522.4

5516.01

5513.88

5511.8

5116.73

5116.11

5115.87

5115.66

n-Pentane

72.1488

0.2864

0.251

0.2345

3542.89

3538.6

3537.17

3535.77

3272.45

3272

3271.83

3271.67

Neohexane

86.177

0.2898

0.2627

0.255

4185.84

4180.83

4179.15

4177.52

3870.32

3869.8

3869.59

3869.41

Neopentane

72.15

0.2387

0.2121

0.2025

3521.72

3517.43

3516.01

3514.61

3251.28

3250.83

3250.67

3250.51

Nitrogen

28.0134

0.0224

0.0173

0.0173

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

NO2

46.0006

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

NO

30.006

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

N2O

44.02

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

o-Xylene

106.167

0.5128

0.4427

0.4231

4602.17

4598.64

4597.48

4596.31

4376.8

4376.48

4376.34

4376.23

Oxygen

31.9988

0.0316

0.0283

0.0265

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1-Pentene

70.14

0.249

0.2258

0.2191

3381.29

3377.75

3376.57

3375.42

3155.92

3155.59

3155.45

3155.34

Propane

44.0956

0.1453

0.1338

0.1288

2224.01

2221.1

2220.13

2219.17

2043.71

2043.37

2043.23

2043.11

Propadiene

40.065

0.1414

0.1304

0.1265

1945.25

1943.96

1943.53

1943.11

1855.1

1855.09

1855.08

1855.08

Propylene

42.0797

0.1378

0.1265

0.1225

2061.57

2059.43

2058.72

2058.02

1926.35

1926.13

1926.05

1925.97

MON 2000 Software for Gas Chromatographs

JULY 2010

Component
Name

B-10

Component Data Table

Table B-2 ISO Component Data Table

Component
Name

Molar
Mass

Sum
Factor
(0°C)

Sum
Factor
(15°C)

Sum
Factor
(20°C)

CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(0°C)

CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(15°C)

CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(20°C)

CV
Sup
kJ/Mol
(25°C)

CV Inf
kJ/Mol
(0°C)

CV Inf
kJ/Mol
(15°C)

CV Inf
kJ/
Mol
(20°C)

CV Inf
kJ/
Mol
(25°C)

Propyne

40.065

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

p-Xylene

106.167

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Sulfur Dioxide

64.065

0.1549

0.1449

0.1414

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Styrene

104.15

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Toluene

92.141

0.3886

0.3421

0.3286

3952.72

3949.81

3948.84

3947.89

3772.42

3772.08

3771.95

3771.83

Trans-2-Butene

56.108

0.1975

0.1789

0.1761

2711.1

2708.3

2707.4

2706.4

2530.8

2530.5

2530.5

2530.3

Triptane

100.21

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Water

18.0153

0.2646

0.2345

0.2191

45.074

44.433

44.224

44.016

0

0

0

0

MON 2000 Software for Gas Chromatographs

JULY 2010

Table B-2 ISO Component Data Table

B-11

Component Data Table

B-12

Component Data Table

MON 2000 Software for Gas Chromatographs

JULY 2010

DATA COMPUTATIONS

MON2000

C-1

APPENDIX C, DATA COMPUTATIONS
CA

C.1

DATA ACQUISITION
The 2350A GC Controller performs a 12-bit
analog to digital (A/D) conversion every 25
milliseconds on channel 0 during an analysis
period. This is the period when the left side of
the display is counting the elapsed time of the
analysis. The fixed number on the right side of
the display is the total cycle time.
Exactly 40 equi-spaced data samples are taken
every second for analysis by the controller. A
sampling frequency of 40 Hertz (Hz) was
chosen to reduce 60 Hz normal mode noise.
After each point on the chromatograph signal is
sampled, the resulting number is stored in a
buffer area in the controller memory for
processing. During the analysis, only the last
256 data points are available for processing.
Because the data analysis is done as the signal
is sampled (in real-time), only a limited
number of past data samples is required to
analyze any signal.
As a part of the data acquisition process,
groups of incoming data samples are averaged
together before storing to the controller
memory for processing. Non-overlapping
groups of N samples are averaged and stored
and thus reduce the effective incoming data
rate to 40/N samples/second. For example, if
N = 5, then a total of 40/5 or 6 (averaged) data
samples are stored every second. The value for
the variable N is determined by the selection of
a Peak Width parameter (PW). The
relationship is:
N = PW

JULY 2010

Data Acquisition

C-2

DATA COMPUTATIONS

MON2000

where PW is given in seconds. All the various
details in the analysis process are independent
of the value of N. Allowable values of N are one
to 63 which corresponds to values of PW from 2
to 63 seconds.
The variable N is known as the integration
factor. This term is used because N determines
how many points are averaged or integrated to
form a single value. The integration of data
upon input before storing serves two purposes.
First, the statistical noise on the input signal is
reduced by the square root of N. In the case of
N = 4, a noise reduction of two would be
realized. Secondly, the integration factor
controls the bandwidth of the chromatograph
signal. It is necessary to match the bandwidth
of the input signal to that of the analysis
algorithms in the 2350A. This prevents small,
short duration perturbations from being
recognized as true peaks by the program. It is
therefore important to choose a Peak Width
corresponding to the narrowest peak in a group
under consideration.
C.2

PEAK DETECTION
For normal area or peak height concentration
evaluation, the determination of a peak's start,
peak point, and end is automatic. The manual
determination of start and end points is used
only for area calculations in the Forced
Integration mode. Automatic determination of
peak onset or start is initiated whenever
Integrate Inhibit is turned off. Analysis is
started in a region of signal quiescence and
stability such that the signal level and activity
can be considered as baseline values. It is
important that this be the case because the
assumption is made by the 2350A software.

Peak Detection

JULY 2010

MON2000

DATA COMPUTATIONS

C-3

Having initiated a peak search by turning
Inhibit off, the 2350A Controller performs a
point by point examination of the signal slope.
This is achieved by using a digital slope
detection filter which is a combination low pass
filter and differentiator. The output of this
detector is constantly compared to a system
constant entered by the operator called Slope
Sensitivity. A default value of eight is assumed
if no entry is made. Lower values make peak
onset detection more sensitive and higher
values make detection less sensitive. Higher
values (20 to 100) would be appropriate for
noisy signals, e.g. high amplifier gain. Peak
termination is determined by the same
application of this detector to the signal, but in
the reverse sense. Onset is defined where the
detector output exceeds the baseline constant,
but termination is defined subsequently where
the detector output is less than the same
constant.
Sequences of fused peaks are also
automatically handled. This is done by testing
each termination point to see if the region
immediately following it satisfies the criteria of
a baseline. A baseline region must have a slope
detector value less than the magnitude of the
baseline constant for a number of sequential
points. When a baseline region is found, this
terminates a sequence of peaks. A zero
reference line for peak height and area
determination is established by extending a
line from the point of the onset of the peak
sequence to the point of the termination. The
values of these two points are found by
averaging the four integrated points just prior
to the onset point and just after the
termination points respectively.

JULY 2010

Peak Detection

C-4

DATA COMPUTATIONS

MON2000

The zero reference line will, in general, be nonhorizontal and thus compensates for any linear
drift in the system from the time the peak
sequence starts until it ends. In a single peak
situation, peak area is the area of the
component peak between the curve and the
zero reference line. The peak height is the
distance from the zero reference line to the
maximum point on the component curve. The
value and location of the maximum point is
determined from quadratic interpolation
through the three highest points at the peak of
the discrete valued curve stored in 2350A. This
interpolation technique is used both for peaks
as well as valleys (minimum points) in fused
peak sequences. In the latter case, lines are
dropped from the interpolated valley points to
the zero reference line to partition the fused
peak areas into individual peaks. The use of
quadratic interpolation improves both area and
height calculation accuracy and eliminates the
effects of variations in the integration factor on
these calculations.
While calibrating, the controller may run
several analyses of the calibration stream.
Using entries from an example program, five
analyses would be run. Since only the last three
are to be averaged, data from runs one and two
are not saved. Results are stored on the third
run. Data from runs four and five are added to
that stored for run three.

Peak Detection

JULY 2010

DATA COMPUTATIONS

MON2000

C.3

C-5

ANALYSIS COMPUTATIONS
There are two basic analysis algorithms
included in the controller:
• Area Analysis – calculates area under
component peak
• Peak Height Analysis – measures height of
component peak

C.3.1 CONC. ANALYSIS WITH RESPONSE FACTOR
Calibration
The concentration calculations discussed as
follows require a unique response factor for
each component in an analysis. These factors
may be manually entered by an operator or
automatically calculated by calibrating the
system.
Equation C-1 Response Factor Calculation

Area n
ARF n = --------------Cal n

Equation C-1 uses an external
standard.

or

Ht n
HRF n = ----------Cal n

where

JULY 2010

ARFn

area response factor for component “n” in
area per mole percent (%)

HRFn

height response factor for component “n”

Arean

area associated with component “n” in calibration gas

Htn

height associated with component “n” in
mole percent in calibration gas

Caln

amount of component “n” in mole percent
of calibration gas

Analysis Computations

C-6

DATA COMPUTATIONS

MON2000

Calculated response factors are stored by the
controller for use in the concentration
calculations, and are printed out in the
configuration and calibration reports.
Equation C-2 Average Response Factor
k

∑ RFi
i=1
RFAVG n = -----------------k

where
RFAVGn

area or height average response factor for
component “n”

RFi

area or height response factor for
component “n” from the calibration run

k

number of calibration runs actually used
to calculate the response factors

The percent deviation of new RF average from
old RF average is calculated in the following
manner:
Equation C-3 Percent Deviation

RFnew – RFold
deviation = ---------------------------------------- × 100
Rfold
where the absolute value of percent deviation
for alarm has been previously entered by the
operator.

Conc. Analysis with Response Factor

JULY 2010

DATA COMPUTATIONS

MON2000

C-7

Calc. in Mole Percent w/o Normalization
Once response factors have been determined by
the controller or entered by the operator,
component concentrations are determined for
each analysis using the following equations:
Equation C-4 Response Factor Calculation

Area n
CONC n = --------------ARF n

or

Ht n
CONC n = -------------HRF n

where
CONCn

concentration of component “n” in mole percent

AREAn

area of component “n” in unknown sample

ARFn

response factor of component “n” calculated
from area of calibration sample. Units are area
per mole percent

Htn

peak height of component “n” in unknown
sample

HRFn

response factor of component “n” calculated
from peak height of calibration sample. Units
are height per mole percent

Note that the average concentration of each
component will also be calculated when data
averaging is requested.

JULY 2010

Conc. Analysis with Response Factor

C-8

DATA COMPUTATIONS

MON2000

Component concentrations may be input
through analog inputs 1 to 4 or may be fixed. If
a fixed value is used, the calibration for that
component is the mole percent that will be used
for all analyses:.
Equation C-5 Concentration Calculations with Normalization

CONC n
- × 100
CONCN n = --------------------------k

∑ CONCi
i=1

where
CONCNn

normalized concentration of component
“n” in percent of total gas concentration

CONCn

non-normalized concentration of
component “n” in mole percent

CONCi

non-normalized concentration (in mole
percent) from each of the “k” components
to be grouped into this normalization

k

number of components to be included in
the normalization

Conc. Analysis with Response Factor

JULY 2010

DATA COMPUTATIONS

MON2000

C.4

C-9

POST ANALYSIS COMPUTATIONS

C.4.1 Liquid Equivalent Computations
The equivalent liquid volume, in gallons per
1000 standard cubic feet (GPM) is given by:
Equation C-6 Equivalent Liquid Volume (GPM)

BASEPRS BASETEMP + 459.67
GPM n = CONCN n × LCF n × -------------------------- × ------------------------------------------------------14.73
60 + 459.67
where
GPMn

gallons/1000 standard cubic feet of component “n”

CONCNn

normalized (if selected) concentration of
component “n”

LCFn

liquid equivalent conversion factor for component
“n” at 14.73 PSIA and 60 degrees F

BASE PRS

base (contact) Pressure specified; defaults to
14.73

C.4.2 Heating Value Calculations
(a) Dry Gross BTU of Total Gas
Equation C-7 Dry Gross BTU Value of Total Gas
P

∑ [ ( CONCN )n ( BTU CF )n ]
=1
DRYBTU CF = n------------------------------------------------------------------------100

where

JULY 2010

DRYBTU/
CF

uncorrected dry BTU content per cubic foot of
total gas sample

CONCNn

normalized (if selected) concentration of
component “n”, calculated from peak analysis

BTU/CFn

energy content per cubic foot of component “n”,
stored in permanent memory

Post Analysis Computations

C-10

DATA COMPUTATIONS

P

total number of components to be used in calculation of total BTU/CF

“100”

removed the “100” factored into the calculation of
the concentration earlier in the analysis

MON2000

(b) Ideal Relative Density
Equation C-8 Ideal Relative Density of Total Gas Sample
P

∑ CONCn ( RDn )
=1
TOTALRD = n--------------------------------------------100

where
RDn

relative Density of component “n”

TOTAL RD

relative Density of total gas sample

CONCNn, P, 100

are defined in “1.” preceding

(c) Real (corrected) Relative Density
The ideal gas relative density, DI is
corrected to the real gas relative
Density, Dr, by dividing by the compressibility factor, Z, for gas mixture at
60 oF and one atmosphere pressure and
multiplying by the compressibility factor
of air at the same conditions:
Equation C-9 Real Gas Relative Density

D I Z b ( air )
D R = --------------------Z b ( gas )

Heating Value Calculations

JULY 2010

DATA COMPUTATIONS

MON2000

C-11

where
DI

ideal gas relative density ()

Zb(air)

compressibility factor of air, or 0.99959

Zb(gas)

compressibility factor of gas mixture

(d) Compressibility Factor Dry BTU
Compressibility uses calculations from
AGA Report No. 8 (1992) errata (1993)
“Compressibility Factors of Natural Gas
and other related Hydro-Carbon Gases”.
Equation C-10 Corrected Dry BTU Value

DRYBTU
CORRDRYBTU = -----------------------Z
where
DRYBTU

value from Equation C-7

Z

compressibility factor (see Equation C-9)

BASE PRS

base (contract) pressure specified; defaults to
14.73 PSIA

(e) Corrected Saturated BTU
Equation C-11 Corrected Saturated BTU Value of Total Gas

( DRYBTU ) ( 0.9826 )
CORRSATBTU = --------------------------------------------------Z

JULY 2010

Heating Value Calculations

C-12

DATA COMPUTATIONS

MON2000

where
DRYBTU

value from Equation C-7

CORRSATBTU

corrected saturated BTU content per cubic
foot of total gas sample at base conditions of
BASE PRS and 60 °F

Z

compressibility of total gas as calculated in
Equation C-10

BASEPRS

base (contract) pressure specified; defaults to
14.73 PSIA

(f) Compressibility and Base Pressure
Compressibility and base pressure
corrections for Dry BTU are:
Equation C-12 Dry BTU at Base Pressure

DryBTUatBasePressure ContractPressure
CorrDryBTU = ⎛ -----------------------------------------------------------------⎞ ⎛ ------------------------------------------------⎞
⎝
⎠ ⎝ BasePressure ⎠
Z
where
CORRDRYBTU

value from Equation C-7

Z

compressibility factor (see Equation C-10)

BASE PRESSURE

base (contract) pressure specified;
defaults to 14.73 PSIA

(g) BTU Calculations
Note that the BTU calculations apply to
Gross dry, saturated, actual BTU and
Net dry, saturated, and actual BTU
Equation C-13 BTU Calculations

( WVC )
GrossActualBTU ( corr ) = GrossDryBTU ( corr ) × ⎛ 100 – ------------------⎞
⎝
100 ⎠

Heating Value Calculations

JULY 2010

DATA COMPUTATIONS

MON2000

C-13

where
WVC

Water volume content (provided by a “live analog input”

Equation C-14 Wobbe Index Calculation

CORR ( GROSS )BTU
WI = -----------------------------------------------------RD
where
W.I.

Wobbe index value

CORRGROSSBTU

Corrected Dry BTU for total gas Sample
as calculated in Equation C-10

RD

real Relative Density as calculated in
Equation C-9

Equation C-15 Weight Percent Calculation

( CONC n ) ( MW n )
- × 100
WTpercent n = ------------------------------------------------k

All components in the
sample must be measured in
order to calculate weight
percent.

∑ ( CONCi ) ( MWi )
i=1

where
WTpercentn

weight percent of component “n”

CONCn

concentration in mole percent of
component “n”

Mwn

molecular weight of component “n”

k

∑

sum of weights of all components in
sample

i=1

JULY 2010

Heating Value Calculations

C-14

DATA COMPUTATIONS

MON2000

Equation C-16 Average Molecular Weight
k

∑ ( CONCi ) ( MWi )

AVGMW =

i=1

where
AVGMW

average molecular weight
sum of weights of all components in
sample

k

∑
i=1

Equation C-17 Liquid Volume Percent

( WTpercent n ) ÷ ( D n )
- × 100
LVpercent = ------------------------------------------------------------k

∑ ( WTpercenti ) ÷ ( Di )
i=1

where
LV percent

liquid volume

WT percent

weight percent

D

density

k

∑

All components in the
sample must be measured in
order to calculate liquid
volume percent from mole
percent.

sum of all components in sample

i=1

Heating Value Calculations

JULY 2010

DATA COMPUTATIONS

MON2000

C-15

Equation C-18 Reid Vapor Pressure
k

∑ ( CONCi ) ( VPi )
=1
RVP = i---------------------------------------------100

where
RVP

reid vapor pressure

CONCi

normalized concentration of component “i”
in mole percent

VPi

vapor pressure at 100 F of component “i”
(GPA2145 = 94)

Equation C-19 Liquid Relative Density

All components in the
sample must be measured
to calculate LRDT.

k

∑ ( LVpercenti ) ( LRDi )
=1
LRD T = i------------------------------------------------------------100

where

JULY 2010

LRDT

liquid relative density of sample, relative
to water at 60 °F

LRDi

liquid relative density of component “i”
(GPA2145-94)

LVpercent

liquid volume percent from Equation C-18

Heating Value Calculations

C-16

DATA COMPUTATIONS

MON2000

Equation C-20 Liquid Density
k

∑ ( LVi ) ( LDi )

All components on sample
must be measured to
calculate Liquid Density.

=1
LD T = i------------------------------------100

where
LDT

liquid density of total sample in pounds per gallon

LDi

liquid density of component “i”. (GPA 2145-94)

LVi

liquid volume percent

Equation C-21 Gas Density

GD = ( RD ) ( 76.4976 )
where
GD

gas density in lb/1000 ft3

RD

relative density (relative to air)

76.4976

density of air at 14.73 PSIA and 60 °F, in
lb/1000 ft3

Heating Value Calculations

JULY 2010

DATA COMPUTATIONS

MON2000

C-17

C.4.3 Multi-Level Calibration
The properties of each gas component can be
viewed using the Component Data menu.
Included with the component properties in the
Component Data Table are four coefficients
labeled Multi-Level Calib 'a', 'b', 'c', and 'd' for
each component. If these parameters are all
zero, then linear calibration is used. See
Section C.3.1 for the response factor
calculations.
If any of these parameters have a value other
than zero, then multi-level, or polynomial
calibration is used for that component.
The response factors are then calculated as:
Equation C-22 Multi-Level Calibration
3

2

aP + bP + cP + d
ResponseFactor = ---------------------------------------------------------------------CalibrationConcentration (mol %)
where
P

peak size (Area or Height as selected by the
Operator); from average calibration runs

Coefficients:
A,B,C, and D

Calculated Offline.
Entered after Multi-Level Calibration using
several calibration gases (typically seven gases)
1. Note: If the coefficient values are correct
values, the response factor will be close to
one.

JULY 2010

Multi-Level Calibration

C-18

DATA COMPUTATIONS

MON2000

The mole% value in the sample gas is then
calculated as
Equation C-23 Mole% Value
3

Mole % =

2

aP + bP + cP + d
----------------------------------------------responsefactor

where
P

peak size measured in Sample Gas

C.4.4 Indirect Calibration
Component gases which are NOT found in the
calibration gas, but may be found in the sample
gas, can be assigned a response factor which is
a fixed multiple (the Relative Response Factor
to a Reference Component) that IS found in the
calibration gas.
The Relative Response Factors and Reference
Component Values are included in the
Component Data Table (following the
Multi-Level Calibration coefficients) see
Appendix B.
If the Reference Component is None, then
normal (direct) calibration is used.
If the Reference Component is defined, (e.g.
Propane) then the mole% value for the indirect
component (e.g. neoC5), is calculated as:
Equation C-24 Mole% Value Indirect Component

⎛ P ( neoC5 ) ⎞

mole% (neoC5) = mole% (Propane) ⎝ -------------------------------⎠ ( RRFneoC5 )
P ( Propane )

Indirect Calibration

JULY 2010

DATA COMPUTATIONS

MON2000

C-19

where

JULY 2010

P

peak size

RRF

Relative Response Factor

Indirect Calibration

C-20

DATA COMPUTATIONS

MON2000

This page is intentionally left blank.

Indirect Calibration

JULY 2010

ANALOG OUTPUT CAL. FOR 2350A

MON2000

D-1

APPENDIX D, ANALOG OUTPUT CAL. FOR 2350A
DA ALOG OUTPUT CAL. FOR 2350A

The initial analog output adjustment will be set
at the factory before shipment at standard
values (4-20 mA or 1-5 V). It may be necessary
to check and/or adjust these values, depending
on output cabling or impedance. The
adjustment may require two persons if the
units are some distance apart. It will require a
good digital meter to check the zero and full
scale values at the receiving end. The scale or
span value can be adjusted by a PC with
MON2000 software when the values are known
at the receiving end.

The 4-20 mA outputs are
calibrated similarly except
the current is measured
instead of the voltage.

It is possible to calibrate the analog outputs
using different engineering units. Two
examples are described below using both volts
and percentages.
D.1

CALIBRATING BY VOLTS
This example assumes that an analog output
channel needs to calibrated to a span of 1-5 V.
To calibrate an analog output by adjusting the
voltage,
1. Use the Application > Analog Outputs menu
to access this function.
2. The Analog Outputs dialog appears.

JULY 2010

Calibrating by Volts

D-2

ANALOG OUTPUT CAL. FOR 2350A

MON2000

3. Select the channel to be calibrated.
Output channels 1 and 2 can be scaled from
either 4-20 mA or 1-5 V. Channels 3 to 10
are scaled from 4-20 mA.

Although output channels for direct voltage measurement
exist for analog output channels 1 and 2, it is recommended
that they not be used for calibration purposes. Instead, use
the current-out terminals and the 250-ohm resistor as
described.

Calibrating by Volts

JULY 2010

MON2000

ANALOG OUTPUT CAL. FOR 2350A

D-3

4. To change a variable assignment, click the
appropriate Variable cell. Use the provided
pull-down menu and click the desired
variable to select it.

5. For voltage values, set Zero Scale to “1.0”
and Full Scale to “5.0”.
If the channel is calibrated in milliamperes,
set Zero Scale to “4” and Full Scale to “20”.
6. Set the Fixed/Var parameter to “Fixed”.
7. Set the Fixed Value to “0.0”.
8. Set Zero Scale Adjustment and the Full
Scale Adjustment to “0.0”.
9. Click the
button to accept your
changes and exit from the Analog Outputs
dialog.

Your Voltmeter reading
should be close to 1.0 V
but does not have to be
exactly 1.0 V. If the
reading is negative,
reverse the leads.

JULY 2010

10. Connect a 250-ohm resistor across the
signal at the input of the device where this
analog output is used. Connect a Voltmeter
across the resistor and measure the result.
11. Return to the Analog Outputs dialog and
reselect the channel being calibrated.
12. Set the Fixed Value to the Full Scale value
entered in Step 5.

Calibrating by Volts

D-4

ANALOG OUTPUT CAL. FOR 2350A

MON2000

13. Click the
button to accept your
changes and exit from the Analog Outputs
dialog.
14. Look at the voltmeter again and record the
full scale reading.
15. Return to the Analog Outputs dialog and
reselect the channel being calibrated.
16. Change the Zero Scale Adjustment to the
Zero Scale voltage reading and the Full
Scale Adjustment to the Full Scale voltage
reading.

Your voltmeter reading
should be very close to
5.0 Volts. MON2000 will
adjust the scale so the
span will be 4 Volts and
scale accordingly.

17. Click the
button to accept your
changes and exit from the Analog Outputs
dialog.
18. Return to the Analog Outputs dialog and
reselect the channel being calibrated.
19. To quickly verify your changes, enter the
midpoint of your range (e.g., 3) for the Fixed
Value. Click the
button to accept
your change. The resulting voltage output
should be close to span midpoint (e.g., 3).
20. Return to the Analog Outputs dialog and
reselect the channel being calibrated.
21. Set the Fixed/Var parameter to “Var” and
the Fixed Value to “0.0”.
22. Click the
changes.

button to accept your

The voltage output could change slightly from
time to time and the MON2000 software will
now maintain the correct span.

Calibrating by Volts

JULY 2010

ANALOG OUTPUT CAL. FOR 2350A

MON2000

D.2

D-5

CALIBRATING BY PERCENTAGES
This second example, shown below,
demonstrates that it is also possible to
calibrate your outputs as a percentage. For
instance, you may wish to read directly values
that may be scaled from 0 to 1200. Your voltage
span is scaled from 1 to 5 volts so the range is
approximately 4 Volts. Thus, 1200 divided by 4
equals 300 units per volt. If you equate the
difference as a percentage, the midpoint in
units equals 600, or approximately 3 volts.
With this information in mind, you want to set
zero units equal to 1.00 V and 1200 units to
5.00 V and let the software adjust the span as
you calibrate.
This example assumes that an analog output
channel needs to calibrated to a span of 0 to
1200.

JULY 2010

Calibrating by Percentages

D-6

ANALOG OUTPUT CAL. FOR 2350A

MON2000

To calibrate by percentages,
1. Use the Application > Analog Outputs menu
to access this function.
2. The Analog Outputs dialog appears.

3. Select the channel to be calibrated.
Output channels 1 and 2 can be scaled from
either 4-20 mA or 1-5 V. Channels 3 to 10
are scaled from 4-20 mA.

Although output channels for direct voltage
measurement exist for analog output channels 1 and 2,
it is recommended that they not be used for calibration
purposes. Instead, use the current-out terminals and
the 250-ohm resistor as described.

All can be scaled with a percentage.

Calibrating by Percentages

JULY 2010

MON2000

ANALOG OUTPUT CAL. FOR 2350A

D-7

4. To change a variable assignment, click the
appropriate Variable cell. Use the provided
pull-down menu and click the desired
variable to select it.

5. Set Zero Scale to “0” and Full Scale to
“1200”.
6. Set the Fixed/Var parameter to “Fixed”.
7. Set Fixed Value to “0.0”.
8. Set Zero Scale Adjustment and Full Scale
Adjustment to “0.0”.
9. Click the
button to accept your
changes and exit from the Analog Outputs
dialog.

Your Voltmeter reading
should be close to 1.0 V
but does not have to be
exactly 1.0 V. If the
reading is negative,
reverse the leads.

JULY 2010

10. Connect a 250-ohm resistor across the
signal at the input of the device where this
analog output is used. Connect a Voltmeter
across the resistor and measure the result.
11. Return to the Analog Outputs dialog and
reselect the channel being calibrated.
12. Set the Fixed Value to the Full Scale value
entered in Step 5.

Calibrating by Percentages

D-8

ANALOG OUTPUT CAL. FOR 2350A

MON2000

13. Click the
button to accept your
changes and exit from the Analog Outputs
dialog.
14. Look at the voltmeter again and record the
full scale reading.
15. Return to the Analog Outputs dialog and
reselect the channel being calibrated.
16. Change the Zero Scale Adjustment to the
zero scale voltage reading and the Full
Scale Adjustment to the full scale voltage
reading.

Your voltmeter reading
should be very close to
5.0 Volts. MON2000 will
adjust the scale so the
span will be 4 Volts and
scale accordingly.

17. Click the
button to accept your
changes and exit from the Analog Outputs
dialog.
18. Return to the Analog Outputs dialog and
reselect the channel being calibrated.
19. To quickly verify your changes, enter the
midpoint of your range (e.g., 600) for the
Fixed Value. Click the
button to
accept your change. The resulting voltage
output should be close to span midpoint
(e.g., 3).
20. Return to the Analog Outputs dialog and
reselect the channel being calibrated.
21. Set the Fixed/Var parameter to “Var” and
the Fixed Value to “0.0”.
22. Click the
changes.

button to accept your

The voltage output could change slightly from
time to time and the MON2000 software will
now maintain the correct span.

Calibrating by Percentages

JULY 2010

UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS

MON2000

E-1

APPENDIX E, UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND
2350 EPROMS
EA

To upgrade the Model 500 2350A (GC) software and the
2350 EPROMs, perform all steps in the order they appear
in this appendix.
Before beginning the upgrade procedure, ensure that you
have identified which standard (i.e., factory-released)
application file was used to form the current user
application for this GC. See Section E.10 for more
information on standard applications.

E.1

CONNECT TO GC AND HALT ANALYSIS
1. Ensure that the MON2000 software is
running and you are connected to the GC
that is to be upgraded.
Use the File > Connect menu to access this
function. See Section 2.10.1 for more
information.
2. Use MON2000 to halt any ongoing analysis
or calibration runs.

When halted GC runs
have finished, the
status for Detector 1
mode will indicate Idle
(see GC Status bar; see
Section 3.3).

Use the Control > Halt menu to access this
function. See Section 4.3 for more
information.
E.2

OFFLINE EDIT TO UPLOAD APP. & RENAME
1. Use MON2000 to upload (from the GC unit)
to the PC the most current parameters that
are in use at the GC.
Use the File > Offline Edit > Upload
Application menu to access this function.
2. A menu of stored application files appears.
Double-click the desired file.

JULY 2010

Connect to GC and Halt Analysis

E-2

UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS

MON2000

3. The Save Uploaded GC Application File
dialog appears.

Use this dialog to assign a new file name to
the GC Application file that is the target for
uploading.
For clarity, you could name this file
“OLD.bin” to distinguish it from the
upgraded application file.
Press the ENTER key or click the
button to continue.

The existing file
name of the GC
application file for
the connected GC
displays in the File
name field.

4. The Upload Application process begins. This
process usually takes about 15 minutes to
complete.
MON2000 automatically disconnects from
the GC after the Upload Application process
has finished.
5. Use the File > Exit menu to close MON2000.
Or, you can exit MON2000 by pressing the
ALT-F X keys, or click the
button on the
main window.

Offline Edit to Upload App. & Rename

JULY 2010

UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS

MON2000

E.3

E-3

UPGRADE USER-DEFINED APPLICATIONS
Follow the installation instructions provided in
Section 2.2 to upgrade the MON2000 software
and/or a standard application file.

Do not delete any existing MON2000 program
or GC application files from the PC hard drive.
The upgrade process uses information from
these files and automatically overwrites any
outdated program file.

Use the Update BIN utility that is installed
with the MON2000 software to upgrade a GC
application that contains user-defined data
(such as components). The Update BIN
program allows you to upgrade an application
that is either on disk or “live” at the GC
Controller. See the following sections for
details.
E.4

UPGRADE FROM DISK
To upgrade a user-defined application file
(*.BIN) located on your PC hard drive or on a
floppy disk,

It is recommended that you save a copy of
your application file before performing the
upgrade.

JULY 2010

Upgrade User-Defined Applications

E-4

UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS

MON2000

1. Launch the Update BIN software by either:
• clicking the
button and using
the Programs >MON2000 > Update BIN
menu
• double-clicking the Update BIN icon on
your PC desktop
2. The Update BIN software program launches
inside a DOS window.

3. Press the TAB key to access the
Communication menu.
4. Use the ARROW keys to select the File
Selection option, and then press ENTER.
5. The File Selection screen displays.

Upgrade from Disk

JULY 2010

MON2000

UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS

E-5

Use the TAB and ARROW keys to select the
desired application file from disk. This file
is the file you will be upgrading.
6. Press the TAB key to access the Upgrade
Config menu.
7. Use the ARROW keys to select the Merge
option, and then press ENTER.

8. The File Selection screen displays.

Use the TAB and ARROW keys to select the
desired application file from disk. This file
is the new application file you wish to merge
into the existing file (see Step 5).
9. The Merge screen displays.

JULY 2010

Upgrade from Disk

E-6

UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS

MON2000

10. Use the ARROW+ENTER keys to select the
desired application settings to upgrade.
Press the SHIFT + ENTER keys to select
multiple settings.
Press the F2 key to select all the available
settings.
Press the F3 key to clear your selected
settings.
11. Press the F4 key to begin the upgrade.
12. When the upgrade is done, press the ESC
key or use the Communication > Exit menu
to close the Update BIN program.
Ensure that you inspect the upgraded
application file for any errors.
E.4.1

Upgrade from GC Controller
To upgrade a user-defined application file
(*.BIN) currently being used by the GC
Controller,

It is recommended that you upload a copy of
your application file before performing the
upgrade.

1. Launch the Update BIN software by either:
• clicking the
button and using
the Programs >MON2000 > Update BIN
menu
• double-click the Update BIN icon on
your PC desktop

Upgrade from GC Controller

JULY 2010

MON2000

UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS

E-7

2. The Update BIN software program launches
inside a DOS window.

3. Use the ARROW keys to select the Connect
option, and then press ENTER.
4. The Connect screen displays, listing the
available GC units.

Use the ARROW keys to select the
appropriate GC, and then press ENTER.
5. Update BIN attempts to connect to the GC
Controller.
If the attempt fails, see Section E.4.2 for
information on configuring the
communications parameters for Update
BIN.

JULY 2010

Upgrade from GC Controller

E-8

UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS

MON2000

6. The File Selection screen displays.

Use the TAB and ARROW keys to select the
desired application file from disk. This file
is the new application file you wish to merge
into the existing file (see Step 5).
7. The Merge screen displays.

8. Use the ARROW+ENTER keys to select the
desired application settings to upgrade.
Press the SHIFT + ENTER keys to select
multiple settings.
Press the F2 key to select all the available
settings.
Press the F3 key to clear your selected
settings.
9. Press the F4 key to begin the upgrade.

Upgrade from GC Controller

JULY 2010

UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS

MON2000

E-9

10. When the upgrade is done, use the
Communications > Disconnect menu to
cease communications with the GC unit.
11. Press the ESC key or use the
Communication > Exit menu to close the
Update BIN program.
Ensure that you inspect the upgraded
application file for any errors.
E.4.2

Configure GC Connection
To configure the GC communications
parameters for the Update BIN software,
1. Use the Communication > Directory menu
to access a list of communication settings for
each GC unit.
2. The Directory screen displays.

3. Use the ARROW keys to select the desired
GC unit and then press the F2 key to edit its
communications parameters.
You can also press F3 to edit the modem
initialization string.

JULY 2010

Configure GC Connection

E-10

UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS

MON2000

4. The Parameters screen displays.

5. Use the ARROW keys and space bar to select
the desired parameter and toggle between
its options.
6. Press the ENTER key to accept your changes
or press the ESC key to cancel.
E.5

DISCONNECT POWER AND DISASSEMBLE

PERSONELL AND EQUIPMENT
Failure to follow the instructions below, may cause injury to personnel or damage equipment.
Before you remove the cover from the GC Controller or access its internal electronics, switch
OFF the AC power source to the GC Controller, either at the breaker box or the controlling
power source switch.
Also, disconnect the AC power cord from J21 before continuing working on the unit.

Disconnect Power and Disassemble

JULY 2010

MON2000

UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS

E-11

1. Disconnect AC power from the
GC Controller.
When you have access to the GC Controller
Terminal Board (TB) for field wiring
(accessed from the rear on rack-mount
versions and behind the front cover of
explosion-proof models) disconnect the AC
power cord from J21 before continuing
working on the unit.
2. For newer model 19-inch rack mount and
retrofit GC Controllers, proceed as follows:
(a) Remove the (right) side access panel that
is secured to the chassis with four
thumbscrews.
(b) Unplug all cables connected to the
boards in slots 2 through 6 of the Card
Cage Assembly in order to access the
SBC53 CPU Board.
(c) Proceed to Step 3 below.
For the explosion-proof GC Controller or
older rack mount GC Controllers, proceed as
follows:
(a) Access the GC Controller Terminal
Board for field wiring.
On the explosion-proof GC Controller,
remove outer housing bolts and lower
the cover on its bottom hinge. The TB
faces the front.
On rack mount GC Controllers, the TB is
exposed and faces the rear.
(b) Loosen the six thumbscrews that secure
the TB. Then gently unplug the TB from
its mating DIN connectors at the back,
top of the board.
(c) Lower the TB down (held in place by its
ground straps at the bottom of the board)
in order to expose the Card Cage
Assembly.
JULY 2010

Disconnect Power and Disassemble

E-12

UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS

MON2000

(d) Unplug the TB power supply cord from
its connection at the Card Cage
Assembly power supply.
(e) Loosen the four thumbscrews that
secure the Card Cage Assembly to the
chassis. Then remove the Card Cage
Assembly away from its chassis mount
so that it is easy to work on.
(f) Unplug all cables connected to the
boards in slots 2 through 6 of the Card
Cage Assembly in order to access the
SBC53 CPU Board.
3. Remove the SBC53 CPU Board from slot
number 2 (second from the top) of the Card
Cage Assembly.
E.6

REPLACE EPROMS/RESET CPU
1. For 2350 GC Controllers, locate the
EPROMs that will be replaced: U18 and
U19. They are near the card-connector edge
of the SBC53 CPU Board.

Carefully note which EPROMs are labeled ODD and
EVEN and which sockets hold them:
socket U18 EVEN EPROM P/N 8-2350-001
socket U19 ODD EPROM P/N 8-2350-002

2. Remove, one at a time, each of the old
EPROMs, and replace each with its upgrade
1.
EPROM.
3. Locate Jumper Pin Set J14. It is near the
two EPROMs you have just replaced.
Note that Jumper Pin Set J14 has a single
jumper shorting pins 1 and 2.

Replace EPROMS/Reset CPU

2.

3.

JULY 2010

UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS

MON2000

E-13

4. To reset the CPU registers, remove the
jumper from J14 pins 1 and 2, and place it
to short J14 pins 2 and 3.
5. After briefly shorting J14 pins 2 and 3,
remove the jumper again. Place it back in
its original position, shorting J14
pins 1 and 2.
E.7

REASSEMBLY PROCEDURES
1. Place and securely plug the SBC53 CPU
Board into slot number 2 of the Card Cage
Assembly.
2. Reconnect all ribbon cables that were
unplugged (see Section E.5).
Because the ribbon cables are arranged in
layers, it important to reconnect them in the
order listed below:
Table E-1 2350 GC Ribbon Cables to Connect

JULY 2010

Part
Number

System Interface
Board connection

Cable Originating
from Board

3-2350-063

J12

SBC53

3-2350-052

J9

SBC53

3-2350-062

J11

SBC53

3-2350-051

J4

SBC53

3-2350-064

J8

DSPI/O

3-2350-053

J10

DSPI/O

3-2350-054

J6

RTI1281

3-2350-055

J5

RTI1281

Reassembly Procedures

E-14

UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS

MON2000

3. Return and secure the Card Cage Assembly
its original position in the chassis mounting.
Tighten the four screws.
4. Return and secure the field wiring TB in its
original position. Tighten the six screws.
5. Reconnect the AC power cord to J21 on the
TB, and restore AC power to the 2350A GC
Controller.
E.8

SET-UP AND PROGRAMMING
The purpose of this procedure is to define the
CMOS table set-up and programming
requirements for the CPU assembly and
DiskOnChip.

E.8.1

Procedure
1. Install the blank DiskOnChip into socket
U1 on the CPU assembly, noting the
orientation of pin 1.
2. Plug the floppy drive cable into J10 on the
CPU assembly and plug the board into the
card cage.
3. Plug the keyboard cable into J1 on the CPU
assembly.
4. Turn on the power. When the video displays
on the monitor, press the DELETE button to
access the CMOS setup window.
(a) The Standard CMOS Setup window
displays. Press the ENTER button.
(b) Set time and date by either PAGE UP,
PAGE DOWN, or by entering the
appropriate number value. After making
the desired change, press ENTER.

Set-Up and Programming

JULY 2010

MON2000

UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS

E-15

(c) Change Drive C:\ to NONE by pressing
PAGE DOWN. Verify that Drive A:\ is the
only selected drive. Press ESCAPE, F10 (to
save changes), Y (to verify that you want
the changes to be made), then ENTER.
5. The CPU assembly will reboot and displays
the Systems Configuration window. The
speaker on the CPU will chirp and the
monitor will prompt:
“ENTER NEW DATE (mm-dd-yy)". Press
ENTER.
"ENTER NEW TIME:". Press ENTER.
The A:\> prompt is displayed. Verify that
the programming disk is the current
revision specified on the work order package
and it insert into the floppy drive. Type
INSTALL.
6. As the DiskOnChip is being programmed,
the following information is displayed:
A:\> SYS C:
SYSTEM TRANSFERRED
A:\>CD IMAGE
A:\IMAGE>COPY *.*C:\
BOS.EXE
PME16.EXE
SCANDISK.EXE
SCANDISK.INI
AUTOEXEC.BAT
BOSCHECK.EXE
6 FILE(S) COPIED
A:\IMAGE>CD\
A:\>
A:\>
7. At the A:\> prompt, type C:, then ENTER.
8. Type PME16, then ENTER.

JULY 2010

Procedure

E-16

UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS

MON2000

9. The Protected Mode Program screen
displays. Verify that a "cold start - initial"
message is displayed in the middle of the
screen and LED D2 is blinking on the CPU
assembly.
10. Press ESC to exit the program and power
down.
11. Carefully remove the cable from J1 and J10
to prevent cracking the connector housing.
Install the program label on the end of
DiskOnChip opposite the serial number.
E.8.2

Reprogramming the DiskOnChip
Reprogram the DiskOnChip using the
following instructions.
1. Install either the programmed DiskOnChip
into socket U1 on the CPU assembly (noting
the orientation of pin 1) or install the
complete CPU assembly into card cage.
2. Plug the floppy drive cable into J10 on the
CPU assembly and the keyboard cable into
J1 on the CPU assembly.
3. Turn on the power. The CPU assembly
reboots and displays the Systems
Configuration window. The speaker on the
CPU will chirp and the monitor will prompt
"ENTER NEW DATE (mm-dd-yy)". Press
ENTER

"ENTER NEW TIME:". Press ENTER.
The A:\> prompt displays. Verify that the
programming disk is the current revision
specified on the work order package and
insert into the floppy drive. Type C:, then
ENTER to change to the ‘C’ drive.

Reprogramming the DiskOnChip

JULY 2010

UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS

MON2000

E-17

4. After the C:\> prompt is displayed, type
ERASE *.*, then press ENTER. When
prompted “ARE YOU SURE?” Type Y, then
press ENTER.
5. At the C:\> prompt, type DIR, then press
ENTER. Verify that only the Command.com
file remains on the ‘C:’ drive, that the file
size is 54,645 bytes, and that there are
16,105,472 bytes free.
6. Type A:, then ENTER to change back to the
A:\ drive. Type INSTALL, then follow Steps
6 through 11 (see Section E.8.1).
E.8.3

GC Reassembly
Use the following instructions to reassemble
the GC Controller (CPU, PC/104 Bus and the
Modem).

Figure E-1 CPU, PC/104 and Modem

1. Place and securely plug the WinSystems
CPU Board into slot number 2 of the Card
Cage Assembly.
2. Reconnect all ribbon cables that were
unplugged.

JULY 2010

GC Reassembly

E-18

UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS

MON2000

3. Return and secure the Card Cage Assembly
back into the chassis mounting. Tighten the
four screws.
4. Return and secure the field wiring TB to the
original position. Tighten the six screws.
5. Reconnect the AC power cord to J21 on the
TB, and restore AC power to the GC
Controller.
E.9

CONNECT TO GC FOR UPGRADED APP.
1. Use MON2000 software to connect with the
GC unit.
Use the File > Connect menu to access this
function. See Section 2.10.1 for more
information.
2. Use MON2000 to download the newly
upgraded GC application to the connected
GC Controller.
(a) Use the File > Download menu to access
the Download CG Application File
dialog.

(b) Click the desired .bin file. The file name
appears in the File name data field.
(c) Click the
button or press the
ENTER key to download the selected
application file to the connected GC unit.
A progress bar displays, indicating the
completion status.

Connect to GC for Upgraded App.

JULY 2010

UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS

MON2000

E.10

E-19

GUIDE TO STANDARD APPLICATION FILES
This section of the appendix lists the various
standard application, or BIN files that have
been released by for the GC Controller.

E.10.1 Importance of Standard Application Files
After a new GC Controller has been loaded
with a standard application, the standard
application is customized by the entry of timed
events, component table entries, and other
operator entered information consistent with
the performance characteristics of the
chromatograph hardware to which the
Controller is connected and the needs of the
user. Thus the standard application becomes a
user application and differs from the factoryreleased, standard application from which it
originated.
At the time when software is upgraded,
including application files, it becomes
important to know which factory-released
standard application formed the basis of the
user application, so the user application can be
upgraded, too, with newer version of the
standard application file.
You can determine which standard application
formed the basis of the current user application
by inspecting various MON2000 screens while
connected to the GC (in most cases, you need
only inspect the System dialog).

JULY 2010

Guide to Standard Application Files

E-20

UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS

MON2000

E.10.2 Standard Applications v1.50 and Later
If you are using a GC Application that is
version 1.50 or later, you can quickly determine
the original standard application name by
viewing the variables listed in the System
dialog.
Use the Application > System menu to access
this dialog. In the System dialog, (see Table E2) find the value for the variable named CFG
Base Name, and locate it in the column labeled
“CFG Base Name”, then read the “Analyzer
Name (BIN file)” to determine the application
BIN file name.

Standard Applications v1.50 and Later

JULY 2010

UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS

MON2000

E-21

Table E-2 System Variables for Standard Application Files
Analyzer
Name
(BIN file)

Unit
Type

CFG Base
Name

System
Description

Max.
Archive
Averages

Stream
Sequence

2350_001

2350

USASTD1

2350 Standard 1,
64 avgs

64

8

2350_002

2350

USASTD2

2350 Standard 2,
32 avgs

32

8

2350_003

2350

USASTD3

2350 Standard 3,
128 avgs

128

5

2350_006

2350

USASTD6

2350 Std 6, 32
avgs, 10 strs

32

10

2350_007

2350

USASTD7

2350-7 12Str, 128
Avg, 260Mbus

128

12

2350ISO1

2350

ISOSTD1

2350 ISO Std 1,
64 avgs

64

8

2350ISO2

2350

ISOSTD2

2350 ISO Std 2,
32 avgs

32

8

2350ISO3

2350

ISOSTD3

2350 ISO Std 3,
128 avgs

128

8

2350FI02

2350

USSTDFILE02

12 stream with
files

204

12

2360_001

2360

USADUAL1

2360 test application

64

8

2350EXMB

2350

USSTDFILE01

Extended Modbus
4 strm plus cal

150

5

2360ISO1

2360

ISODUALSTD1

2360 ISO Std 1,
64 avgs

64

8

• Standard BTU applications use the BIN files 2350_001, 2350_002, and 2350_003
for 64, 32, and 128 averages respectively.
• The Extended Modbus application uses BIN file 2350EXMB.
• The standard dual application uses BIN file 2360_001.

JULY 2010

Standard Applications v1.50 and Later

E-22

UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS

MON2000

E.10.3 Standard Applications Prior to v1.50
For versions of GC Applications prior to version
1.50, the CFG Base Name variable did not
exist. Therefore, a combination of other
variables must be inspected to determine the
standard application that was used to
formulate the current user application.
To determine the standard application used to
create a user application prior to version 1.50,
compare the values of three variables from the
System dialog - Unit Type, Max Archive
Averages, and System Description — with the
values found in Table E-2. You will also need to
compare the maximum number of streams,
which can be determined from the Streams
option under the Application menu.
There is one more possible complication. If the
variable System Description was edited, it may
not be the same value as described earlier in
Table E-2. In such an instance, it would be
impossible to distinguish between the
2350_00n (i.e., USASTD1, USASTD2, and
USASTD3) and 2350ISOn (i.e., ISOSTD1,
ISOSTD2, and ISOSTD3) applications.
To overcome this complication, you can inspect
one more variable:
1. Use the Application> User Defined>
Selection menu to access the Selection
dialog.
2. In the Selection dialog, CVTABLE_pri will
be the first variable listed if the application
is one of the ISO applications.

Standard Applications Prior to v1.50

JULY 2010

MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC
F-1
MON2000________________________________________________________________________________

APPENDIX F, MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC
FA

F.1

INTRODUCTION – SIM_2251 & USER_MODBUS
GC Controller Modbus registers that may be of interest to the developer
are of two varieties, SIM_2251 and User_Modbus. Differences are
summarized in the following table.
Table F-1 Comparison of SIM_2251 and User_Modbus

SIM_2251

User_Modbus

Serial slave port.

Serial slave port.

Modified protocol that allows floating point
numbers to be transmitted over Modbus via
2251 emulation slave type.

The standard Gould Modbus protocol that
accommodates PLC Emulation LO-HI.

Nearly all register contents are predefined;
a few 9000-series registers can be userdefined (i.e., read-write).

Boolean (coils) are predefined. Numeric
(registers) are user-defined.

Variables assigned to registers can be listed
in contents of a PC-Config Report (for
instructions, see Section 2.16.3; for an
example report, see Appendix A,). For more
detail about register contents, see
Section F.2.1.

Variables assigned to registers can be listed
in contents of a PC-Config Report (for
instructions, see Section 2.16.3; for an
example report, see Appendix A,). Boolean
(coils) contents also listed in Section F.2.

When using the Modbus Test software, set
Register Mode to “DANIEL” to view register
contents (see Section 10.2.3).

When using the Modbus Test software, set
Register Mode to “PLC LH” to view register
contents (see Section 10.2.3).

F.1.1

NOTES ON USER_MODBUS
Section F.2 lists only variables included in the User_Modbus Boolean
Modbus registers. These registers are not user-defined and primarily
contain alarm flags, possibly useful for debugging purposes. To use the
Modbus Test software to view the contents of these registers, you will
need to set the Function parameter to “1 (Read Coil)”. See Section 10.2
through Section 10.4 for details on using the Modbus Test software.

JULY 2010

Introduction – SIM_2251 & User_Modbus

F-2
MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC
________________________________________________________________________________MON2000

All other User_Modbus registers can be defined by the user. To define
User_Modbus register contents (through assignment of variables), see
Section 5.18.4.
To obtain a complete list of register assignments, both SIM_2251 and
User_Modbus, use Model 700 to produce a PC-Config Report.

To print a PC-Config Report, see Section 2.16.3; for an example
report, see Appendix A, Section F.2 and Section F.2.1.

F.1.2

NOTES ON SIM_2251 MODBUS
To use the Modbus Test software and view the contents of SIM_2251
registers, you will need to set Register Mode to “Daniel”, as noted in Table
F-1.
To obtain a complete list of register assignments, both SIM_2251 and
User_Modbus, use MON2000 to produce a PC-Config Report.

Introduction – SIM_2251 & User_Modbus

JULY 2010

MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC
F-3
MON2000________________________________________________________________________________

F.2

USER_MODBUS REGISTER LIST

JULY 2010

User_Modbus Register List

F-4
MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC
________________________________________________________________________________MON2000

User_Modbus Register List

JULY 2010

MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC
F-5
MON2000________________________________________________________________________________

JULY 2010

User_Modbus Register List

F-6
MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC
________________________________________________________________________________MON2000

F.2.1

SIM_2251 MODBUS REGISTER LIST

The information in the following tables is derived from engineering specification number
ES-17128-005, “Model 2251 Enhanced Specification Chromatograph Controller Modbus
Communication Indices” and has been updated for the 2350A GC Controllers.

User_Modbus Register List

JULY 2010

MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC
F-7
MON2000________________________________________________________________________________

JULY 2010

User_Modbus Register List

F-8
MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC
________________________________________________________________________________MON2000

User_Modbus Register List

JULY 2010

MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC
F-9
MON2000________________________________________________________________________________

JULY 2010

User_Modbus Register List

F-10
MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC
________________________________________________________________________________MON2000

User_Modbus Register List

JULY 2010

MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC
F-11
MON2000________________________________________________________________________________

JULY 2010

User_Modbus Register List

F-12
MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC
________________________________________________________________________________MON2000

User_Modbus Register List

JULY 2010

MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC
F-13
MON2000________________________________________________________________________________

JULY 2010

User_Modbus Register List

F-14
MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC
________________________________________________________________________________MON2000

User_Modbus Register List

JULY 2010

MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC
F-15
MON2000________________________________________________________________________________

JULY 2010

User_Modbus Register List

F-16
MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC
________________________________________________________________________________MON2000

This page is intentionally left blank.

User_Modbus Register List

JULY 2010

WARRANTY CLAIM PROCEDURES
To make a warranty claim, you, the Purchaser, must:
1. Provide Daniel Measurement and Control, Inc. or Rosemount
Analytical, Inc. with proof of the Date of Purchase and proof of the
Date of Shipment of the product in question.
2. Return the product to Daniel Measurement Services (DMS) within 12
months of the date of original shipment of the product, or within 18
months of the date of original shipment of the product to destinations
outside of the United States. The Purchaser must prepay any shipping
charges. In addition, the Purchaser is responsible for insuring any
product shipped for return, and assumes the risk of loss of the product
during shipment.
3. To obtain warranty service or to locate the nearest DMS office, sales
office, or service center, call (713) 827-6314, fax a request to (713) 8276312, or write to:
Daniel Measurement Services
11100 Brittmore Park Drive
Houston, Texas 77041
You can also contact DMS via www.emersonprocess.com/daniel.
4. When contacting DMS for product service, the Purchaser is asked to
provide information as indicated on the following page entitled
"Customer Repair Report".
5. For product returns from locations outside the United States, it will be
necessary for you to obtain the import consignment address so that
DMS's customs broker can handle the importation with the U.S.
Customs Service.
6. DMS offers both on call and contract maintenance service designed to
afford single source responsibility for all its products.
7. DMS reserves the right to make changes at any time to any product to
improve its design and to insure the best available product.

This page is intentionally left blank.

CUSTOMER REPAIR REPORT
FOR SERVICE, COMPLETE THIS FORM, AND RETURN IT ALONG WITH THE AFFECTED EQUIPMENT
TO CUSTOMER SERVICE AT THE ADDRESS INDICATED BELOW.
COMPANY NAME: ___________________________________________________________________________
TECHNICAL CONTACT:_____________________________________ PHONE: _________________________
REPAIR P. O. #:________________________ IF WARRANTY, UNIT S/N: _____________________________
INVOICE ADDRESS: __________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SHIPPING ADDRESS: _________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
RETURN SHIPPING METHOD: _________________________________________________________________
EQUIPMENT MODEL #:____________________ S/N:__________________FAILURE DATE: _____________
DESCRIPTION OF PROBLEM: __________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
WHAT WAS HAPPENING AT TIME OF FAILURE? _______________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
ADDITIONAL COMMENTS: ____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
REPORT PREPARED BY:__________________________________ TITLE: _____________________________
IF YOU REQUIRE TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE, PLEASE FAX OR WRITE THE CUSTOMER SERVICE
DEPARTMENT AT:
DANIEL MEASUREMENT SERVICES
DIVISION OF EMERSON PROCESS MANAGEMENT
ATTN: CUSTOMER SERVICE
11100 BRITTMOORE PARK DRIVE
HOUSTON, TEXAS 77041

PHONE: (713) 827-6314
FAX: (713) 827-6312

FOR FASTEST SERVICE CONTACT DANIEL MEASUREMENT SERVICES VIA OUR WEBSITE:
www.emersonprocess.com/daniel

This page is intentionally left blank.

Daniel Measurement and Control, Inc., Daniel Measurement Services, Inc., and
Rosemount Analytical Inc., Divisions of Emerson Process Management, reserves the
right to make changes to any of its products or services at any time without prior
notification in order to improve that product or service and to supply the best product
or service possible.
www.emersonprocess.com



Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-702
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 7.0 (Windows)
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 7.2
Modify Date                     : 2010:10:07 08:41:03-05:00
Create Date                     : 2010:07:26 10:04:11Z
Metadata Date                   : 2010:10:07 08:41:03-05:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 00522.book
Creator                         : WBass
Document ID                     : uuid:97302a26-b23f-4b71-949c-4637e065aaf3
Instance ID                     : uuid:cd05d079-0eee-44be-9978-db5bd64fbf23
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 516
Author                          : WBass
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu